2 PDF

Ohaus Corporation
29 Hanover Road
Florham Park, NJ
07932-0900
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Balances
Go
Bac
k
Hei
p
Prin
0%
t WE
IGH
T
>O/T CO
<
0.0
NT
RA
ST
100
MO
VE G
HIG RAM
HL S
IGH
T
0 %
MA STAB
IN
ME LE
NU Ent
er
OHAU
S ®
>O/T
<
Go
Bac
k
Hel
p
Prin
0%
t
WE
IGH
T
>O/T
< CO
NT
RA
ST 0.0
MO
VE G
HIG RAM
HL S
IGH
00 100
%
T
MA STAB
IN L
ME E
NU Ent
er
OHAU
S ®
>O/T
<
Ohaus Corporation, 29 Hanover Road, Florham Park, New Jersey, 07932, USA
Declaration of Conformity We, Ohaus Corporation, declare under our sole responsibility that the balance models listed below
marked with “CE” - are in conformity with the directives and standards mentioned.
Konformitätserkärung Wir, Ohaus Corporation, erklären in alleiniger Verantwortung, dass die untenstehenden Waagentypen
gekennzeichnet mit “CE” - mit den genannten Richtlinien und Norman übereinstimmen.
Déclaration de conformité Nous, Ohaus Corporation, déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité, que les types de balance ci-
dessous cité - munis de la mention «CE» - sont conformes aux directives et aux normes mentionnées ci-après.
Declaración de Conformidad Nostras, Ohaus Corporation, declaramos bajo responsabilidad exclusiva que los modelos de
balanzas indicados a continuación - con el distintivo ,CE’ - están conformes con las directivas y normas citadas.
Dichiarazione di conformità Noi, Ohaus Corporation, U.S.A, dichiariamo sotto nostra unica responsabilità, che i tipi di bilance
specificati di seguito - contrassegnati con la marcatura “CE” - sono conformi alle direttive e norme citate.
Balance Type/Waagentyp/Type de balance/Modelo de balanza/Tipo di biliancia Explorer and Voyager
Marked with: Directive Standard

gekennzeichnet mit: Richtlinie Norm
munis de la mention: Directive Norme
con el distintivo: Directiva Norma
contrassegnati con la Direttiva Norma
marcatura:
EU 73/23 Low Voltage IEC1010-1 & EN60950:1992 Safety Regulations

EU 73/23 Niederspannung IEC1010-1 & EN60950:1992 Sicherheitsbestimmungen
EU 73/23 Basse tension IEC1010-1 & EN60950:1992 Consignes de sécurité
EU 73/23 Baja tensión IEC1010-1 & EN60950:1992 Disposiciones sobre seguridad
EU 73/23 Bassa tensione IEC1010-1 & EN60950:1992 Prescrizioni . di sicurezza
EU 89/336, 92/31, 93/68 EN55022:1987 Emissions

Year of attachment of Electromagnetic compatibility EN45501:1992, EN50082-1:1992 Immunity
the CE mark EU 89/336, 92/31, 93/68 EN55022:1987 Funkstörungen
Jahr der ersten elektromagnetische EN45501:1992, EN50082-1:1992 Immunität
Eichung EU 89/336, 92/31, 93/68 EN55022:1987 Emissions parasites
Année de la premère Compatibilité électromagnétique EN45501:1992, EN50082-1:1992 Immunité
vérification EU 89/336, 92/31, 93/68 EN55022:1987 Radiointerferencias
Año de la primera Compatibilidad electromagnética EN45501:1992, EN50082-1:1992 Inmunidad
verificación EU 89/336, 92/31, 93/68 EN55022:Verträglichkeit 1987 Radiointerferenze
annodella prima Compatibilità elettromagnetica EN45501:1992, EN50082-1:1992 Immunità
verifica
EU 90/384 NAWI EN45501:1992 Non Automatic Weighing Instruments

96 EU 90/384 FNSW EN45501:1992 für nicht selbsttätige Waagen
EU 90/384 BFNA EN45501:1992 balances à fonctionnement non automatique
122 M T2914 EU 90/384 PBNA EN45501:1992 para balanzas no automátäcas
EU 90.384 BFNA EN45501:1992 per bilance a funzionamento non automatics
ISO 9001 Certificate for Ohaus Corporation. Ohaus Corporation, USA, was examined and evaluated in 1994 by the Bureau Veritas
Quality International, BVQI, and was awarded the ISO 9001 certificate. This certifies that Ohaus Corporation, USA, has a quality system
that conforms with the international standards for quality management and quality assurance (ISO 9000 series). Repeat audits are carried
out by BVQI at intervals to check that the quality system is operated in the proper manner.
ISO 9001-Zertifikat für Ohaus Corporation. Die Firma Ohaus Corporation, USA, wurde 1994 durch die Bureau Veritas Quality
International BVQI geprüft, und erhielt das ISO 9001 Zertifikat. Dieses bescheinigt, dass Ohaus Corporation, USA über ein Qualitätssystem
verfügt, welches den internationalen Normen für Qualitätsmanagement und Qualitátssicherung (ISO 9000er-Reihe) entspricht. Anlässlich
von Wiederhol-Audits durch die BVQI wird periodisch überprüft, ob das Qualitätssystem zweckmässig gehandhabt.
Certificat ISO 9000 pour Ohaus Corporation. La société Ohaus Corporation, USA, a été contrôlée en 1994 par Bureau Veritas
Quality International BVQI et a obtenu le certificat, degré ISO 9001. Celui-ci atteste que Ohaus Corporation, USA, dispose d’un système
qualité correspondant aux normes internationales pour la gestion de la qualité et pour I’assurance qualité (degré ISO 9000). Des audits
réguliers effectués par la BVQI vérifient si le système qualité est appliqué de facon appropriée.
Certificado ISO 9001 para Ohaus Corporation. La firma Ohaus Corporation, USA, ha sido inspeccionada por la Bureau Veritas
Quality International (BVQI) y ha obtenido el certificado ISO 9001. Esto acredita que Ohaus Corporation, USA, dispone de un sistema de
calidad que cumple las normas internacionales para gestión y garantfa de calidad (ISO serie 9000). Con ocasión de las inspecciones de
repetibilidad por parte de la BVQI, se comprueba periódicamente si el sistema de calidad se manipula de forma correcta.
Certificato ISO 9001 per la Ohaus Corporation. ll sistema di garanzia della qualità della Società Ohaus Corporation, USA è certificato
ISO 9001 sin dal 1994 dall Bureau Veritas Quality International BVQI, e così fomice la dimostrazione che il suo sistema die Garanzia Qualità
soddisfa i massimi requisite. ll sistema della garanzia della qualità Ohaus Corporation viene verificato periodicamente dall BVQI, dando cosi
evidenza di.
James Ohaus John Enterline

President Marketing Manager
Notice
Certified scales,scales used for legal applications have the general type designation E...5 / V...5 and EU type Approval (T2914). The year
of the initial verification is shown next to the CE mark. Such scales are verified in the factory and carry the "M" mark on the actual scale and
the packaging. The year of the initial verification is shown next to the CE mark. If the letter M is shown against a solid background, the scale
may be put into operation immediately. Should the background be partitioned and hatched, the scale must be verified at its place of use by
the certified Ohaus service. If national regulations limit the duration of the validity of the verification certificate in individual countries, the end
user of such a scale is personally responsible for arranging the repeat verification in good time.
Hinweise
Geeichte/eichpflichtige Waagen tragen die allgemeine Typenbezeichnung E... 5 / V...5. Für sie liegt eine EU Bauartzulassung vor (T2914).
Das Jahr der ersten ist neben dem CE Zeichen aufgeführt. Solche Waagen sind ab Werk geeich und tragen die Kennzeichnung "M" auf dem
Gerät selbst und auf der Verpackung. Erscheint der Buchstab M auf vollem Grund, darf die Waage sofort in Betrieb genommen werden. Ist
der Grund geteilt und schraffiert, muss die Waage am Verwendungsort durch den zertifizierten Ohaus Service ortsgeeicht werden. Sofern
gemäss den nationalen Vorschriften in den einzelnen Staaten die Güitigkeitsdauer der Eichung beschränkt ist, ist der Betreiber einer soichen
Waage Für die rechtzeitige Nacheichung selbst verantwortlich.
Remarques
Les balances vérifiées/admissibles à la vérification portent la désignation de modèle générale E...5 / V ... 5. Elles font l’objet d’une
approbation de modèle UE (T2914). L’année de la vérification primitive est indiquée à côté de la marque CE. Ces balances sont vérifidées
d’origine et portent la marque "M" sur I’appareil lui-même et sur l’emballage, Si la lettre M apparaît sur un fond totalement vert, la balance
peut être mise en service immédiatement. Si le fond est divisé et hachuré, la balance doit être vérifiée sur le lieu d’ustilisation par le service
après-vente Ohaus certifié. Dans les pays où la durée de validité de la vérification est limitée par des prescriptions nationales, l’utilisateur
est lui-même responsable de la vérification ultérieure d’une telle balance en temps voulu.
Notas
Las balanzas verificadas/verificables llevan la designatión general E...5 / V ...5 y cuentan con una aprobación de modelo UE (T2914). EL
año de la primera verficación está indicado al lado del distintivo CE. Estas balanzas están verificadas en fábrica y Ilevan la designatión "M"
sobre el propio aparato y sobre el embalaje. Cuando la letra M aparece sobre fondo sólido, la balanza se puede poner inmediatamente en
funcionamiento. Si el fondo está dividido y rayado, la balanza ha de ser verificada en el lugar de uso por el sevicio técnico Ohaus certificado.
Si la duración de la validez de la verificación está limitada de acuerdo con las normas de los distintos países, el propio usuario de tal balanza
es responsable de la verificación posterior a su debido tiempo.
Avvertenza
Le bilance approvate hanno la denominazione del modello E... 5 / V ...5. Per esse esiste un’appprovazione CE del tipo. L’anno delia prima
verifica è indicato a fianco della marcatura CE. I tipi marcati con un contrassegno "M" su sfondo verde pieno possono essere impiegati da
subito. I tipi marcati con ii contrassegno "M" su sfondo nero/barrato diagonalmente dovranno essere verificati sul luogo d’installazione da
parte d’un tecnico autorizzato dal Servizio Assistenza Ohaus o ispettore dell’Ufficio Metrico. Queste bilance sono state verificate in fabbrica
e recano il contrassegno "M" sull’apparecchio stesso, e sull’imballo. É obbligo dell’untente denunciare la detenzione dello str umento all’ufficio
metrico competente per territorio e sottoporio alia prescritta verifica periodica come da disposizioni ministeriali.
NOTE: THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A
DIGITAL DEVICE, PURSUANT TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES.
THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST HARMFUL INTERFERENCE
WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT. THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES,
USES, AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND, IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL, MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS.
OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE IN
WHICH CASE THE USER WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE.
THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS A LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM
DIGITAL APPARATUS AS SET OUT IN THE INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD ENTITLED “DIGI-
TAL APPARATUS”, ICES-003 OF THE DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS.
CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE RESPECTE LES LIMITES DE BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES APPLICABLES AUX
APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE CLASSE A PRESCRITES DANS LA NORME SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR :
“APPAREILS NUMERIQUES”, NMB-003 EDICTEE PAR LE MINISTRE DES COMMUNICATIONS.
Unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment are not permitted.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
OVERVIEW OF CONTROLS ....................................................................................................................... 1

1. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR BALANCE ...................................................................................................... 2
1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................. 2
2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................................ 2
2.1 Unpacking and Checking the Standard Equipment ...................................................................................... 2
2.2 Selecting the Location .................................................................................................................................. 3
2.3 Setting Up and Leveling the Balance ............................................................................................................ 3
2.4 Installing Cover Plate and Pan ..................................................................................................................... 4
2.5 Installing Wind Shield ................................................................................................................................... 4
2.6 Connecting Power ........................................................................................................................................ 4
3. OPERATING YOUR BALANCE ................................................................................................................... 5

3.1 Main Menu ................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 Turning on the Balance ................................................................................................................................ 6
3.3 Calibration .................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.3.1 Auto Calibration (AutoCalTM) ..................................................................................................................... 7
3.3.2 Span Calibration ....................................................................................................................................... 8
3.3.3 Linearity calibration ................................................................................................................................... 9
3.3.4 User Calibration ...................................................................................................................................... 10
3.3.5 Calibration Test ...................................................................................................................................... 11
3.4 Setting Measuring Unit ............................................................................................................................... 12
3.5 Basic Weighing ........................................................................................................................................... 13
3.6 Parts Counting ........................................................................................................................................... 14
3.6.1 Easy Count ............................................................................................................................................. 14
3.6.2 Advanced Counting ................................................................................................................................ 15
3.7 Filling ..................................................................................................................................................... 16
3.8 Animal Weighing ........................................................................................................................................ 17
3.9 Check Weighing ......................................................................................................................................... 18
3.10 Differential Weighing .................................................................................................................................. 19
3.11 Formulation ................................................................................................................................................ 21
3.12 Quick Check Weighing ............................................................................................................................... 24
3.13 Statistics ..................................................................................................................................................... 25
3.14 Density ..................................................................................................................................................... 26
3.14.1 Balance Preparation with Density Kit .................................................................................................... 26
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)
3.14.2 Solid Density Determinations ................................................................................................................... 27

3.14.3 Improving the accuracy of the Result of Solid Density Determinations ..................................................... 30
3.14.4 Liquid Density Determinations .................................................................................................................. 30
3.15 Library ..................................................................................................................................................... 31
3.16 Printing Data .............................................................................................................................................. 32
4. SETTING UP YOUR BALANCE ................................................................................................................. 34
4.1 Readout ..................................................................................................................................................... 34
4.2 Interface ..................................................................................................................................................... 35
4.3 Print Option ................................................................................................................................................ 36
4.4 Setup GLP .................................................................................................................................................. 39
4.5 Set Time/Date ............................................................................................................................................ 40
4.6 Auto Calibration .......................................................................................................................................... 41
4.7 Print current Settings .................................................................................................................................. 42
4.8 Reset ..................................................................................................................................................... 43
4.9 Lock Out ..................................................................................................................................................... 44
4.10 Custom Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 45
4.11 Menu Lock-Out Protection .......................................................................................................................... 46
4.12 Legal for Trade (LFT) ................................................................................................................................. 47
5. CARE AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................................... 48

5.1 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................................... 48
5.2 RS232 Interface ......................................................................................................................................... 49
5.3 Error Codes List ......................................................................................................................................... 52
5.4 Information Messages ................................................................................................................................ 52
5.5 Service Information .................................................................................................................................... 53
5.6 Replacement Parts ..................................................................................................................................... 53
5.7 Accessories ................................................................................................................................................ 53
5.8 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 54
ii
OVERVIEW OF CONTROLS
1
6
8
WEIGHT
2 0%
Go Back 100%
9
3
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
7
GRAMS STABLE
CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU
4 10
Go
Ba
ck
He
lp
Print
0%
WE
5 >O/T
IGH
T
11
< CO
NT
RA
ST 0.0
MO
VE G
HIG RAM
HLI S
GH
00 100
%
T
MA STAB
IN LE
ME
NU En
ter
OHAU
S® >O/T
<
12
No. Designation Function
1 LCD display on off button.
2 Go Back button Permits going back in menus.
3 Help button Provides additional information on subject displayed in the current menu.
4 Print button When pressed, prints data either on an external printer or computer.
5
5 >O/T< button When pressed, sets balance to zero.
6 button When pressed, travels up through menu options and selects alpha numeric characters.
7 button When pressed, travels down through menu options and selects alphanumeric characters.
8 button When pressed, travels to the left through displays.
9 button When pressed, travels to the right through displays.
10 Enter button When pressed, accepts item on display.
11 Leveling feet Used to level the balance.
12 Leveling indicator Indicates leveling position of the balance.
1
1. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR BALANCE
Please read through this section carefully, as it contains important information for safe and economical operation of
your Voyager Balance.
1.1 Introduction
Thank you for deciding to purchase a Voyager Balance from Ohaus. Thanks to a new modular design, your Voyager
Balance lets you adapt the balance to your changing needs. Remote displays, upgraded displays which can be
table, wall or tower mounted are available as accessories. It offers a high level of operating convenience and useful
functions to make accurate measurements. A new, large, graphic LCD panel with a 240 x 128 pixel resolution is a
Back lighted, Cold Cathode Fluorescent (CCFL) type. Pop up displays makes operation of the balance extremely
simple. The use of the up/down, left/right arrow panel buttons enable selections from the menus. The Enter button
on the front panel when pressed permits any highlighted menu item to be enabled. A Go Back button permits going
back up to three levels in any menu. A Help button provides assistance when required. Panel controls are clearly
marked as to their function with large Tare buttons on either side of the front panel. Operation and setup of the
balance is straightforward and easy. The Voyager Balance is available in a variety of full scale capacities ranging
from 62 grams to 8,100 grams with dual range models available. Legal for Trade versions are available.
Behind your instrument stands OHAUS, a leading manufacturer of scales, balances and analytical measuring
instruments. Our Aftermarket Department is staffed with trained instrument technicians and is dedicated to provide
you, the customer, with the fastest service possible in the event your instrument requires servicing. OHAUS also has
a Customer Service Department to answer any inquiries regarding applications and accessories.
To ensure you make full use of the possibilities offered by your Voyager balance, we advise you to read through
these operating instructions very carefully.
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 Unpacking and Checking the Standard Equipment

Open the package and remove the instrument and the accessories. Check the completeness of the delivery. The
following accessories are part of the standard equipment of your new Voyager balance.
Analytical Capacity
Equipment 62g, 110g, 210, 410, 610g - 4100g 6100g - 8100g
210g 210/100g 410/100g 4100/1000g
• Pan 3.5 ✓
• Pan 4.75" ✓
• Pan 6" (0.01g units) ✓
• Pan 8" (0.1g units) ✓ ✓
• Draft Shield ✓ ✓
• Wind Shield (6" Pan Units, 0.01g) ✓
• AC Power Adapter ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• Instruction Manual ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• Warranty Card ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• Remove packing material from the instrument.
• Check the instrument for transport damage. Immediately inform your Ohaus dealer if you have complaints or
parts are missing.
• Store all parts of the packaging. This packaging guarantees the best possible protection for the tranport of your
instrument.
2
2.2 Selecting the Location
The balance should always be used in an environment which is free from excessive air currents, corrosives, vibration,
and temperature or humidity extremes. These factors will affect displayed weight readings.
DO NOT install the balance:
• Next to open windows or doors causing drafts or

rapid temperature changes.
• Near air conditioning or heat vents.

Go
Back
Heip
Print
0%
WEI
GHT
>O/T CON
< TRA
ST
0.0 100
MOV
GRA
E HIGH
MS
LIGH
T
STA
0 %
MAIN BLE
MEN
U Enter
OHAUS
®
>O/T
<
• Near vibrating, rotating or reciprocating equipment.
• Near magnetic fields or equipment that generates

magnetic fields.
• On an unlevel work surface.

Go
Back
Heip
Print
0%
WEI
GHT
>O/T
• Allow sufficient space around the instrument for

< CON
TRA
ST
0.0 100
MOV
E HIGGRA
HLIGMS
HT
STA
0 %
MAI BLE
N MEN
U Enter
OHAUS
®
>O/T
<
Go
Back
Heip
Print
0%
ease of operation and keep away from radiating heat

WEI
GHT
>O/T CON
< TRA
ST
0.0 100
MOV
GRA
E HIGH
MS
LIGH
T
STA
0 %
MAIN BLE
MEN
U Enter
OHAUS >O/T
sources.
®
<
2.3 Setting Up and Leveling the Balance

Exact horizontal positioning and stable installation are prerequisites for repeatable results. To compensate small
irregularites or inclinations at the location, the instrument can be leveled.
For exact horizontal positioning, the balance is equipped
with a level indicator located at the front on the control
panel and two leveling feet located at the rear of the
balance.
Position the balance in the intended operating location.

Adjust the leveling feet at the rear of the balance until the
air bubble in the indicator is centered.
Leveling
Indicator
Leveling NOTE: The instrument should be leveled each time its
Go
Bac
k
He
lp
Prin
0%
t
WEI
GH
T
>O/T
0.0
Foot location is changed.
< CO
NT
RA
ST
MOV
E HI GRAM
GH
LIGHS
00 100%
T
MAI STAB
N M LE
EN
U Ent
er
OHA
US ®
>O/T
<
3
2.4 Installing Cover Plate and Pan
Balances in the range of 62g to 410g are shipped with
the pan and the protective cover plate not installed. On
balances equipped with a draft shield, slide open the side
door and place the cover plate into position. Then, insert
the pan into the center hole which is the measuring
transducer. Higher capacity balances with 6" or 8" pans
do not have a cover plate.
Pri
nt
He
Go
lp
Ba
ck
0%
WEI
GH
Pan
T
>O/T
<
CO
NT
RA
ST 0.0
MOV
E HI GRAM
GH
LIGHS
00 100%
T
ST
MAI AB
N M LE
EN
U En
ter
OHA
US ®
Cover Plate
>O/T
<
2.5 Installing Wind Shield

On 610g to 4100g balances with 0.01g resolution, a wind
Wind Shield shield is required to reduce the possibility of air currents
from disturbing the pan. When the wind shield is in
place, air currents are deflected up over the pan.
Make sure the wind shield is firmly snapped into place.
Go
Ba
ck
He
ip
Print
0%
WE
IGH
T
>O/T CO
<
0.0
NT
RA
ST
100
MO
VE G
HIG RAM
HL S
IGH
T
0 %
MA STAB
IN
ME LE
NU En
ter
OHAU
S® >O/T
<
2.6 Connecting Power

Connect the AC Adapter supplied to the three pin con-
nector located at the rear of the balance.
The balance is now ready for operation.
AC Adapter Connection
Rear of Balance
4
3. OPERATING YOUR BALANCE
3.1 Main Menu
The Voyager balance has one main menu from which all selections are made. Shown below is the normal weighing
display screen and the main menu screen.
WEIGHT MAIN MENU
Go Back Go Back
0% 100% CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
Help
0.00
Help
Print Enter Print Enter

CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY
GRAMS STABLE
Weighing Display Screen Main Menu Screen
MENU SELECTION
The menus shown below are selected from the main menu screen by using the arrow buttons and pressing ENTER.
The screens shown are all of the primary selections that can be made. By using the arrow buttons, further selections
can be made in each menu to set parameters.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE MAIN UNITS
CHANGE MENU MAIN MENU
SETUP BALANCE
BASIC WEIGHING MILLIGRAMS READOUT
PARTS COUNTING GRAMS INTERFACE
FILLINGMODE
CHANGE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE KILOGRAMS
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE PRINT OPTION
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
ANIMAL WEIGHING PENNY WEIGHTS SETUP GLP
CHECK WEIGHING CARATS SET TIME/DATE
DIFF WEIGHING OUNCES AUTOCAL ENABLE
FORMULATION TROY OUNCES PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS
QUICK CHECK GRAINS MENU RESET
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY CUSTOM CALIBRATION LIBRARY CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION ;LIBRARY
STATISTICS HONG KONG TAELS LOCK OUT
DENSITY SOFTWARE VERSION
SINGAPORE TAELSEIGH
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE MAIN UNITS
CHANGE MENU MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
PARTS COUNTING HONG KONG TAELS INTERFACE
FILLING SINGAPORE TAELS PRINT OPTION
ANIMALMODE
CHANGE WEIGHINGCHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE ROC TAELS
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE SETUP GLP
CHECK WEIGHING MOMMES SET TIME/DATE
DIFF WEIGHING POUNDS AUTOCAL ENABLE
FORMULATION POUND OUNCES PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS
QUICK CHECK NEWTONS RESET
STATISTICS TICALS MENU LOCK OUT
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY CUSTOM CALIBRATION LIBRARY CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION ;LIBRARY
DENSITY SOFTWARE VERSION
CUSTOM UNITS
EXIT TO WEIGH EXIT TO WEIGH
EXIT TO WEIGH
MAINMENU
CUSTOM MENU MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE MAIN MENU
LIBRARY 0.00% USED
SETUP CUSTOM MENU SPAN EXIT TO WEIGH
EXIT TO WEIGH
EXIT TO WEIGH LINEARITY
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE USER MODE
CHANGE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY
5
3.2 Turning On the Balance
The Voyager balance is ready to operate after the the installation procedures are performed. When the balance is
first turned on and it completes its checks, and is calibrated, it can be used to weigh or tare materials without setting
the menus. The balance is preset at the factory to weigh in grams
It is recommended that you read this manual carefully and set the balance to operate for your specific applications
using the procedures in Chapter 4 Setting up Your Balance and calibrate the balance before using.
LCD Display On/Off

To turn the balance LCD display ON, press the ON/OFF button (circled button with an I inside) located at the upper
left-hand corner of the panel once. To turn OFF, press button again.
Stabilization
Before initially using the balance, allow time for it to adjust to its new environment. The balance only requires to be
plugged in to warm up. Recommended warm up period is twenty (20) minutes. The internal circuits of the balance
are powered whenever it is plugged into a power source.
3.3 Calibration
Voyager balances offer a choice of five calibration methods: Automatic Calibration (AutoCalTM), Span Calibration, User
Calibration, Linearity Calibration, and Calibration Test.
• Span - Span calibration ensures that the balance reads correctly within specifications using
two weight values: zero and a weight value at 100% of the balance’s full capacity.
• Linearity - Linearity calibration minimizes deviation between actual and displayed weights within
the balance’s weighing range. Three weight values are used: zero, a weight value at
midpoint of the balances weighing range, and a weight value at or near the balance’s
specified capacity.
• User - User calibration is a method where the balance can be calibrated using a mass of
known value by entering that value into the balance.
• Calibration Test - Calibration test allows the stored calibration data to be tested against the current
mass being used for the test.
• AutoCalTM Automatic calibration (AutoCalTM) of the balance is accomplished by an internal

mass.
Calibration Menu Protection

NOTES: CALIBRATION MASSES
• Calibration may be locked out to prevent unauthorized
personnel from changing calibration. If calibration has LINEARITY SPAN ONLY
been locked out, you can only access Internal Weight CAPACITY MASSES MASSES
Calibration and Calibration Test. 62g 20g/50g 50g
110g 50g/100g 100g
• To lock out calibration menu, after calibration, refer to 210g 100g/200g 200g
the section titled Menu Lock-Out Protection. 410g 200g/400g 400g
610g 200g/500g 500g
• Linearity, Span and User calibration are disabled for
2100g 1000g/2000g 2000g
Type Approved/LFT balances.
4100g 2000g/4000g 4000g
Calibration Masses 6100g 2000g/5000g 5000g
Before beginning calibration, make sure masses are 8100g 4000g/8000g 8000g
available. If you begin calibration and realize calibration
masses are not available, exit the menu. The balance Masses must meet or exceed ASTM Class 1 Tolerance.
will retain previously stored calibration data. Calibration Calibration masses are available as accessories.
should be performed as necessary to ensure accurate
weighing. Masses required to perform the procedures
are listed in the adjacent table.
6
3.3.1 Auto Calibration (AutoCalTM)
On Voyager balances equipped with the AutoCalTM feature, calibration can be accomplished using an internal calibra-
tion mass. Auto calibration can be performed at any time providing the balance has warmed up to operating tempera-
ture.
PROCEDURE
WEIGHT
• Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
• Press Enter button.
• Using the arrow buttons, select CALIBRATION.

GRAMS STABLE
• Press or arrow button and select AUTOCAL.
• Clear the pan.

MAIN MENU
• Press Enter button, screen displays PLEASE WAIT,

CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE the balance is automatically calibrated and then re-
MAIN MENU
turns to a weighing mode.
CALIBRATE
SPAN
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION RETURN TO
LINEARITY
USER MODE
CHANGE
WEIGH
CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
NOTE:
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
AutoCalTM calibration uses an internal mass in the
EXIT TO WEIGH balance for calibration and is done automatically when
selected.
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
INTERNAL CALIBRATION
SPAN
LINPLEASEERARITY
PLEASE CLEAR THE PAN
USER MODE
CHANGE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
AND PRESS < ENTER > ...
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
SPAN INTERNAL CALIBRATION
LINPLEASEERARITY WEIGH
PLEASE WAIT . . .
USER MODE
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
7
3.3.2 Span Calibration
Span calibration normally requires that calibration be made using a mass equal to the full capacity of the balance,
however, the Voyager balance can be calibrated using other lesser values as specified on the display.
PROCEDURE
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100% • Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.

Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
• Press or arrow button and select SPAN.
MAIN MENU • Press Enter button.

• Clear the pan and press Enter button.
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
SPAN • Place indicated mass value on pan and press Enter
LINEARITY
CUSTOM MENU USER MODE
CHANGE
CALIBRATION RETURNCHANGE
TO UNITS SET BALANCE button.
WEIGH
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
• Display indicates if calibration was successful and the
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY difference between the last calibration.
• Press any button, balance returns to weighing mode.
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE • Remove masses from the pan.
INTERNAL CALIBRATION
SPAN
LINPLEASEERARITY
USER MODE
CHANGE AND PRESSCHANGE UNITS
< ENTER > ... SET BALANCE NOTE: The samples shown on the displays were for an
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE 4.1kg balance.
EXIT TO WEIGH SPAN INTERNAL CALIBRATION
LINPLEASEERARITY
PLEASE WAIT . . .
USER
CALIBRATION
CUSTOM MENUCHANGE MODE CHANGERETURN TO
UNITS SET BALANCE
CALIBRATION TEST WEIGH
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
SPAN SPAN CALIBRATION
LINPLEASEERARITY
PLEASE PUT: 4000.00 G ON PAN.
USERAND
CHANGE PRESSCHANGE
MODE < ENTERUNITS
> ... SET BALANCE
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
OTHER WEIGHTS MAY BE USED:
EXIT TO WEIGH
3000 2000 1000
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
SPAN INTERNAL CALIBRATION
WEIGHT
LINPLEASEERARITY
PLEASE WAIT . . .
USER MODE
CALIBRATION TEST Go Back 0% 100%
AUTOCAL MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
EXIT TO WEIGH SPAN ENTER USER CAL VALUE
CUSTOM MENU
0
LINEARITY
USER MODE
CALIBRATION
CHANGE
UP/DOWN
CALIBRATION
SPAN CALIBRATION
SPAN CALCHANGE
TO
THE LAST
LEFT/RIGHT
SUCCESSFULLY
LIBRARY
SCROLL
TEST
TOCAL
AND LAST MOVE
UNITS DONE!
CHARACTERS
DIFFERENCE
SET BALANCE
BETWEEN THIS CAL
IS: CURSOR
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
AUTOCAL
ENTER
EXIT TO ACCEPT 0.01 GRAMS
TO WEIGH GRAMS STABLE
BACK TO QUIT
PRESS ANY KEY TO EXIT . . . CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU
8
3.3.3 Linearity Calibration
Linearity calibration utilizes three calibration points, one at zero, center span and full span. This method minimizes
deviation between actual and displayed weights within the balance's weighing range. Three weight values are used;
zero, a weight value at midpoint of the balance's weighing range and a weight value at or near the specified capacity.
PROCEDURE
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
MAIN MENU
• Press or arrow button and select LINEAR-
ITY.
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS MAIN MENU
SET BALANCE
CALIBRATE
SPAN • Press Enter button, LINEARITY CALIBRATION is dis-
LINEARITY
USER MODE
played.
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
WEIGH
EXIT TO WEIGH • Clear pan and press Enter button.
• Place indicated mass value on pan. This will be one

half of the total capacity of the balance, then press
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE Enter button.
SPAN LINEARITY CALIBRATION
LINEARITY
USER MODE
CHANGE AND PRESSCHANGE UNITS
ENTER KEY ... SET BALANCE • Place indicated mass value on pan. This will be the
CALIBRATION TEST MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
AUTOCAL
LINEARITY CALIBRATION
total capacity of the balance, then press Enter button.
EXIT TO WEIGHSPAN
LINEARITY
PLEASE WAIT . . .
USER
CALIBRATION
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION TEST
RETURN TO
WEIGH
PLEASE WAIT is displayed followed by the actual weight
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE value placed on the pan which is the maximum capacity
LINEARITY CALIBRATION
SPAN
LINEARITY
of the balance.
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION RETURN
PLEASE PUT 2000.00 TO PAN
G ON
USER MODE
CHANGE CHANGE UNITS
WEIGH SET BALANCE
AND PRESS < ENTER > ...
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL • Remove the masses from the pan. The balance is
EXIT TO WEIGH
now calibrated.
NOTE: The samples shown on the displays were for an

4.1kg balance.
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
SPAN LINEARITY CALIBRATION
LINEARITY
PLEASE WAIT . . .
USER MODE
CALIBRATION TEST MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
AUTOCAL LINEARITY CALIBRATION
SPAN
EXIT TO WEIGH
LINEARITY WEIGHT
PLEASE PUT 4000.00 G ON PAN
USER MODE
CUSTOM MENU AND PRESS
RETURN
CALIBRATIONCALIBRATION TO < ENTER > . . .
TEST
WEIGH
AUTOCAL Go Back 0% 100%
EXIT TO WEIGH
4000.00
Help
Print Enter
GRAMS STABLE
9
3.3.4 User Calibration
User calibration is used when it is desired to calibrate the balance using a mass of known value. To use this calibra-
tion feature, proceed as follows:
PROCEDURE
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
MAIN MENU
• Press or arrow button and select USER.
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS MAIN MENU

SET BALANCE
CALIBRATE • Press Enter button, USER CALIBRATION is dis-
SPAN played.
LINEARITY
USER MODE
CALIBRATION TEST
CUSTOM MENU RETURN TO
CALIBRATION AUTOCAL
WEIGH
• Using the arrow buttons, enter a value which is at
EXIT TO WEIGH
least 25% of the full span value, press Enter button.
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY The sample displays shown used a 2kg mass on an
4.1kg balance.
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
ENTER CAL VALUE
SPAN
2000
LINEARITY
USER MODE
CHANGE CHANGE UNITS MAIN SET BALANCE
UP/DOWN TO
CALIBRATION SCROLL CHARACTERS
TEST
MENU
CALIBRATE • Place the selected mass value on the pan and press
LEFT/RIGHT TO MOVE CURSOR
AUTOCAL ENTER CAL VALUE
ENTER
EXIT TO WEIGH
SPAN
TO ACCEPT0
LINEARITY USER CALIBRATION Enter button.
BACK TO QUIT
USER MODE
PLEASETO
UP/DOWN CLEAR THECHARACTERS
SCROLL PAN
CALIBRATIONTEST RETURN TO
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION
AND PRESS ENTER KEY . . . MENU
MAIN
LEFT/RIGHT
AUTOCAL
ENTER
TO MOVE
TO ACCEPT
CURSOR
WEIGH CALIBRATE
ENTER CAL VALUE
• Display indicates if calibration was successful and the
EXIT TO WEIGH SPAN
BACK TO QUIT 0
LINEARITY USER CALIBRATION difference between the last calibration.
USER
CUSTOM MENUCHANGE PLEASE CHANGE
MODE
CALIBRATION PUT:RETURN
2000UNITS
G ON
TOPAN.SET BALANCE
UP/DOWN TO
CALIBRATION SCROLLWEIGH
CHARACTERS
ANDTEST
PRESS < ENTER > ...
LEFT/RIGHT TO MOVE CURSOR
AUTOCAL
ENTER
EXIT TO ACCEPT
TO WEIGH
• Press any button, balance returns to weighing mode.
BACK TO QUIT
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
ENTER CAL VALUE
SPAN
0
LINEARITY USER CALIBRATION
USER MODE
CHANGE PLEASE CHANGE
WAIT . . . UNITS SET BALANCE
UP/DOWN TO
CALIBRATION TESTSCROLL CHARACTERS
MAIN MENU
LEFT/RIGHT TO MOVE CURSOR CALIBRATE
AUTOCAL
ENTER TO ACCEPT ENTER CAL VALUE
EXIT TO WEIGH SPAN
BACK TO QUIT 0 USER CALIBRATION
LINEARITY
CUSTOM MENU USER MODE
CHANGE USER CAL
CALIBRATION SUCCESSFULLY
CHANGE
RETURN UNITS
TO DONE!
SET BALANCE
UP/DOWN TO
CALIBRATION SCROLL
TEST WEIGHCHARACTERS WEIGHT
THE LAST DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THIS CAL
LEFT/RIGHT
AUTOCAL TO MOVE CURSOR
AND LAST CAL IS:
EXITENTER TO ACCEPT
TO WEIGH 0.01 GRAMS
BACK TO QUIT
PRESS ANY KEY TO EXIT . . . Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
10
3.3.5 Calibration test
Calibration test feature allows a check of a known calibration mass against the last stored calibration information in
the balance. The sample displays shown are for a 4.1 kilogram balance.
PROCEDURE
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
MAIN MENU
• Press or arrow button and select CALIBRA-
TION TEST.
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCEMAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
SPAN • Press Enter button.
LINEARITY
USER MODE
CALIBRATION TEST
CUSTOM MENU RETURN TO
CALIBRATION AUTOCAL
WEIGH
EXIT TO WEIGH
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY • Place the indicated mass value on the pan and press
Enter button.
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE • Display indicates if calibration was successful and the
CALIBRATION TEST
SPAN
LINEARITY
difference between the last calibration.
USER MODE
CHANGE AND PRESSCHANGE
< ENTERUNITS
> ... SET BALANCE
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL MAIN
CALIBRATE MENU • Remove masses from the pan.
EXIT TO WEIGH CALIBRATION TEST
SPAN
LINEARITY
PLEASE WAIT . . . LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CUSTOM MENU CHANGEUSER MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE • Press any button, balance returns to weighing mode.
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
CALIBRATION TEST
SPAN
LINEARITY
PLEASE PUT: 4000.00 G ON PAN.
USER
CHANGE MODE
AND PRESS <CHANGE UNITS
ENTER > ... SET BALANCE
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATIONCALIBRATION TEST
LIBRARY
SPAN
LINEARITY
PLEASE WAIT . . .
USER MODE
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL WEIGHT
MAIN MENU
CALIBRATE
EXIT TO WEIGH
ENTER USER CAL
CALIBRATION TESTVALUE
SPAN 0%
0
SPAN CAL SUCCESSFULLY DONE!
Go Back 100%
CUSTOM MENU LINEARITY
CALIBRATION LIBRARY
USER
CHANGE THE LAST DIFFERENCE
MODE CHANGE UNITSBETWEENSET
THISBALANCE
CAL
AND LAST TEST
CALIBRATION
AUTOCAL
EXITPRESS
CAL IS:
0.01 GRAMS
ANY KEY TO EXIT . . .
TO WEIGH
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY GRAMS STABLE

11
3.4 Setting Measuring Unit
Before using the balance for the first time, the desired measuring unit should be set first. The following measuring
units are available: MILLIGRAMS, GRAMS, KILOGRAMS, PENNY WEIGHTS, CARATS, OUNCES, TROY OUNCES,
GRAINS, HONG KONG TAELS, SINGAPORE TAELS, ROC TAELS, POUNDS, NEWTONS, TICALS and CUSTOM
UNITS.
Procedure
To select a measuring unit, proceed as follows:
WEIGHT

Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE • Using the arrow buttons, select CHANGE UNITS.

• Press or arrow button and select the

desired measuring unit. (Grams is shown).
MAIN MENU
• Press Enter button to save setting. The balance will
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE now weigh in the selected measuring unit.
NOTE: Depending upon the balance model/capacity,

some measuring units may not be available when
selected.
MAIN UNITS
CHANGE MENU When CUSTOM UNITS is selected, up to three differ-
MILLIGRAMS
GRAMS ent entries may be made. You would select SETUP
KILOGRAMS
PENNY WEIGHTS and follow the prompts and enter UNIT NAME, SET
CARATS
OUNCES MANTISSA, SELECT DP, SELECT LSD and then
TROY OUNCES
GRAINS MENU
CUSTOM CALIBRATION LIBRARY SAVE & EXIT.
HONG KONG TAELS
SINGAPORE TAELSEIGH
MAIN UNITS
CHANGE MENU
GRAINS WEIGHT
HONG KONG TAELS
SINGAPORE
CHANGE MODETAELSCHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE 0%
Go Back 100%
ROC TAELS
MOMMES
0.00
Help
POUNDS
NEWTONS Print Enter
TICALS MENU
CUSTOM CALIBRATION LIBRARY
CUSTOM UNITS GRAMS STABLE
EXIT TO WEIGH CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU
12
3.5 Basic Weighing
Voyager balances are shipped with grams enabled. When the balance is to be used with other Type Approved/Legal
for Trade units of measure, the desired unit must be enabled. For weigh below applications, refer to section on
density measurements.
WEIGHT MAIN MENU
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter

GRAMS STABLE
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
BASIC WEIGHING
PARTS COUNTING
FILLINGMODE
ANIMAL WEIGHING
CHECK WEIGHING
Procedure DIFF WEIGHING
FORMULATION
QUICK CHECK
• Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU. CUSTOM MENU
STATISTICS
CALIBRATION LIBRARY
DENSITY
• Using the arrow buttons, select CHANGE MODE.
• Press or arrow button and select BASIC
WEIGHING.
Zero/Tare
Go
Bac
k
Hei
p
Prin
0%
t
WE
IGH
When weighing material or objects that must be held in a T
container, taring stores the container weight in the

>O/T
< CO
NT
RA 200
.00
ST
100
MO %
VE G
HIG RAM
HL S
balance’s memory, separate from the weight of the IGH
T
S
MA TAB
IN L
ME E
NU
material in the container. Ent
er
OHAU
S® >O/T
<
• Press O/T with no load on the pan to set the

balance to zero.
• Place an empty container on the pan. Its weight is

displayed. (200 gram container is shown). (Example Container 200g)
• Press O/T the display blanks until stable weight

readings are received, then indicates zero. The
container’s weight is stored in memory.
• Add material to the container. As material is added,

its net weight is displayed. (Example is 1620 grams).
Go
Bac
k
Hei
p
Prin
0%
• Removing the container and material from the plat-

t
WE
IGH
T
form will cause the balance to display the container’s

>O/T
< CO
NT 162
RA
ST
MO 0.0 100
%
weight as a negative number. The tared weight will

VE G
HIG RAM
HL S
IGH
T
S
MA TAB
0
remain in memory until O/T is pressed again or IN L
ME E
NU Ent
er
the balance is turned off. OHAU

S ®
>O/T
<
• Pressing O/T resets the balance to zero.
(Example Material 1620g)

13
3.6 Parts Counting
The Voyager balance can be set to either an Easy Count or Advanced Count parts counting method.
Easy Count setting enables a simplified method for counting parts. When selected, Easy Count displays a screen
which requires that the number of sample parts be entered. After this entry, putting a quantity of samples on the pan,
the balance will display the actual number of samples. Since the balance determines the quantity based on the
average weight of a single part, all parts must be reasonably uniform in weight.
Advanced Count setting contains a number of entry screens which include assigning a library name, filling and
sorting applications and statisical information which can be printed.
3.6.1 Easy Count Procedure

WEIGHT • Press Enter button.
Go Back 0%
100%
0.00
Help
Print Enter
• Press or arrow button and select PARTS
COUNTING.
GRAMS STABLE
CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU • Press Enter button.
• Press or arrow button and select EASY
COUNT.
• Enter the numeric sample size as indicated on the
MAIN MENU screen using the arrow buttons to set the value.
• Place sample size on pan and press Enter button.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
• Remove samples from pan and place samples to be
BASIC WEIGHING
CALIBRATION
CUSTOM MENU PARTS COUNTING LIBRARY measured on the pan. The display indicates the num-
FILLINGMODE
CHANGE CHANGE UNITSPARTSET BALANCE
ANIMAL WEIGHING ber of pieces based on the sample size. Repeated
CHECK WEIGHING
DIFF WEIGHING
FORMULATION
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE batches of samples may be placed on the pan and
QUICK CHECK BASIC PARTS
WEIGHING COUNTING
RETURN TO
CUSTOM MENU
STATISTICS
CALIBRATION
PARTS
EASYCOUNTING
COUNT WEIGH counted. Sample shown below indicates 10 pieces.
DENSITY FILLING
CHANGE MODE COUNT
ADVANCED CHANGE UNITSPARTSET BALANCE
ANIMAL WEIGHING
RECALL
CHECK
EXIT WEIGHING
TO WEIGH
DIFF WEIGHING
FORMULATION EASY COUNT
QUICK CHECK
STATISTICS WEIGH
DENSITY 0% 100%
ENTER SAMPLE SIZE
TARE WT =
A.P.W. =
SIZE =10 WEIGHT =
<UP>/<DOWN> TO SCROLL CHARACTERS
<LEFT>/<RIGHT> TO MOVE CURSOR
<ENTER> TO ACCEPT
EASY COUNT
<BACK> TO ABORT
PIECES UNSTABLE
0% 100%
CONTRAST NEW OPTIMIZE MAIN TARE WT =
A.P.W. =
SIZE = WEIGHT =
SET A.P.W.
PLEASE PUT:
10 SAMPLES
AND PRESS < ENTER > . . .
PIECES UNSTABLE
EASY COUNT
CONTRAST NEW OPTIMIZE MAIN
0% 100%
A.P.W. = 30.00 TARE WT = 0.00
SIZE = 10 WEIGHT = 300.02
PIECES
10 UNSTABLE
CONTRAST NEW OPTIMIZE MAIN
14
3.6.2 Advanced Counting
Advanced Count setting contains a number of entry screens which include assigning a library name, filling and sorting
applications and statisical information which can be printed. Refer to screen 4 below which contains the following
entries:
LIBRARY NAME - A name up to 10 characters can be entered and stored to identify the item to be counted.
A.P.W. - This average piece weight, when selected, either a sample size or actual piece weight can be entered.
TARE WEIGHT - This is the tare weight of the container holding the samples.
AUTO OPTIMIZATION - An ON or OFF function. When set ON, optimizes the accuracy based on sample size.
FUNCTION LINK - Various pop-up screens permit the entry of four options, NONE, FILLING, CHECK WEIGHING
and STATISTIC. When FILLING is selected, a target weight is entered which is shown as 100% on the bar graph on
the display. When material is added to the balance pan, it is displayed as a percentage and weight. When CHECK
WEIGHING is selected, a separate pop-up display has entries for nominal pieces, over pieces, under pieces, display
type, library name and save and exit. This type of function permits checking of individual pieces against the stored
information in the balance. When STATISTICS is selected, provides display of Standard Deviation, either population
or sample, Mean, Sum, High, Low and Difference readings. Each can be individually set ON or OFF.
SAVE TO LIBRARY - When selected, saves all settings to the library.
RUN - When selected, starts program.
Procedure
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
•
•
Using the arrow buttons, select CHANGE MODE.
Press Enter button.
GRAMS STABLE
• Press or arrow button and select PARTS
COUNTING.
• Press or arrow button and select AD-
VANCED COUNT.
• Continue through all menus and make the required
MAIN MENU
settings.
ADVANCED COUNT
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
BASIC WEIGHING LIBRARY 0% 100%
PARTS COUNTING A.P.W. = 30.0000 TARE WT = 0.0005
FILLINGMODE
CHANGE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE SIZE = 10 WEIGHT = 300.0000
ANIMAL WEIGHING
CHECK WEIGHING
DIFF WEIGHING
FORMULATION
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM MENU BASIC
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
WEIGHINGPARTS COUNTING
CALIBRATION LIBRARY PIECES
10 STABLE
STATISTICS EASY
PARTS COUNT
COUNTING LIBRARY NEW OPTIONS MAIN
DENSITY ADVANCED
FILLING
CHANGE MODE COUNT
CHANGE UNITSPARTSET BALANCE
RECALL
ANIMAL WEIGHING
EXITWEIGHING
CHECK TO WEIGH
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
DIFF WEIGHING
FORMULATION PARTS COUNTING PARTS COUNTING
BASIC WEIGHING BASIC WEIGHING
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM MENU PARTS COUNT ADVANCED
CALIBRATION
EASY COUNT
RETURN TO EASYCOUNTING
COUNT ADVANCED COUNT
COUNTING PARTS
STATISTICS WEIGH LIBRARY
ADVANCED LIBRARY NAME
NAMA.P.W. 0
FILL
CHANGELIBRARY
ADVANCED NAME
MODE COUNT
CHANGE UNITSPARTSET BALANCE FILL
CHANGE MODE COUNTCHANGE UNITSPARTSET BALANCE
DENSITY APW/SIZE
EXIT TO WEIGH 0 AARE
EXIT TO WT
WEIGH 0
ANIMAL WEIGHING ANIMAL WEIGHING
CHECKTARE WT
WEIGHING 0 CHECKTCWEIGHING
ERR OFF
AUTO OPTIMIZATION
DIFF WEIGHING OFF DIFF AUTO OPTIMIZATION
<UP>/<DOWN>
WEIGHING TO SCROLLOFF
CHARACTERS
FUNCTION LINK
FORMULATION NONE FUNCTION LINK
<LEFT>/<RIGHT> TO MOVENONE
CURSOR
FORMULATION
SAVE TO LIBRARY SAVE TO LIBRARY
<ENTER> TO ACCEPT
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION RETURN TO QUICK CHECK
RUN WEIGH EAVE AND START
<BACK> TO ABORT WEIGH
STASTISTIC STATISTIC
EXIT TO WEIGH
DENSITY DENSITY
15
3.7 Filling
Filling or Fill weighing permits you to enter a target weight, then view other loads as a percentage of the reference
which has been set in the balance parameters. The load you place on the platform is displayed as a percentage of
what was entered into the balance. A twin bar display indicates up to 89% on the first bar and up to 110% on the
second bar with a large numeric display.
Procedure
WEIGHT • Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.
Go Back 0% 100% • Press Enter button.
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
•
•
Press Enter button.
GRAMS STABLE • Press or arrow button and select FILLING.
• Using the arrow buttons, enter the target weight.
• Place the load on the balance pan, the display indi-
cates on the bar graph as a percentage and displays
MAIN MENU
the actual load weight numerically .

MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
BASIC WEIGHING
PARTS COUNTING
FILLINGMODE
ANIMAL WEIGHING
CHECK WEIGHING
DIFF WEIGHING
FORMULATION
QUICK CHECK
STATISTICS MAIN
CHANGE MENU
WEIGH
MODE
DENSITY ENTER TARGET WEIGHT
BASIC WEIGHING
0.00
PARTS COUNTING
FILL<UP>/<DOWN>
CHANGE MODE TO SCROLL
CHANGE CHARACTERS
UNITSPARTSET BALANCE
<LEFT>/<RIGHT>
ANIMAL WEIGHING TO MOVE CURSOR
<ENTER>
CHECK TO ACCEPT
WEIGHING
DIFF<BACK>
WEIGHINGTO ABORT
FORMULATION
QUICK CHECK
STATISTICS
DENSITY
FILLING
Go Back 0% 89%
Help 90% 0.00 110%
Print
TARGET = 0.00
0.00
DIFF WT =
GRAMS
0.00
STABLE
Enter
CONTRAST NEW STOP MAIN
16
3.8 Animal Weighing
Animal weighing permits you to weigh small animals directly on the balance. To compensate for active subjects, a
setup menu permits you to enter a smoothing filter labeled Good, Better and Best which averages the subjects
movements and displays an accurate weight. A single bar display indicates up to 100% of the capacity of the bal-
ance. The large numeric display indicates the weight of the subject.
Procedure
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
•
•
Press Enter button.
GRAMS STABLE • Press or arrow button and select ANIMAL
WEIGHING.
• Press or buttons to set the AW Filter, then
press Enter button. PUT ANIMAL ON PAN . . . is
MAIN MENU displayed.
• Place the subject on the balance pan, a countdown
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE appears on the display which allows the balance to
accurately indicate the weight of the subject. The bar
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
CUSTOM MENU BASICCALIBRATION
WEIGHING LIBRARY
graph indicates the percentage of weight relative to
PARTS COUNTING
FILLINGMODE
the capacity of the balance.
ANIMAL WEIGHING
CHECK WEIGHING
DIFF WEIGHING
FORMULATION
QUICK CHECK
ANIMAL WEIGHING
STATISTIC WEIGH
DENSITY SET FILTER LEVEL
0% 100%
GOOD BETTER BEST
ANIMAL WEIGHING
RESET ( )= 5 PREVIOUS ( ) = 5
GRAMS STABLE
0% MENU 100%
CONTRAST STOP FILTER
PUT ANIMAL ON PAN . . .
GRAMS STABLE
CONTRAST FILTER STOP MENU
ANIMAL WEIGHING
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
CONTRAST FILTER STOP MENU
17
3.9 Check Weighing
Check weighing mode permits you to weigh an item, set balance parmeters such as the nominal weight, over weight,
under weight, type of display: normal shown with a bar graph and a numeric display or sign which spells out under,
accept, over in large letters and assign a library name. This can then be recalled later eliminating the need to enter
weighing parameters again. This type of weighing is where individual items must be checked against preset param-
eters. Since many displays are repetitive, not all will be shown in the following procedure
Procedure
WEIGHT
Help
Print 0.00 Enter

•
•
Press Enter button.
GRAMS STABLE • Press or arrow button and select CHECK
WEIGHING.
• Press or arrow button and start with NOMI-
NAL WT.
MAIN MENU
• Using the arrow buttons, enter the NOMINAL WT
value, then, press Enter button.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
• Repeat steps and enter parameters for OVER WT,
BASIC WEIGHING and UNDER WT.
PARTS COUNTING
FILLINGMODE
CHANGE CHANGE UNITSPARTSET BALANCE • Enter a library name for the object of measurement
ANIMAL WEIGHING
CHECK WEIGHING
DIFF WEIGHING
and press Enter button.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
FORMULATION
QUICK BASIC
CHECK
CUSTOM MENU WEIGHING
CALIBRATION
SETUP
RETURN TO
• Press arrow button and select SAVE TO
NOMINAL
STATISTIC PARTS WT
COUNTING WEIGH
300.0 0
OVER
FILL
DENSITY CHANGE MODE WT CHANGE 0.00
UNITSPARTSET BALANCE LIBRARY and press Enter button.
UNDER
ANIMAL WT
WEIGHING 0.00
LIBRARY
CHECK NAME
WEIGHING • Press arrow button and select RUN.
SAVE
DIFF TO LIBRARY
WEIGHING
RUN
FORMULATION
EXITCHECK
QUICK TO WEIGH CALIBRATION
CUSTOM MENU LIBRARY
STATISTICS
DENSITY • Place item to be checked on the balance pan, the
normal display indicates the weight of the item. The
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
bar graph indicates whether the item is under ,
BASIC WEIGHING SETUP
NOMINAL
PARTS SET NOMINAL WEIGHT
WT
COUNTING 0.0 0 accepable or over in weight based on the settings
OVER
FILingL
CHANGE WT
MODE CHANGE 0.00 MENU
UNITSPARTSET
MAIN
CHANGE MODE BALANCE
0.00
UNDER
ANIMAL
LIBRARY
CHECK
WT
WEIGHING
BASIC
NAME
WEIGHING WEIGHING
0.00
SETUP made in the balance.
UP/DOWN TO SCROLL CHARACTERS
SET OVER WEIGHT
SAVE
DIFF WEIGHING NOMINAL
&PARTS
EXIT
LEFT/RIGHT
OVER
FILLING
CHANGE
R ENTER
WT
COUNTING
TO MOVE CURSOR
WT
MODE
0.0 0
0.00MAIN MENUBALANCE
CHANGE UNITSPARTSET
Display below illustrates a 300 gram sample weight.
FOR TO ACCEPT
0.00 CHANGE MODE
EXIT
QUICK UNDER
TOANIMAL
WEIGH
CHECK WT
WEIGHING 0.00
RETURN TO
CUSTOM MENU
BACK TO QUITCALIBRATION SETUP
STATISTIC LIBRARY
CHECK NAME
WEIGHING
<UP>/<DOWN> TO SCROLLWEIGH
BASIC WEIGHING CHARACTERS
SAVE & EXIT SET UNDER WEIGHT
DENSITY DIFF WEIGHING NOMINAL
PARTS
<LEFT>/<RIGHT> WT
COUNTING
TO MOVE CURSOR 0.0 0
R <ENTER>
FORMULATION OVER
FILLING
CHANGE
TO WT
MODE
ACCEPT 0.00
EXIT TO WEIGH 295.00
QUICK
CUSTOM CHECK
MENU
<BACK> TOUNDER
ANIMAL
ABORT WT
WEIGHING
CALIBRATION 0.00 TO
RETURN
STATISTIC LIBRARY
CHECK NAME TO SCROLL
WEIGHING WEIGH
<UP>/<DOWN> CHARACTERS
DENSITY SAVE
DIFFIAL & EXIT
WEIGHING
R <ENTER> TO ACCEPT
FORMULATION
EXIT
QUICK
CUSTOM TO WEIGH
CHECK
MENU
<BACK> CALIBRATION
TO ABORT LIBRARY
STATISTICS
DENSITY
CHECK WEIGHING
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE Go Back UNDER ACCEPT OVER
NOMINAL = 300.00
BASIC WEIGHING SETUP OVER = 305.00
NOMINAL
PARTS WT LIBRARY NAME
COUNTING 0.0 0 Help UNDER = 295.00 DIFF = -0.04
299.96
OVER
FILLING
CHANGE NAME
WT
MODE 0.00
UNDER
ANIMAL WT
WEIGHING 0.00 Print Enter
<UP>/<DOWN>
LIBRARY
CHECK NAME
WEIGHING TO SCROLL CHARACTERS
DIFF <LEFT>/<RIGHT>
SAVE & EXIT
WEIGHING TO MOVE CURSOR
GRAMS STABLE
R <ENTER> TO ACCEPT
FORMULATION
<BACK>
EXITCHECK
QUICK TO ABORT
TO WEIGH CALIBRATION CONTRAST NEW STOP MAIN
CUSTOM MENU LIBRARY
STATISTICS
DENSITY
18
3.10 Differential Weighing
Differential weighing stores tare and weight values so a sample can be dried and the difference calculated at a later
time. Up to 100 samples can be stored. samples can be added to the applications library. Batch and individual
samples can be accommodated.The features in the Voyager balance for differential weighing include:
RECALL - When selected, brings up previously stored library names associated with each sample.
LIBRARY NAME - A name up to 10 characters can be entered and stored to identify the sample item.
TARE WEIGHT - This is the tare weight of the container holding the samples, can be set to NO or YES.
AUTO TARE - Used when it is desired to automatically tare the storing container's weight, can be set to NO or YES.
AUTO SAMPLE DETECT - This feature is used for repetitive sample weighing, can be set NO or YES.
MODE - Can be set to INDIVIDUAL or BATCH.
FINAL RESULT - Can be set to show results in PERCENTAGE or WEIGHT.
SAMPLE NUMBERS - Desired number of samples can be entered.
SAVE TO LIBRARY - Permits all entries to be saved to the Library.
EXIT TO WEIGH - When selected, will exit to standard weighing mode.
Procedure
WEIGHT • Using the arrow buttons, select CHANGE MODE.
0%
Go Back 100%
• Press or arrow button and select DIFF-
Help
Print
0.00 Enter WEIGHING.
GRAMS STABLE
• Press or arrow button and select RECALL,
SETUP or EXIT TO WEIGH.
• Press Enter button. If RECALL was selected, you
can scan the library and select the desired item.
• If SETUP is selected, continue by pressing Enter
button.
• On the SETUP MENU, using the arrow buttons and
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
Enter button, select YES or NO for each of the
BASIC WEIGHING
PARTS COUNTING following items on the menu: TARE WEIGHT, AUTO
FILLINGMODE
ANIMAL WEIGHING MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE TARE, AUTO SAMPLE DETECT; for MODE, select
CHECK WEIGHING
DIFF WEIGHING
BASIC WEIGHINGDIFF WEIGHING either INDIVIDUAL or BATCH; for FINAL RESULT,
PARTS COUNTING
SETUP
FORMULATION
QUICK CHECK
FILLRECALL
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITSPARTSET BALANCE select either WEIGHT or PERCENT; for SAMPLE
CUSTOM MENU ANIMAL WEIGHING RETURN
CALIBRATION
RESUME
TO
STATISTICS
DENSITY
CHECK
EXITWEIGHING
TO WEIGH
WEIGH
NUMBERS, enter the desired number of samples to
DIFF WEIGHING
FORMULATION be weighed; enter a name for LIBRARY NAME; scroll
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM MENU
STATISTICS
CALIBRATION LIBRARY down using the arrow button and select SAVE TO
DENSITY LIBRARY by pressing Enter button.
or • Scroll to RUN, press Enter button. DIFF WEIGHING-
SAMPLE 1 is displayed as shown below.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
BASIC WEIGHINGDIFF WEIGHING
PARTS COUNTING
SETUP
FILLRECALL
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITSPARTSET BALANCE
ANIMAL WEIGHING
RESUME DIFF WEIGHING -- NAME-- SAMPLE 1
CHECK
EXITWEIGHING
TO WEIGH
DIFF WEIGHING
Go Back 0% 100%
FORMULATION MAIN MENU
QUICK CHECK CHANGE MODE
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION RETURN TO TARE WT=
STATISTICS BASIC WEIGHING DIFFWEIGH
WEIGHING Help INIT WT= 0.00
SETUP
0.00
DENSITY PARTS
S COUNTING
FILLRECALL
CHANGE MODE
TARE WEIGHTCHANGE UNITSPARTSET
NO BALANCE Print Enter
ANIMAL WEIGHING
RSETUP
AUTO TARE NO
CHECK
EXIT WEIGHING
TO WEIGH
AUTO SAMPLE DETECT NO
DIFFERENTIAL GRAMS STABLE
MODE WEIGHING INDIVIDUAL
FORMULATE
FINAL RESULT WEIGHT CONTRAST ENTER EDIT MAIN
QUICKSAMPLE
CUSTOM CHECK
MENU NUMBERS
CALIBRATION 3 RETURN TO
STATISTIC
LIBRARY NAME NAME WEIGH
DENSITY
SAVE TO LIBRARY
19
3.10 Differential Weighing (Cont.)
Initial Weighing Procedure (Cont.)
DIFF WEIGHING - - NAME -- SAMPLE 1 First, the container is tared and stored, then the product
is intially weighed in the container and stored for each
0% 100%
TARE WT= 19.09 sample. A name is given to the samples which is stored
INIT WT= 0.00
in the balance. After all samples have been weighed and
19.09
GRAMS STABLE
entered, a summary table indicates the weight of the
containers and each sample.
CONTRAST ENTER EDIT MAIN
After the samples have undergone a process such as

DIFF WEIGHING -- NAME -- SAMPLE 1
heating or cooling, the entire procedure is repeated
0% 100% starting with sample number 1 and continued until all
TARE WT=
INIT WT=
19.09
306.17
samples have been completed. The balance then
displays a new table which indicates the tare weight of
306.17
GRAMS STABLE
the container, the initial weight of the product, the final
weight of the product and the difference weight. To enter
CONTRAST ENTER EDIT MAIN samples, proceed as follows:
Summary Page Initial Weighing

# TARE WT INIT WT FINAL WT DIFF • Press >O/T< button.
1 19.09 304.93 • Place container on pan, wait for stable indication,
2 19.09 306.17
3 19.10 307.28 then press Enter button. The display indicates the
container weight.
• Place the first sample in the container on the pan.
The display indicates the initial weight of the first
CONTINUE SAVE RE-SAMPLE DELETE
sample.
• Press Enter button, display changes to sample 2.
• Remove first sample and container from pan.
• Place container on pan for sample two, press Enter
Final Weighing
button. The display indicates the container weight.
DIFF WEIGHING -- NAME-- SAMPLE 1 • Place the second sample in the container on the pan.
The display indicates the initial weight of the second
0% 100%
TARE WT= 19.09 FINAL WT= 300.04
sample.
INIT WT= 304.93 DIFF WT = -4.89 • Press Enter button, display changes to sample 3.
300.04
GRAMS
DIFF UNSTABLE
WEIGHING -- NAME-- SAMPLE 2
• Remove second sample and container from pan.
• Repeat the above procedure for all samples. The
CONTRAST ENTER EDIT MAIN example shown at left is for one sample.
0% 100%
TARE WT= 19.09 FINAL WT= 300.05 When the last sample is placed on the balance, a sum-
INIT WT= 306.17 DIFF WT = -6.12
mary display indicates the TARE WT and INITIAL WT.
300.05
GRAMS UNSTABLE
• Using the arrow buttons, select CONTINUE or SAVE,
then enter Data File Name.
DIFF WEIGHING -- NAME-- SAMPLE 3
0% 100%
TARE WT=
INIT WT=
19.10
307.28
FINAL WT=
DIFF WT =
300.03
-7.25
Final Weighing
When all of the samples have been removed and pro-
300.03
GRAMS UNSTABLE
cessed externally, reenter Differential Weighing and
select RESUME. The final samples are weighed with
their containers one after another. When the last sample
Final Summary is weighed on the balance, a final summary display is
# TARE WT INIT WT FINAL WT DIFF shown. See example at bottom of the page. The final
1 19.09 304.93 300.04 -4.89 summary indicates the TARE WT, INIT WT, FINAL WT
2 19.09 306.17 300.05 -6.12
3 19.10 307.28 300.03 -7.25 and DIFF (difference weight). This can be printed. The
RE-SAMPLE and EDIT selections on the displays allow
corrections to be made.
CONTRAST RETURN RE-SAMPLE DELETE
20
3.11 Formulation
The Voyager balance can store between 200 minimum and 500 formulations limited only by the memory capacity of
the resident library. Each formulation can be named and have up to 10 components specified and identified by name.
Once the formulations are stored in the balance library, they may be recalled and used at any time. Each component
of a given formulation can be specified as to its weight or percentage. The balance will display each element of a
formulation on a dual bar graph as a percentage and also displays the desired weight. Thus, each product may be
placed on the pan until 100% is indicated. Names are limited to 10 characters. The illustrations in this procedure are
samples for one formulation using a higher resolution balance.
Procedure
0.00
Help
Print Enter • Press Enter button.

GRAMS STABLE
• Press or arrow button and select FORMU-
LATION.
• Press or arrow button and select SETUP.
• Press Enter button, FORMULA SETUP is displayed.
MAIN MENU • Press or arrow button and select LIBRARY
NAME.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
R • Enter a library name for the 1st formula using the
BASIC WEIGHING
PARTS COUNTING
CALIBRATION
CUSTOM MENUCHANGE
FILLINGMODE CHANGELIBRARY
UNITS SET BALANCE
arrow buttons.
ANIMAL WEIGHING
CHECK WEIGHING • Press Enter button when name is completed, FOR-
DIFFERENTIAL WEIGHING
MAIN MENU
FORMULATION CHANGE MODE MULA SETUP is displayed again.
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM MENU BASIC WEIGHING FORMULATION
CALIBRATION RETURN TO
STATISTIC
DENSITY
PARTS COUNTING
SETUP WEIGH • Press arrow button and select WEIGH TYPE.
FILLRECALL
ANIMAL WEIGHING
RESUME
CHECK
• Press Enter button, a new screen with WEIGHT and
EXITWEIGHING
TO WEIGH
FORMULATION PERCENT is displayed. WEIGHT allows components
QUICK CHECK
LIBRARY
CUSTOM MENU
STATISTICS
CALIBRATION
of the formula to be specified by weight. PERCENT
DENSITY
allows components to be specified by percentage.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
BASIC WEIGHING FORMULATION FORMULATIONS BY WEIGHT
PARTS FORMULA SETUP
COUNTING
SETUP
FILLRECALL
CHANGE MODE NAME
LIBRARY CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
ANIMAL WEIGHING
R WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT
• Press or arrow button and select WEIGHT.
CHECK WEIGHING
EXIT
SETTOREFERENCE
WEIGH CHANGEMENU
MAIN MODE
DIFFERENTIAL
NUMBER WEIGHING
OF ITEMS 0
FORMULATION
FORMULATE
SETUP BASIC WEIGHING
FORMULA SETUP
QUICK CHECK PARTS
CUSTOM SAVE
MENU
STATISTIC CHANGE
COUNTING
SETUP
TO LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
FILLRECALL
RETURN TO
LIBRARY NAME
WEIGH
• Using arrow button, scroll to ITEM NUMBER.
RUN MODE
LIBRARYNAME CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
DENSITY ANIMAL WEIGHING
EXIT TO WEIGHR WEIGH
CHECK
EXIT
TYPE
FORMULA
WEIGHING
TO WEIGH
1 •Press Enter button. A new screen, SET ITEM
SET REFERENCE
NUMEM
FORMULATE
NAUMBERS
<UP>/<DOWN>
SETUP
0
TO SCROLL CHARACTERS
NUMBER appears.
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM SAVE
MENU TO LIBRARY
<ENTER> CALIBRATION
TO ACCEPT RETURN TO
STATISTIC
RUN WEIGH • Press or arrow button and enter the num-
DENSITY <BACK> TO ABORT
EXIT TO WEIGH
ber of components in the formula.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE • Press Enter button, FORMULA SETUP isdisplayed.
BASIC WEIGHING FORMULATION
PARTS COUNTING
SETUP FORMULA SETUP • Press or arrow button and select SETUP.
FILLR LIBRARY
CHANGE MODE NAME CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
ANIMAL
CHECK
WEIGHING
RECALL
WEIGH TYPE
WEIGHING
WEIGHT
MAIN MENU
• Press Enter button, NAME menu is displayed with the
EXIT TO WEIGH
SET REFERENCE CHANGE MODE
DIFFERENTIAL
NUMBER WEIGHING
FORMULATE
OF ITEMS 0
BASIC WEIGHING FORMULATION number of items you entered for the first formula.
SETUP FORMULA SETUP
QUICK CHECKPARTS COUNTING
SETUP
CUSTOM SAVE
MENUTOFILL
STATISTIC CHANGE
RUN
LIBRARY
CALIBRATIONCHANGE
MODE NAME
R LIBRARY
RETURN
SELECT WEIGHTO
UNITS TYPE
WEIGH SET BALANCE • Press or arrow button and select item 1.
RECALL
WEIGH TYPE
WEIGHT WEIGHT
EXIT TOCHECK
WEIGH
EXITWEIGHING
SETTO WEIGH
REFERENCE
PERCENT
DIFFERENTIAL
• Press Enter button, COMPONENT NAME display
NUMBER WEIGHING 0
FORMULATE
SETUP
QUICK CHECK appears.
CUSTOM SAVE
MENUTO LIBRARY
STATISTIC WEIGH
RUN
DENSITY
EXIT TO WEIGH
• Using arrow buttons, enter the component name for
item 1 in the formula.
21
3.11 Formulation (Cont.) Procedure (Cont.)
FORMULATIONS BY WEIGHT (cont.)
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
BASIC WEIGHING FORMULATION • Press Enter button, a NAME menu appears with the
PARTS FORMULA SETUP
COUNTING
SETUP
FILLR LIBRARY
CHANGE MODE NAME CHANGE UNITS CHANGESET BALANCE
MAIN MENU
MODE
value shaded.
ANIMAL WEIGHING
RECALL
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT
FORMULATION
CHECK
EXITWEIGHING
SET WEIGH BASIC WEIGHING
TOREFERENCE
DIFFERENTIAL
• Press Enter button, ENTER COMPONENT WEIGHT
NUMBER WEIGHING
PARTS
OF ITEMS COUNTING
SETUP FORMULA
0 SETUP
FORMULATE FILLR LIBRARYNAME SET ITEM NUMBER SET BALANCE
CUSTOM
SETUP
QUICK CHECK
SAVE
MENU
CHANGE
ANIMAL
TO LIBRARY
MODE
WEIGHING
RECALL
CALIBRATION
WEIGH3TYPE
CHANGE
RETURN TO
UNITS
menu is displayed.
STATISTIC CHECK WEIGHING WEIGH
RUN EXIT TO WEIGH
SET REFERENCE
DENSITY
EXIT TO WEIGHDIFFRENTIAL
NUMBER WEIGHING
NUMBER TO SCROLL CHARACTERS
<UP>/<DOWN>
• Using the arrow buttons, enter the component weight
FORMULATE
SETUP
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM SAVE
MENU
STATISTIC
TO LIBRARY
<ENTER> CALIBRATION
TO ACCEPT RETURN TO for item 1 in the formula.
RUN WEIGH
DENSITY <BACK> TO ABORT
EXIT TO WEIGH • Press Enter button when desired weight is entered.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
The NAME menu appears again. Repeat steps
FORMULA SETUP
(identified with arrow R on previous page) and enter
PARTS COUNTING
SETUP
FILLR LIBRARY
CHANGE
ANIMAL
MODE NAME
WEIGHING
RECALL
CHANGE UNITS FORMULA1SET BALANCE
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE the component names and weight values for the first
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT
CHECK
EXITWEIGHING
WEIGH BASIC WEIGHING FORMULATION
TOREFERENCE
SET
NUMBER OF ITEMS
PARTS COUNTING
SETUP FORMULATION
3 SETUP
formula. Samples shown at left.
FORMULATE
CUSTOM
SETUP
QUICK CHECK CHANGE
SAVE
MENU
FILLR LIBRARYNAME
TO LIBRARY
ANIMAL
MODE #
WEIGHING
CALIBRATION
RECALL
NAME UNITS
CHANGE
COMPONENT
RETURN TO
NAME VALUE
SET BALANCE • When all of the entries have been made, select SAVE
STATISTIC WEIGHT
1 A1TYPE
A1 WEIGH 0.00
RUN CHECK
EXITWEIGHING
TO WEIGH
DENSITY SET REFERENCE
2
DIFFERENTIAL
EXIT TO WEIGH WEIGHING MAIN MENU TO LIBRARY in the FORMULATION SETUP menu,
NUMBEM
3
UP/DOWN TO SCROLLCHANGE
NUMBER MODE
0
CHARACTERS
FORMULATE
SETUP
LEFT/RIGHT TO MOVE FORMULATION
CURSOR
QUICK CHECK
SAVE
CUSTOM MENU TO
ENTER
BASIC
LIBRARY
TO
PARTS
WEIGHING
CALIBRATION
ACCEPT
SETUPCOUNTING RETURNSETUP
FORMULATION TO and then select RUN, press Enter button. The
STATISTIC WEIGH
RUN CHANGE
DENSITY BACK TORQUIT
FILL MODE # NAME UNITS
CHANGE VALUE
SET BALANCE
EXIT TO WEIGH
ANIMAL
LIBRARYNAME
RECALLWEIGHING
WEIGHT
1 TYPE
A1 20.00
balance displays the first component of the formula
CHECK
EXIT WEIGHING
SETTOREFERENCE
2WEIGH
A2 30.00
DIFFERENTIAL
NUMBEM
3 WEIGHING
NUMBER
A3 50.000 and the required weight.
FORMULATE
SETUP
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM SAVE
STATISTIC
MENU TO LIBRARY
CALIBRATION RETURN TO • Place a container on the pan and tare by pressing
RUN WEIGH
DENSITY
EXIT TO WEIGH >O/T< button.
• Add the required amount to the container until thebal-
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE ance indicates 100% on the bar graph and the proper
PARTS FORMULA SETUP
COUNTING
SETUP weight.
FILLR LIBRARY
CHANGE MODE NAME CHANGE UNITS FORMULA1
SET BALANCE MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
ANIMAL WEIGHING
RECALL
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT FORMULATION
• Using the arrow buttons, select NEXT shown at the
CHECK
EXITWEIGHING
SETTOREFERENCE
WEIGH BASIC WEIGHING
DIFFERENTIAL FORMULA SETUP
NUMBER WEIGHING
OF ITEMS PARTS 3COUNTING
SETUP
bottom of the screen and press Enter button. The
FORMULATE
SETUP FILLR LIBRARY
CHANGE MODE NAME CHANGE UNITS FORMULA1
SET BALANCE
QUICK CHECK ANIMAL WEIGHING
RECALL
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT
CUSTOM SAVE
MENU
STATISTIC
RUN
TO LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CHECK
RETURN TO
EXITWEIGHING
WEIGH
SETTOREFERENCE
WEIGH second component of the formula is displayed. Add
DENSITY DIFFERENTIAL
NUMBER WEIGHING
OF ITEMS 3
EXIT TO WEIGH FORMULATE
SETUP
QUICK CHECK
the required weight. Select NEXT and repeat the
CUSTOM SAVE
MENUTO LIBRARY
STATISTIC WEIGH
RUN
DENSITY
EXIT TO WEIGH
procedure for all items in the formula.
• When you have completed weighing all items in the

FORMULATION -- FORMULA1
formula, select NEXT again and a display appears
0% 89% which indicates the Target Weight, Result and Differ-
90% 110% ence Weight for the formula. See display below.
A1 = 20.00
20.00
DIFF WT = 0.00
• To select previously stored formulations, select
GRAMS
FORMULATION -- STABLE
FORMULA1 FORMULATION menu and select RECALL. This will
CONTRAST NEXT PREVIOUS MAIN
0% 89% bring up the library of formulations.

90% 110%
A2 = 30.00
30.00 DIFF WT = 0.00
FORMULA1
A1
TARGET
20.00
RESULT
20.05
DIFF WT
0.05
GRAMS STABLE A2 30.00 30.07 0.07
FORMULATION -- FORMULA1 Go Back A3 50.00 50.00 0.15
TOTAL 100.00 100.27 0.27
89% Help
0%
Print Enter
90% 110%
A3 = 50.00
50.00
DIFF WT = 0.00
GRAMS STABLE
Example using a total of 100 grams in the formulation.

22
3.11 Formulation (Cont.)
Procedure
FORMULATIONS BY PERCENTAGE
Formulations can be done by using percentages instead of weight values. See page 21 and repeat procedure up to
where screen choice for WEIGH TYPE is displayed, Then continue as follows:
• Press arrow button and select WEIGH TYPE. • When all of the entries have been made, select SAVE
• Press Enter button, a new screen with WEIGHT and TO LIBRARY in the FORMULATION SETUP menu,
PERCENT is displayed. PERCENT allows compon- and then select RUN, press Enter button. The
ents to be specified by percentage. balance displays the first component of the formula
• Press or arrow button and select PER- and the required weight.
CENT. • Place a container on the pan and tare by pressing
• Press Enter button. >O/T< button.
• Using arrow button, scroll to SET REFER- • Add the required amount to the container until the
ENCE. balance indicates 100% on the bar graph and the
• Press Enter button. A new screen, ENTER TARGET proper percentage.
WEIGHT appears. • Using the arrow buttons and select NEXT shown at
• Using arrow buttons, enter target weight. the bottom of the screen and press Enter button. The
• Press Enter button, FORMULA SETUP isdisplayed. second component of the formula is displayed. Add
• Using arrow button, scroll to NUMBER OF the required weight. Select NEXT and repeat the
ITEMS . procedure for all items in the formula.
• Press Enter button. A new screen, SET ITEM
• When you have completed weighing all items in the
NUMBER appears.
formula, select NEXT again and a display appears
• Press or arrow button and enter the num-
which indicates the Target Weight, Result and Differ-
ber of components in the formula.
ence Weight for the formula. See display below.
• Press Enter button, FORMULA SETUP isdisplayed.
• Press or arrow button and select SETUP.
• Press Enter button, NAME menu is displayed with the
number of items you entered for the first formula.
• Press or arrow button and select item 1.
• Press Enter button, COMPONENT NAME display
appears.
• Using arrow buttons, enter the component name for
item 1 in the formula.
• Press Enter button, a NAME menu appears with the
value shaded.
FORMULA2 TARGET RESULT DIFF WT
• Press Enter button, ENTER COMPONENT % B1 10.00 10.03 0.03
B2 20.00 20.08 0.08
Go Back
menu is displayed. B3
TOTAL
70.00
100.00
69.94
100.05
-0.06
0.05
Help
• Using the arrow buttons, enter the component per-
Print Enter
centage for item 1 in the formula.
• Press Enter button when desired weight is entered.
The NAME menu appears again. Repeat steps
and enter the component names and percent values
for the first formula.
23
3.12 Quick Check Weighing
Quick check weighing permits you to place a reference sample or a sample weight on the balance pan which is used
as a reference weight to measure against similar samples. A single bar display indicates up to 100% of the capacity
of the balance, the difference in weight between the original sample and suceeding samples is displayed. The
difference in percentage is also shown along with the reference weight. The large numeric display indicates the
weight of the subject.
Procedure
WEIGHT
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
•
•
Press Enter button.
GRAMS STABLE • Press or arrow button and select QUICK
CHECK.
• Place the reference weight on the pan and press the
Enter button.
• Remove reference weight from the pan and place
MAIN MENU
sample to be compared against the reference weight
on the pan.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
• The balance displays the difference of the sample
BASIC WEIGHING
PARTS COUNTING
weight against the reference weight in a measuring
FILLINGMODE
ANIMAL WEIGHING
unit and percentage. The bar graph indicates the
CHECK WEIGHING
DIFF WEIGHING percentage of weight of the capacity of the balance.
FORMULATION QUICK CHECK
QUICK CHECK
WEIGH
• To enter a new reference weight, select NEW at the
STATISTICS
DENSITY 0% 100%
DIFF = REF WT =
SET REFERENCE
bottom of the display using the arrow button and
DIFF % =
PLEASE PUT THE REFERENCE WEIGHT
ON PAN
WAIT AND
FOR PRESS. .<. ENTER > . . .
STABLE press the Enter button and repeat procedure.
GRAMS UNSTABLE
QUICK CHECK
Go Back 0% 100%
DIFF = 0.00 REF WT = 300.44
Help DIFF % = 0.00
Print
300.44
GRAMS STABLE
Enter
24
3.13 Statistics
Statistics is used when it is desired to compare a number of samples and examine the relative deviation of the
samples along with other statistical data such as mean, sum, maximum and minimum and difference. A minimum of
three samples is required in this program. Statistics contains a number of pop-up menus which include standard
deviation, mean, sum, maximum, minimum, difference, relative deviation, auto sample detect and sample size. All of
these can be set ON or OFF except sample size which can be set for a particular number. When a printer or com-
puter is connected to the balance, all statistical information can be observed and printed
Procedure
WEIGHT • Press Enter button.
Go Back 0% 100% • Using the arrow buttons, select CHANGE MODE.
Help
Print
0.00 Enter • Press or arrow button and select STATIS-
GRAMS STABLE
TICS.
• Press or arrow button and select STD DEV.
• Press or arrow button and select either
ON or OFF.
MAIN MENU • Continue through all menus and set each of the items
ON or OFF.
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE • Press Enter button.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE • Press or arrow button and select SAMPLE
BASIC WEIGHING
PARTS COUNTING
SIZE, three is the minimum.
FILLINGMODE
ANIMAL WEIGHING • Press Enter button.
CHECK WEIGHING
DIFF WEIGHING
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE • Using the arrow buttons, enter the sample size.
FORMULATION
BASIC WEIGHING SETUP STATISTICS
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM PARTS
MENU STDCOUNTING
DEV
CALIBRATION ON
LIBRARY • Press Enter button.
STATISTICFILLING
CHANGE MODE
MEAN CHANGE UNITSON SET BALANCE
DENSITY ANIMALSUMWEIGHING ON
CHECK WEIGHING
MAXIMUM ON • Press button and select LIBRARY
DIFFMINIMUM
WEIGHING ONMAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
FORMULATION
DIFFERENCE
BASIC WEIGHING
ON
SETUP
NAME. Enter a library name, press Enter.
QUICK
CUSTOM CHECK
RELATIVE
MENU DEV. CALIBRATIONON STATISTICS
LIBRARY
SAMPLE PARTS
STATISTIC SIZESTD COUNTING
DEV 3 ON
DENSITY
LIBRARY FILLING
CHANGE
NAME MODE
MEAN CHANGE UNITS
ON SET BALANCE • Press button and select SAVE TO LIBRARY.
ANIMAL
SUM WEIGHING ON
CHECK WEIGHING
MAXIMUM ON
DIFFMINIMUM
WEIGHING
FORMULATION
ON • Press button and select RUN, press Enter.
DIFFERENCE ON
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM RELATIVE
MENU DEV.
STATISTIC
SAMPLE SIZE
CALIBRATIONON
3
LIBRARY A new screen appears . Place a sample on the pan
EXITLIBRARY
TO WEIGH NAME and wait for STABLE to appear, press Enter button,
then remove the 1st sample and place the second,
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
BASIC WEIGHING SETUP STATISTICS
press Enter button. Continue to do this until all
PARTSSTDCOUNTING
DEV ON samples have been weighed. The final screen will
FILLING
CHANGE MODE
MEAN CHANGE UNITS ON SET BALANCE
ANIMAL
SUMWEIGHING ON MENU
MAIN
automatically appear when the last sample is entered
CHECK WEIGHING
MAXIMUM CHANGE
ON MODE
DIFFMINIMUM
WEIGHING
ANIMAL WEIGHING SETUPONSTATISTICS as shown below.
FORMULATIONCHECK
DIFFERENCESTDWEIGHING
DEV ONSAMPLEON
SET SIZE
QUICK
CUSTOM CHECK
DENSITY
RELATIVE
MENU DEV.CALIBRATION ON
CHANGE LIBRARY
UNITS
CHANGE MODE
MEAN ON SET BALANCE
STATISTIC
SAMPLE SUM 3 WEIGHING
DIFFERENTIAL
SIZE 3 ON
DENSITY FORMULATE
LIBRARY NAME
MAXIMUM ON
QUICK CHECK
MINIMUM ON CURSOR
<LEFT>/<RIGHT> TO MOVE
STATISTIC SAMPLE SIZE = 3
DIFFERENCE
<ENTER> TO ACCEPT ON
SQC SAMPLE DONE = 3
RELATIVE DEV. ABORTCHANGEMENU
MENU TOCALIBRATION
CUSTOM <BACK> MAIN
ON RETURN TO
MODE
WEIGH STD DEV. SAMPLE = 0.012
MOLARITY
AUTO SAMPLE DETECT ON
DENSITY BASIC WEIGHING SETUP STATISTICS Go Back RELATIVE DEV. = 0.004
SAMPLE SIZE 3
PARTSSTDCOUNTING
DEV ON MEAN = 300.013
FILLING
CHANGE MODE
MEAN CHANGE UNITSON SET BALANCE Help SUM = 900.04
ANIMAL
SUMWEIGHING ON MAXIMUM = 300.03
CHECK WEIGHING
MAXIMUM WEIGH
ON -- SAMPLE 1 MINIMUM = 300.00
Print Enter
DIFFMINIMUM
WEIGHING ON DIFFERENCE = 0.03
FORMULATION
DIFFERENCE ON
QUICK 0% DEV.
CHECK
RELATIVE CALIBRATION ON LIBRARY 100% PRESS < ENTER > TO START ANOTHER RUN
CUSTOM MENU
STATISTIC
SAMPLE SIZE 3 PRESS < GO BACK > TO EXIT . . .
DENSITY
0.00
LIBRARY NAME
STATS ON GRAMS STABLE

SET NEW STOP MAIN
25
3.14 Density
Density determinations of solids and liquids can be made with the Voyager balance. A Density Determination Kit Part
Number 470007-010 is specifically designed to be used with Ohaus® Analytical Voyager balances. Illustrations in this
procedure refer to the density kit, however, you may use whatever lab apparatus will suit the requirements for density
measurements. The Voyager balance contains built in reference density tables for water and ethanol at temperatures
between 10° C and 30° C. It is not necessary to refer to any external tables to calculate density.
3.14.1 Balance Preparation with Density Kit

• Place the Support into position over the bracket mak-
ing sure the Support does not make contact with the
Bracket as shown in illustration.
Support
Bracket
Weigh Below Hook

Support
Equalizing Washer Bracket
Kit Components
• Allow the balance to warm up sufficiently before Support Mounting
making measurements.
3.14.2 Solid Density Determinations
• Open either the left or right side door of the balance The density Q is the quotient of the mass m and the
and remove the Pan as shown. volume V.
m
Q=
V
Density determinations are performed by using
Archimedes' principle. This princple states that
every solid body immersed in a fluid loses weight by
an amount equal to that of the fluid it displaces.
The density of a solid is determined with the aid of a
Go
Help
Prin
Back
liquid whose density Q0 is known (water or ethanol
t
Pan are usually used as auxiliary liquids). The solid is

weighed in air (A) and then in the auxiliary liquid (B).
Ente
r
The density Q can be calculated from the two

weighings as follows:
Balance Preparation
• Insert the Bracket into the balance where the Pan
was removed from.
A
Q • Q0
• On balances which are rated over 400g, place the A-B
Equalizing Washer on top of the Bracket as shown in
the illustration. The balance allows direct determination of the
buoyancy
P (P = A - B) and consequently the above formula can
be simplified:
A
Q= • Q0
P
Q = Density of the solid
A = Weight of the solid in air
B = Weight of the solid in the auxilary liquid
Q0 = Density of the auxiliary liquid at a given temperature
Mod
e
Units
Setu
p
Ente
r
Print
(this value depends on the temperature. The density

table is included in Voyager balances).
P = Buoyancy of the solid in the auxiliary liquid
Bracket and Washer Mounting
(corresponds to A - B).
26
3.14 Density (Cont.)
3.14.2 Solid Density Determinations (Cont.)
As previously mentioned, the balance contains built in density tables for water and and ethanol. In the the event that
a different liquid is to be used, provisions are made to enter the density of the desired liquid and enter its name into a
library. The following procedure uses water as an example.
Procedure
0%
Go Back 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
•
•
Press Enter button.
Press or arrow button and select DENSITY.
GRAMS STABLE
• Press or arrow button and select SOLID.
• Press or arrow button and select H2O.
MAIN MENU NOTE: At this point you could also select either ethanol
or a different auxiliary liquid. When a different auxiliary
CHANGE UNITS
CHANGE MODE SET BALANCE
liquid is selected, you must enter its density and
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE name it for the library.
BASIC WEIGHING
PARTS COUNTING
FILLINGMODE
CHANGE CHANGE UNITS
LIBRARY
SET BALANCE • Install a 250ml beaker (not supplied) as shown when
ANIMAL WEIGHING
CHECK WEIGHING using the density kit and suspend a precision cali-
DIFF WEIGHING
FORMULATION brated thermometer 0° C to 30° C on the edge of the
QUICK CHECK
STATISTIC
DENSITY
beaker.
• Suspend the Weigh Below Hook from the Bracket into

the beaker.
• Fill the beaker with auxiliaryliquid (liquid of known

density Q0' usually distilled water or ethanol). Insure
that the liquid will cover the sample by at least 1 cm
after immersion.
• Ensure that no air bubbles adhere to the immersed

part of the Weigh Below Hook. Remove air bubbles
by moving the Weigh Below Hook or by means of a
fine brush.
• Close the draft shield doors and tare the balance.
• Open the draft shield of the balance.

Beaker & Thermometer Installation
27
(Cont.) Procedure (Cont.)
• Press Enter button, ENTER TEMPERATURE is

displayed.
• Using the arrow buttons, enter the temperature of the
liquid in the beaker.
• Press Enter button, the display DENSITY SOLID
requests item to weighed, press the >O/T< button.
• Close the draft shield doors and weigh the solid
(weight A ) by pressing the Enter button. The display
now requests the weight in liquid.
• Open the draft shield of the balance and place the
solid in the Weighing Pan of the Weigh Below Hook
in the liquid as shown. Ensure that there are no air
Sample Weighing in Air
bubbles on the solid to be weighed.
• Close the draft shield doors and weigh the solid
(buoyancy P ) by pressing the Enter button. The
display indicates the density in grams/cc.
• Successive samples may be taken simply by press-
ing Enter with the SET bar highlighted.
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
WEIGHING SELECT MATERIAL
PARTS COUNTING
SOLID
FILLING
CHANGE MODE
LIQUID CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
ANIMAL WEIGHING
RECALL
CHECK WEIGHING
EXIT TO WEIGH
DIFF WEIGHING MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE
FORMULATION WEIGHING SELECT MATERIAL
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM MENU PARTS CALIBRATION
COUNTING LIBRARY
SOLID SELECT AUX. LIQUID
STATISTIC FILLING
CHANGE MODE
LIQUID
H2O CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
RECALL
ETHANOL
CHECK
EXITWEIGHING
TO WEIGH
OTHER DENSITY - - SOLID
Sample Weighing in Liquid DIFF WEIGHING
EXIT TO WEIGH
FORMULATION
QUICK CHECK ENTER TEMPERATURE
0% LIBRARY 100%
STATISTIC 00.0
DENSITY - - SOLID DENSITY WT IN AIR= TEMPERATURE=
WT IN<UP>/<DOWN>
LIQ= TO SCROLL
AUX CHARACTERS
DENSITY =
0% 100% <ENTER>
PLEASE TOPUT
ACCEPT
WEIGHT ON . . .
DENSITY - - SOLID <BACK> TO ABORT
WT IN AIR= TEMPERATURE= 20.0
WT IN LIQ= AUX DENSITY = 0.99823
0% 100% GRAMS/CC UNSTABLE
WEIGH IN AIR. . . DENSITY - - SOLID MAIN
WT IN AIR= TEMPERATURE= CONTRAST NEW SET
WT IN LIQ= AUX DENSITY =
GRAMS/CC STABLE 0% 100%
PLEASE PUT WEIGHT ON . . . DENSITY - - SOLID
CONTRAST NEW SET MAIN WT IN AIR= 50.03 TEMPERATURE= 20.0
GRAMS/CC STABLE 100%
WEIGH IN AIR. . . 0%
CONTRAST NEW SET MAINWT IN AIR= 50.03 TEMPERATURE=DENSITY
20.0 - - SOLID
GRAMS/CC STABLE
WEIGH IN LIQUID. . . 0% 100%
CONTRAST NEW SET MAIN
WT IN AIR= 50.03 TEMPERATURE= 20.0
WT IN LIQ= 49.08 AUX DENSITY = 0.99823
GRAMS/CC STABLE
CONTRAST NEW SET WEIGH IN MAIN
LIQUID. . . DENSITY - - SOLID
0% 100%
GRAMS/CC STABLE
CONTRAST NEW WT IN AIR= 50.03MAIN
SET TEMPERATURE= 20.0
WT IN LIQ= 49.08 AUX DENSITY = 0.99823
52.5699
GRAMS/CC STABLE
CONTRAST NEW SET MAIN
28
(Cont.)
For density determination of solids with a density less than 1 g/cm3, the bottom of the Weigh Below Hook for solids
must be used as it holds the solid body below the surface of the auxiliary liquid. If the buoyancy of the solid is
greater than the weight of the Weigh Below Hook, the Weigh Below Hook must be weighted by placing an additional
mass on the submerged part of the Weigh Below Hook as shown.
After loading the additional mass, tare the balance and start the weighing again.
• Wait until the balance has reached stability and note the displayed weight P (buoyancy of the solid).
• Now determine the density Q1 of the solid by dividing the first weight A (weight of the solid in air) by the second
result P (buoyancy) and multiplying this result by the known density Q0 of the auxiliary liquid (at the temperature
read off of the thermometer).
A
Q1 = • Q0 [g / cm3]
P
Mass
Sample
Buoyancy Sample Weighing
29
3.14.3 Improving the Accuracy of the Result of Solid Density Determinations
The following tips should help you improve the accuracy of the results in the density determination of solids.
Temperature
Solids are generally so insensitive to temperature fluctuations that the corresponding density changes are of no
consequence. However, as work is performed with an auxiliary liquid in the density determination of solids, their
temperature must be taken into account as the temperature has a greater effect with liquids and causes density
changes in the order of magnitude 0.1 to 1% per °C. This effect is already apparent in the third decimal place of the
result.
To obtain accurate results, we recommend that you always take the temperature of the auxiliary liquid into account an
all density determinations.
Air Buoyancy
1 cm3 air weighs approximately 1.2 mg (depending on the physical condition). As a consequence, in the weighing in
air, each solid experiences a buoyancy of this magnitude (the so-called "air buoyancy") per cm3 of its volume.
However, the air buoyancy must be taken into account only when a result is required with an accuracy of 3 to 4
decimal places. To correct for this, the air buoyancy (0.0012 g per cm3 volume of the body) is added to the calculated
result:
Calculated density + 0.0012 g/cm3 air buoyancy = effective density
Surface Tension of the Auxiliary Liquid

Adhesion of the liquid to the Weigh Below Hook causes an apparent weight increase of up 3 mg.
As the Weigh Below Hook is immersed in the auxiliary liquid in both weighings of the solid (in air and in the auxiliary
liquid) and the balance is tared before every measurement, the influence of the apparent weight increase can be
neglected.
To reduce the effect of air bubbles and to ensure the greatest possible accuracy, use a few drops of a wetting agent
(not supplied) and add them to the auxiliary liquid.
3.14.4 Liquid Density Determinations

The density of a liquid can be made using either a sinker of known volume or a Pycnometer. When using the sinker,
the sinker is weighed in air and then in the liquid whose density is to be determined. The density Q can be deter-
mined from the two weighings as follows:
Q = Density of the liquid
A = Weight of the sinker in air
Q= A-B B = Weight of the sinker in liquid
V V = Volume of the sinker
P = Buoyancy of the sinker in the liquid ( P= A-B )
When the Pycnometer is used, it is filled with a known volume of a liquid. The density is arrived at as follows:
Weight of full pycnometer - Weight of pycnometer Air
Density = +{ }
Volume of pycnometer density
NOTE: pycnometer may be obtained at laboratory supply firms.
• Follow the same procedure for solid density determi-

nation except select LIQUID under the Select material
display. The balance is prepared in the same manner.
30
3.15 Library
The Voyager balance can store approximately 200 names in the library. Four functions in the balance have provisions
for storing a library name, they are: Advanced Counting, Check Weighing, Differential Weighing and Formulation.
When a library name is selected, the associated function is also displayed along with the percentage of memory used
for the entry. A Library menu is provided which allows the selected library name and function to be run or deleted. If
you have accessed the library and do not want to run or delete a name an exit to weighing selection can be made
which does not affect the library.
Procedure
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
• Using the arrow buttons, select LIBRARY.
• Press Enter button. The LIBRARY menu is displayed
GRAMS STABLE
with all of the previously entered names and their
corresponding functions.
• Using the arrow buttons, select the name and function
you want to access.
• Press Enter button, a LIBRARY menu is displayed.
• Using the arrow buttons, select either RUN, DELETE,
MAIN MENU
LIBRARY
EXIT TO WEIGH
3.36% USED DELETE ALL or EXIT TO WEIGH. When RUN is
PART1 PC 0.41%
PART2 PC
CHANGE UNITS
0.45% selected, that particular balance operation is enabled
CHANGE MODE
FIXTURE CHK WT SET BALANCE
0.82%
MED1 DIFF WT 0.61% and can be run again. When a particular name is
GLUE#1 FORM 0.52%
GLUE#2
EXIT TO WEIGH
FORM 0.55% selected and the DELETE selection is made, that
particular name and function is removed from the
LIBRARY
MAIN MENU
3.36% USED library. DELETE ALL when selected removes the
EXIT TO WEIGH
PART1 PC 0.41%
PART2 PC 0.45% entire contents of the library.
CHANGE MODE
FIXTURE CHANGECHKUNITS
WT SET BALANCE
0.82%
MED1 DIFF WT 0.61% • Press Enter button.
GLUE#1 FORM 0.52%
GLUE#2 FORM 0.55%
EXIT TO WEIGH
CUSTOM MENU LIBRARY MAIN MENU
CALIBRATION LIBRARY 3.36% USED
EXIT TO WEIGH
PART1 LIBRARY: PART1PC 0.41%
PART2RUN PC 0.45%
CHANGE MODE
FIXTURE
DELETE CHANGE UNITS
CHK WT SET BALANCE
0.82%
MED1 DELETE ALL DIFF WT 0.61%
GLUE#1
EXIT TO WEIGH FORM 0.52%
GLUE#2 FORM 0.55%
EXIT TO WEIGH
31
3.16 Printing Data
Printing data to an external computer or printer requires that the communications parameters be set first. Refer to
Section 4, Setting up Your Balance.
Procedure
WEIGHT
• Press the Print button. Printing to an external printer
Go Back 0% 100% or computer will occur each time the Print button is
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
pressed unless autoprint feature is turned on in which
case printing can occur in a continuous fashion at
GRAMS STABLE specified intervals or each time a stable reading is
achieved.
• This section defines the various printing setups with

printing samples.
Time and Date The sample shown, indicates the status in the menus.
When time and date are entered in the balance with both
Time and Date options set to ON, each printout starts
with the date and time on the first line.
SAMPLE PRINTOUTS
TYPE= MM/DD/YY
TYPE= 24 HOUR
12/17/96 16:26:12
READOUT
STABILITY LEVEL FILTER = 0.5d
AVERAGING LEVEL FILTER = 1
AZT LEVEL = 0.5d
GLP PRINT OPTIONS
DATE & TIME = OFF
BALANCE ID = OFF
PROJECT NAME = OFF
USER NAME = OFF
DIFFERENCE = OFF
PRINT OPTION
AUTO PRINT = OFF
INTERVAL= 0
STABLE PRINT = OFF
NUMERIC DATA = OFF
DATE= OFF
TIME= OFF
PRINT REFERENCE = OFF
RS232 = 2400: NONE: 7 : 2
32
3.16 Printing Data (Cont.)
SAMPLE PRINTOUTS
Span Calibration Printout
When performing a Span calibration, a printout is auto- - - - - - SPAN CAL - - - - - -
matically made after the calibration mass is placed on 7/01/96 1:00:00 PM
the pan and the Print button is pressed. Bal Id 1234
Cal: 4000.00g
Old: 4000.00g
Dif: 0.00g
Wt. Ref......................................
USER NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -
Linearity Calibration Printout

When performing a Linearity calibration with GLP turned
on, a printout is automatically made after the calibration - - - - - LIN CAL - - - - - -
mass is placed on the pan and the Print button is 7/01/96 1:00:00 PM
pressed. Bal Id 1234
Cal: 4000.00g
Old: 3999.94g
Dif: 0.06g
Wt. Ref......................................
USER NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -
Calibration Test Printout

When performing a Calibration Test with GLP turned on,
a printout is available. When the display indicates the - - - - - CAL TEST - - - - - -
mass value to be placed on the pan, the balance the 7/01/96 1:00:00 PM
automatically displays the calibration weight required Bal Id 1234
and the Print button is pressed. Cal: 4000.00g
Act: 4000.04g
Dif: 0.04g
Wt. Ref......................................
USER NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -
33
4. SETTING UP YOUR BALANCE
The Voyager balance has nine menus under SET BALANCE which are listed as follows:
READOUT - User menu is used to adapt the balance to AUTOCAL - Function can be set ON or OFF.
environmental conditions. PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS - When selected, print data to
INTERFACE - Interface is used to set the balance up for external printer or computer.
communications. RESET - Allows the resetting of Readouts, RS232, Print
PRINT OPTION - Allows the setting of various print options. Option and GLP Print Option.
SET TIME/DATE - Permits setting time and date. SETUP GLP - GLP stands for Good Laboratory Practices.
This series of menus permits setting of time, date, GLP print
4.1 Readout options, balance I.D., project I.D. and user I.D.
The Readout menu enables you to set the balance SOFTWARE VERSION - Indicates software version and date.
averaging level, stability level (good, better, best) auto-
matic zero tracking (AZT) settings and legal for trade Procedure
(LFT) ON or OFF. • Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.
WEIGHT
• Using the arrow buttons, select SET BALANCE.
• Press or arrow button and select READ-
Help
Print
0.00 Enter OUT.
GRAMS STABLE • Press Enter button.
• Press or arrow button and select AVER-
AGING LEVEL.
• Press or arrow button and set the filter level.
MAIN MENU
• Repeat the same procedure for stability level.
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE • Press or arrow button and select AUTO
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
ZERO.
READOUT
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
CHANGE MODE
SETUP GLP
CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE • Press or arrow button and select AZT level.
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE • Press Enter button.
PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS READOUT SETUP
READOUT
RESET
CUSTOM MENUINTERFACE
CALIBRATION
AVERAGING LEVEL ;LIBRARY
1
• Press or arrow button and select LEGAL
LOCK OUT PRINT OPTION CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
CHANGE MODE LEVEL
STABLILITY 1
SOFTWARE SETUP
VERSIONGLP
AUTO ZERO 0.5
FOR TRADE.
SETLEGAL
TIME/DATE MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
FOR TRADE OFF
AUTOCAL
SAVE & EXIT READOUT READOUT SETUP • Press Enter button.
PRINT
EXITCURRENT
TO WEIGHSETTINGS
INTERFACE
AVERAGINGAVERAGING
LEVEL LEVEL
1 FILTER
RESET
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT
CALIBRATION
PRINT
CHANGE OPTION RETURN
CHANGE
MODE LEVEL
STABLILITY
TO
UNITS
WEIGH 1 SET BALANCE • Press or arrow button and select ON or
SETUP GOOD
GLP BETTER BEST
SOFTWARE VERSION AUTO ZERO 0.5
SETLEGAL
TIME/DATE
FOR TRADE OFF OFF.
AUTOCAL
SAVE & EXIT
PRINT
EXITCURRENT
TO WEIGHSETTINGS • Press Enter button.
AZT RESET
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK RESET
OUT ( ) = 5
PREVIOUS WEIGH
SOFTWARE VERSION
( ) = 10
• Press or arrow button and select SAVE &
EXIT.
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
READOUT READOUT SETUP • Press Enter button.
INTERFACE
AVERAGING LEVEL 1
PRINT
CHANGE OPTION
MODE LEVEL CHANGE MAIN
UNITS
SETUP MENU
SET BALANCE
STABLILITY 1 BALANCE
SETUP
AUTOGLP
ZERO 0.5
USER
USER
SETLEGAL
TIME/DATE
FOR TRADE AZT
AUTOCAL
INTERFACE
AVERAGE LEVEL OFF 10 WEIGHT
SAVE & SETUP
EXIT
STABLEGLP
OFF LEVEL CHANGE UNITS 10
PRINT CHANGE MODE SET BALANCE
EXITCURRENT
TO EXIT
WEIGH SETTINGS
TO WEIGH
RESET AZT0.5 OFF MENU
MAIN
CUSTOM MENU LFT1CALIBRATION
LOCK OUT
SETUP
RETURN BALANCE
OFF
WEIGH
TO Go Back 0% 100%
SAVE READOUT
3 & EXIT READOUT SETUP
SOFTWARE VERSION
0.00
INTERFACE
EXIT TO WEIGHAVERAGING LEVEL 1 Help
PRINT OPTION
CUSTOM MENU CHANGE MODE LEVEL
STABLILITY
CALIBRATION CHANGERETURN
UNITS
1 TO SET BALANCE
SETUP
AUTOGLPZERO WEIGH
0.5
SETLEGAL
TIME/DATE MAIN MENU Print Enter
FOR TRADE SETUP OFF BALANCE
AUTOCAL
SAVE &READOUT
EXIT READOUT SETUP
PRINT
EXITCURRENT SETTINGS
TOINTERFACE
WEIGH GRAMS STABLE
LEGAL FOR TRADE
AVERAGING LEVEL 1
RESET PRINT OPTION
CALIBRATION RETURN TO CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU
CUSTOM MENU
CHANGE MODE LEVEL
STABLILITY CHANGE UNITS
1 SET BALANCE
OFF
LFT LOCK OUT
SOFTWARE
SETUP
AUTOGLP
ON ZERO
VERSION
SETLEGAL
TIME/DATE
FOR TRADE
WEIGH
0.5
OFF
AUTOCAL
SAVE & EXIT
PRINT
EXITCURRENT
TO WEIGH SETTINGS
RESET CALIBRATION LIBRARY
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT
SOFTWARE VERSION
34
4.2 Interface
The Interface menu enables you to set the balance communication parameters for an RS 232 interface. The baud rate,
data bits, parity and stop bit can be set to match the communication requirements of external printers or computers.
Procedure
WEIGHT • Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU, press
Go Back 0% 100% Enter button.
• Using the arrow buttons, select SET BALANCE, press
Help
Print
0.00 Enter Enter button.
GRAMS STABLE • Press or arrow button and select INTER
FACE, press Enter button.
• Press or arrow button and select BAUD
RATE, press Enter button.
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600. ( 2400 is normal),
MAIN MENU
press Enter button.
• Press or arrow button and select DATA
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
BITS, press Enter button.
READOUT
INTERFACE
• Press or arrow button and select 7 or 8,
PRINT OPTION CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
CHANGE MODE
SETUP GLP press Enter button.
SET TIME/DATE MAIN MENU
SETUP BALANCE
AUTOCAL
RSERSETTINGS INTERFACE
• Press or arrow button and select PARITY,
PRINT CURRENT
INTERFACE
RESET
CUSTOM MENU
SOFTWARE P
BAUD
CHANGE
RATE
CALIBRATION
DATAMODE
VERSIONBITS
2400
LIBRARY
CHANGE UNITS
7 SET BALANCE
press Enter button.
SETUP
EXIT TO WEIGH GLP
PARITY NONE
S STOP BIT 2 MENU
MAIN OFF • Press or arrow button and select either
A SAVE & EXIT SETUP BALANCE
P EXIT TO
RP
RSER
WEIGH
INTERFACE
INTERFACE NONE. EVEN, ODD , 0 or 1, press Enter button.
CUSTOM MENU BAUD RATE
CALIBRATION BAUD RATE
2400
LIBRARY
SOFTWARE P VERSION
CHANGE
DATA
EXIT TO WEIGH
SETUP
MODE
300BITS
GLP
PARITY
CHANGE UNITS7
NONE
SET BALANCE • Press or arrow button and select STOP
1200
S STOP BIT 2 OFF
A SAVE
2400
4800& EXIT
BIT, press Enter button.
P EXIT TO WEIGH
9600
R
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY • Press or arrow button and select 1 or 2,
MAIN MENU EXIT TO WEIGH
SETUP BALANCE
RSER INTERFACE
press Enter button.
INTERFACE
BAUD RATE 2400
P
CHANGE
DATAMODE
BITS CHANGE UNITS
7 SET
MAIN BALANCE
MENU
• Press or arrow button and select SAVE and
SETUP GLP
PARITY NONE SETUP BALANCE
SEXIT TOBIT
STOP WEIGH
A SAVE & EXIT
RSER 2 INTERFACE OFF EXIT, press Enter button.
INTERFACE
BAUD RATE DATA BITS2400
P EXIT TO WEIGH P SET BALANCE
CHANGE
DATA
7 MODE
BITS CHANGE UNITS 7
R SETUP
CUSTOM MENU
SOFTWARE VERSION 8 GLP
CALIBRATION
PARITY LIBRARY NONE
S STOP BIT 2MAIN MENU OFF
EXIT TO WEIGH A SAVE & EXIT SETUP BALANCE
P EXIT TO WEIGH
RSER INTERFACE
R INTERFACE
BAUD RATE
CALIBRATION LIBRARY
2400
CUSTOM MENU
SOFTWARECHANGE
VERSION
P DATAMODEBITS CHANGE UNITS7 SET BALANCE
EXIT TO WEIGHSETUP GLP
PARITY NONE
S STOP BIT 2 OFF
A SAVE & EXIT
SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE
P EXIT TO WEIGH
R RSER INTERFACE LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CUSTOM MENU
SOFTWARE VERSION
INTERFACE
BAUD RATE PARITY 2400
EXIT TO WEIGH MODE
P
DATA BITS
NONE 7
SETUP GLP
PARITY
EVEN NONE
S STOPODDBIT 2 OFF
A SAVE0 & EXIT
P EXIT1 TO WEIGH
R CALIBRATION LIBARY WEIGHT
CUSTOM MENU
SOFTWARE VERSION
EXIT TO WEIGH
SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE Go Back 0% 100%
RSER INTERFACE
INTERFACE
P
BAUD RATE
CHANGE
DATAMODE
SETUP
BITS
GLP
PARITY
S STOP BIT
2400
CHANGE UNITS
7
NONE
2
SET BALANCE
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
INTERFACE
OFF
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
A SAVE & EXIT RSER

BAUD RATE STOP BIT
P EXIT TO WEIGH INTERFACE 2400 GRAMS STABLE
R P DATA CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU
CUSTOM MENU CHANGE 1 MODE
BITS
CALIBRATION LIBRARY 7
SOFTWARE VERSIONSETUP2 GLP
PARITY NONE
EXIT TO WEIGH S STOP BIT 2 OFF
A SAVE & EXIT
P EXIT TO WEIGH
R CALIBRATION LIBRARY
CUSTOM MENU
SOFTWARE VERSION
EXIT TO WEIGH
35
4.3 Print Option
The Print Option menu contains various print features which can be set ON or OFF and include Auto Print, Stable
Data only, Numeric Data only, Date, Time and Reference data.
Procedure
WEIGHT
Auto Print
When enabled, Auto Print causes the balance to auto-
Go Back 0% 100% matically output display data in one of three ways:
continuously, at user specified time intervals, or upon
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
stability. Auto print can also be set off.
GRAMS STABLE
CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU • Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.
• Using the arrow buttons, select SET BALANCE,
• Press or arrow button and select PRINT
MAIN MENU
OPTION.
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE • Press or arrow button and select AUTO
READOUT
INTERFACE PRINT.
PRINT OPTION
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITSLIBRARY SET BALANCE
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE
• Press Enter button, AUTO PRINT OPTIONS is dis-
AUTOCAL ENABLE
READOUT
PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS
AUTO
INTERFACEPRINT
PRINT OPTION
OFF
played.
RESET CHANGE STABLE
PRINT OPTION
MODEDATA CHANGE UNITS OFF SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
SOFTWARESETUP
VERSION
CALIBRATION
NUMERIC
GLP DATA
LIBRARY
OFF • Press or arrow button and select either
EXIT TO WEIGH
SETPRINT DATE
TIME/DATE OFF
PRINT TIME
AUTOCAL OFF OFF, CONTINUOUS, INTERVAL or STABLE.
PRINT
PRINT REFERENCE
CURRENT SETTINGS OFF
SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE
SAVE & EXIT
RESET
CUSTOM MENU
EXIT READOUT
SOFTWARETO WEIGH
CALIBRATION
VERSION PRINT OPTION
LIBRARY • Press Enter button, display returns to PRINT OP-
EXIT TOINTERFACE
AUTO PRINTAUTO PRINT OPTIONS
WEIGH OFF
PRINT
CHANGE OPTION
STABLE
MODEDATA CHANGE UNITSOFF SET BALANCE
TION.
OFF
SETUP GLP DATA
NUMERIC OFF
CONTINUOUS
SET TIME/DATE
PRINT DATE OFF
INTERVAL
AUTOCAL
PRINT TIME OFF
STABLE
PRINT CURRENT
PRINT SETTINGS
REFERENCE OFF
RESET
SAVE & EXIT CALIBRATION LIBRARY
CUSTOM MENU
SOEXIT TO WEIGH
EXIT TO WEIGH
Procedure
Print Stable Data
MAIN MENU
When selected, permits only stable display data to be
output.
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE • Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.
READOUT
INTERFACE • Press Enter button.
PRINT OPTION
CHANGE MODE LIBRARY SET BALANCE
CHANGE UNITS
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
PRINT CURRENT SETTINGSSETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE
RESET
CUSTOM MENU
READOUT PRINT OPTION LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
SOFTWARE VERSION
AUTO PRINT
INTERFACE OFF
EXIT TO WEIGH
STABLE
PRINT DATA CHANGE UNITS
OPTION OFF
CHANGE MODE
NUMERIC
SETUP GLP DATA OFF
SET BALANCE OPTION.
SETPRINT DATE
TIME/DATE OFF
PRINT TIME
AUTOCAL OFF • Press Enter button.
PRINT
PRINT REFERENCE
CURRENT SETTINGS SETUP MAIN
OFF MENU
BALANCE
SAVE & EXIT READOUT
RESET
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATIONPRINT OPTIONLIBRARY • Press or arrow button and select STABLE
S EXIT TO WEIGH AUTO PRINT
INTERFACE STABLE DATA
OFF
EXIT TO WEIGH PRINT
CHANGE OFF
STABLE DATA CHANGE UNITS
OPTION
MODE OFF SET BALANCE DATA.
NUMERIC
SETUP ON
GLP DATA OFF
SETPRINT DATE
TIME/DATE
PRINT TIME
AUTOCAL
OFF
OFF
• Press Enter button, STABLE DATA is displayed.
PRINT
PRINT REFERENCE
SAVE & EXIT
RESET
S EXIT TO WEIGH
EXIT TO WEIGH OFF or ON.
• Press Enter button, display returns to PRINT OP-
TION.
36
4.3 Print Option (Cont.)
Procedure
MAIN MENU Numeric Data
When set ON, only numeric data will be output.
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
READOUT • Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION LIBRARY SET BALANCE
CHANGE MODE
SETUP GLP
CHANGE UNITS
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE
RESET
CUSTOM MENU
READOUT PRINT OPTION
CALIBRATION LIBRARY • Press Enter button.
AUTO PRINT
SOFTWAREINTERFACE
VERSION OFF
STABLE
OPTION OFF
EXIT TO WEIGH
CHANGE
NUMERIC
SETUP
MODE
GLP DATA OFF
SET BALANCE
SETPRINT DATE
TIME/DATE OFF
PRINT TIME
AUTOCAL OFF OPTION.
PRINT
PRINT REFERENCE
CURRENT SETTINGS
SETUPMAIN MENU
OFF
BALANCE
SAVE & EXIT
RESET
CUSTOMREADOUT
MENU PRINT OPTION LIBRARY
CALIBRATION • Press Enter button.
S EXIT TO WEIGH
AUTO PRINT
INTERFACE OFF
NUMERIC DATA
EXIT TO WEIGH
STABLE
PRINT
CHANGE OFF
MODEDATA CHANGE UNITS
OPTION OFF SET BALANCE • Press or arrow button and select NU-
NUMERIC
SETUP GLP DATA
ON OFF
SETPRINT DATE
TIME/DATE
PRINT TIME
AUTOCAL
OFF
OFF
MERIC DATA.
PRINT
PRINT REFERENCE
SAVE & EXIT
RESET
• Press Enter button, NUMERIC DATA is displayed.
S EXIT TO WEIGH
EXIT TO WEIGH • Press or arrow button and select either
OFF or ON.
TION.
MAIN MENU Procedure

Print Date
When the Date function is set ON, allows the balance to
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
READOUT
output the current date to the printer.
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
CHANGE UNITS • Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE • Press Enter button.
RESET
MAIN MENU LIBRARY • Using the arrow buttons, select SET BALANCE,
SOFTWARE VERSION SETUP BALANCE
EXIT TO WEIGH
READOUT PRINT OPTION • Press Enter button.
AUTO PRINT
INTERFACE OFF
STABLE
PRINT
CHANGE MODE
NUMERIC
SETUP
DATA CHANGE UNITS
OPTION
GLP DATA
OFF
OFF
SET BALANCE • Press or arrow button and select PRINT
SETPRINT DATE
TIME/DATE OFF
PRINT TIME
AUTOCAL OFF OPTION.
PRINT
PRINT REFERENCE
SAVE & EXIT
RESET
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE LIBRARY • Press Enter button.
S EXIT TO WEIGH
EXIT TO WEIGH
READOUT
INTERFACE
AUTO PRINT
PRINT OPTION
PRINT DATEOFF
PRINT OFF
OPTION
STABLE DATA OFF
CHANGE MODE
SETUP ON
GLP DATA
NUMERIC
CHANGE UNITS
OFF
SET BALANCE DATE.
SET TIME/DATE
PRINT DATE OFF
AUTOCAL
PRINT TIME OFF • Press Enter button, PRINT DATE is displayed.
PRINT CURRENT
PRINT SETTINGS
REFERENCE OFF
RESET
SAVE & EXIT
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY • Press or arrow button and select either
S EXIT TO WEIGH
TION.
37
4.3 Print Option (Cont.)
Procedure
MAIN MENU Print Time
When Print Time is turned ON, current time will be output
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE to the printer.
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
READOUT
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
CUSTOM CHANGE
MENU CALIBRATION
MODE LIBRARY SET BALANCE
CHANGE UNITS • Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE • Press Enter button.
RESET
CUSTOM MENU
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
CALIBRATION LIBRARY • Using the arrow buttons, select SET BALANCE,
SOFTWARE VERSION
EXIT TO INTERFACE
WEIGH
AUTO PRINT OFF • Press Enter button.
STABLE
PRINT
CHANGE OPTION
MODE DATA CHANGE UNITS OFF SET BALANCE
SET
NUMERIC
SETUP
PRINT
GLP DATA
DATE
TIME/DATE
OFF
OFF
PRINT TIME
AUTOCAL OFF
PRINT
PRINT REFERENCE
OPTION.
SAVE & EXIT
RESET
CUSTOM MENU
S EXIT TO WEIGH
CALIBRATION
SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE
LIBRARY • Press Enter button.
EXIT TO WEIGH
READOUT
INTERFACE
AUTO PRINT
PRINT OPTION
PRINT TIME
PRINT OPTION
STABLE DATA CHANGE UNITS OFF
CHANGE
SETUP
OFF
MODE
NUMERIC
ONGLP DATA OFF
SET BALANCE
TIME.
SET TIME/DATE
PRINT DATE OFF
AUTOCAL
PRINT TIME OFF • Press Enter button, PRINT TIME is displayed.
PRINT CURRENT
PRINT SETTINGS
REFERENCE OFF
RESET
SAVE & EXIT
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY • Press or arrow button and select either
S EXIT TO WEIGH
TION.
MAIN MENU
Procedure
Print Reference
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
READOUT
When the Print Reference function is set ON, print the
INTERFACE value of weight used as a reference to the printer.
PRINT OPTION
CHANGE UNITS
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE • Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.
AUTOCAL ENABLE
RESET SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE
SOFTWARE VERSION
READOUT
EXIT TO WEIGH
AUTO PRINT
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
OFF
STABLE
OPTION OFF
CHANGE
NUMERIC
SETUP
MODE
GLP DATA OFF
SET BALANCE
SETPRINT DATE
TIME/DATE OFF
PRINT TIME
AUTOCAL OFF • Press or arrow button and select PRINT
PRINT
PRINT REFERENCE
SAVE & EXIT
RESET
CUSTOM MENU SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE
CALIBRATION LIBRARY OPTION.
S EXIT TO WEIGH
EXIT TO WEIGH
AUTO PRINT
INTERFACE PRINT REFERENCE
OFF • Press Enter button.
STABLE
PRINT
CHANGE OFF DATA CHANGE UNITS
OPTION
MODE OFF SET BALANCE
ON
NUMERIC
SETUP GLP DATA OFF • Press or arrow button and select PRINT
SETPRINT DATE
TIME/DATE OFF
PRINT TIME
AUTOCAL
PRINT
PRINT REFERENCE
CURRENT SETTINGS
OFF
OFF
DATE.
SAVE & EXIT
RESET
CUSTOM MENU
S EXIT TO WEIGH
CALIBRATION LIBRARY • Press Enter button, PRINT DATE is displayed.
EXIT TO WEIGH
OFF or ON.
TION.
• After making all selections in Print Option, press
arrow button and select SAVE & EXIT.
• Press Enter button, display returns to WEIGHT dis
play.
38
4.4 Setup GLP
Setup GLP (Good Laboratory Practices) menu allows
the selection of Time, Balance Identification Number,
WEIGHT
Identification Number, Project Number, Calibration and
Go Back 0% 100% Name data to be printed. The purpose of this menu is to
permit the printing of the above selected items. These
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
items are not displayed. The default setting is off. When
an external printer is used, and all items are set ON and
GRAMS STABLE the balance is calibrated, the printer will print out calibra-
tion data for audit trail purposes and will indicate date,
and time. Since there are many displays used in this
procedure, not all are shown.
Procedure
MAIN MENU
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS
MAIN
SETUP MENUSET BALANCE
BALANCE • Press Enter button.
READOUT
INTERFACE • Using the arrow buttons, select SET BALANCE.
PRINT OPTION
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL
SETUP MAIN MENU
BALANCE • Press or arrow button and select SETUP
RESET READOUT SETUP GLP
LOCK OUT INTERFACE
PROJECT NAME
LIBRARY GLP.
PRINT
SOFTWARECHANGE
VERSIONOPTION
USERMODE
NAME CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
SETUP
GLP GLP
PRINT OPTIONS • Press Enter button.
SET TIME/DATE
SAVE & EXIT
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE • Press or arrow button and select
RESET READOUT CALIBRATION SETUP GLP
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT INTERFACE ENTER PROJECT NAME
PROJECT NAME
LIBRARY
PROJECT NAME.
SOFTWARE PRINT
CHANGE
USEROPTION
MODE
NAME
VERSION CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE
SETUP
SET
GLP GLP
PRINT OPTIONS
TIME/DATE
SAVE & EXIT
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
<LEFT>/<RIGHT>
PRINT<ENTER>
CURRENTTO
TO MOVE CURSOR
SETTINGS
ACCEPT
• Continue in the menu and enter the User Name,
RESET<BACK> TO ABORT
CALIBRATION LIBRARY
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT GLP Print Options (these are limited to 10characters
SOFTWARE
each) and then save. The GLP Print Options can be
set ON or OFF.
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
• After making all selections in Setup GLP, press
READOUT
INTERFACE
SETUP GLP arrow button and select SAVE & EXIT.
PROJECT NAME
PRINT OPTION
CHANGE
SETUP
MODE
USER NAME
GLP GLP
CHANGE
PRINT OPTIONS
UNITS SET BALANCE
• Press Enter button, display returns to WEIGHT dis-
SET TIME/DATE
SAVE & EXIT
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH play.
SETUP MAIN MENU
BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT READOUT SETUP GLP
INTERFACE
SOFTWARE VERSION
PROJECT NAME ENTER USER NAME
PRINT
CHANGE OPTION
USER MODE
SETUP
GLP GLP
PRINT OPTIONS
SET TIME/DATE
SAVE & EXIT
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
PRINT<ENTER>
CURRENTTO SETTINGS
ACCEPT
RESET<BACK> TO ABORTCALIBRATION MAIN MENULIBRARY
CUSTOM MENU SETUP BALANCE
LOCK OUT
SOFTWAREREADOUT
VERSION SETUP GLP
INTERFACE
PROJECT NAME
PRINT
CHANGE
USEROPTION
MODE
SETUP
GLP GLP
PRINT OPTIONS
SET TIME/DATE
SAVE & EXIT
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
RESET SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE
CALIBRATION LIBRARY
CUSTOM MENU
LOVK OUT WEIGHT
SOFTWAREREADOUT
VERSION SETUP GLP
INTERFACE
PROJECT NAME GLP PRINT OPTIONS
PRINT
CHANGE DATE
USEROPTION
MODE & TIME CHANGE UNITS OFF SET BALANCE
NAME Go Back 0% 100%
SETUP BALANCE
GLP GLP ID
PRINT OPTIONS OFF
0.00
SET PROJECT
& EXIT NAME
TIME/DATE
SAVE OFF Help
AUTOCALUSER
EXIT NAME
TO WEIGH OFF
PRINTCALIBRATION
Print Enter
RESET SAVE & EXIT LIBRARY
LOCKEXITOUT TO WEIGH
SOFTWARE VERSION GRAMS STABLE
39
4.5 Set Time/Date
Permits entering time and date into the balance. A battery backup is used for the memory, time and date information.
The life of the battery is up to five years. Time and date information appears on printed data and to an external
computer when connected to the balance.
Procedure
Help
Print 0.00 Enter

•
•
Using the arrow buttons, select SET BALANCE.
Press Enter button.
GRAMS STABLE • Press or arrow button and select SET
TIME/DATE.
• Press Enter button, SETUP DATE/TIME is displayed.
• Press or arrow button and select DATE
TYPE.
• Press Enter button, SELECT DATE TYPE is dis-
MAIN MENU
played. Six formats are shown.
• Press or arrow button and select format for
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE date.
READOUT
INTERFACE • Press Enter button.
PRINT OPTION
CUSTOMCHANGE
MENU CALIBRATION
MODE LIBRARY SET BALANCE
CHANGE UNITS
SETUP GLP • Press or arrow button and select SET
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE
DATE.
RESET SETUP DATE/TIME
CUSTOM MENU READOUTCALIBRATION
LOCK OUT INTERFACE
DATE TYPE
LIBRARY
MM/DD/YY
• Press Enter button, SET DATE is displayed with the
SOFTWAREPRINT
VERSION
SETOPTION
DATE 10/10/96
CHANGE MODE
SETUP
TIMEGLP
TYPE 12 HOUR YEAR, MONTH, DAY, SET CALENDAR and EXIT TO
SETSET
TIME/DATE
TIME 1:51:16PM
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH WEIGH.
RESET
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT
CALIBRATION LIBRARY • Press or arrow button and select YEAR.
SOFTWARE VERSION
• Press Enter button, SET YEAR is displayed.
• Using the arrow buttons enter the year.
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
READOUT SETUP DATE/TIME • Repeat the above procedure for the month, day and
INTERFACE
DATE TYPE MM/DD/YY
PRINT
SETOPTION
DATE
CHANGE MODE 10/10/96 SET BALANCE
CHANGE UNITS
time. The displays are not shown here.
SETUP
TIMEGLP
TYPE 12 HOUR
SETSET
TIME/DATE
TIME 1:51:16PM • When the year, month and day have been entered,
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH MAIN MENU
PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS SETUP BALANCE
SETUP DATE/TIME
scroll to SET CALENDAR and press Enter button.
RESET READOUT
CALIBRATION LIBRARY
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT INTERFACE
DATE TYPE SET DATEMM/DD/YY
PRINT
SOFTWARE VERSIONSETOPTION
CHANGE YEAR
DATE
MODE CHANGE96 10/10/96 SET BALANCE
UNITS
SETUP
TIMEGLP
MONTH
TYPE 1012 HOUR
SETSET
TIME/DATE
DAY
TIME 10
1:51:16PM
AUTOCAL
EXITSET
TO CALENDAR
WEIGH
EXIT TO WEIGH
RESET CALIBRATION MAIN MENU
LIBRARY
LOCK OUT
READOUT
SOFTWARE VERSION SETUP DATE/TIME
INTERFACE
DATE TYPE SET DATE
MM/DD/YY
PRINT
SETOPTION
YEAR SET YEAR
CHANGE DATE
MODE CHANGE96 10/10/96 SET BALANCE
UNITS WEIGHT
SETUP
TIMEGLP
MONTH
TYPE 96 1012 HOUR
SETSET
TIME/D<ATE
DAY
TIME<UP>/<DOWN> TO 10
1:51:16PM
SCROLL CHACTERS
AUTOCAL
EXITSET
TO CALENDAR
WEIGH
<LEFT>/<RIGHT> TO MOVE CURSOR Go Back 0% 100%
EXIT <ENTER>
TO WEIGH TO ACCEPT
RESET
0.00
CUSTOM MENU <BACK>CALIBRATION
TO QUIT LIBRARY Help
LOCK OUT
SOFTWARE VERSION
Print Enter
GRAMS STABLE
40
4.6 Auto Calibration
Automatic calibration of the balance can be accomplished when equipped with this option. On balances which do not
contain AutoCalTM, the automatic calibration function is inoperative. On balances equipped with AutoCalTM, a second
screen permits turning this function ON or OFF.
Procedure
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
•
•
Press Enter button.
GRAMS STABLE • Press or arrow button and select
AUTOCAL ENABLE.
• Press or arrow button and select ON or
OFF.
• Press Enter button, display returns to SETUP BAL-
MAIN MENU ANCE.
• Press arrow button and select EXIT TO WEIGH.
• Press Enter button, display returns to WEIGH.
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
READOUT
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
RESET CALIBRATION MAIN MENU
LIBRARY
LOCK OUT
READOUT
SOFTWARE VERSION AUTOCAL
OFF
INTERFACE
ON OPTION
PRINT
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT
SOFTWARE VERSION
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
41
4.7 Print Current Settings
When this function is selected, and the Enter button is pressed, all settings which were made in the balance are sent
to an external printer or computer. This is a quick method of checking the balance settings.
Procedure
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
•
•
Press Enter button.
GRAMS STABLE • Press or arrow button and select PRINT
CURRENT SETTINGS.
• Press Enter button, a small screen appears for a few
seconds with the word PRINTING . . . displayed.
When the data has been sent, the word PRINTING is
no longer displayed.
MAIN MENU • Press arrow button and select EXIT TO WEIGH.
• Press Enter button, display returns to WEIGH.

MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
READOUT
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
SOFTWARE VERSION
READOUT
PRINTING . . .
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT
SOFTWARE VERSION
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
42
4.8 Reset
When this function is selected, and the Enter button is pressed, settings which were made in Readouts, RS232, Print
Option and GLP Print Option can be reset to factory settings.
Procedure
WEIGHT
0%
Go Back 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
• Press or arrow button and select RESET.
GRAMS STABLE
CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU • Press Enter button, RESET TO FACTORY SETTING
is displayed.
• Press arrow button and select either RESET
READOUTS, RESET RS232, RESET PRINT OP-
TION, or RESET GLP PRINT OPTION. Selecting
MAIN MENU
any of these items will reset that function to the
factory setting.
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE • Press Enter button, display returns to SETUP
BALANCE.
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY • Press arrow button and select EXIT TO WEIGH.
MAIN MENU
SETUP BALANCE • Press Enter button, display returns to WEIGH.
READOUT
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
RESET MAIN MENU
CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION SETUP BALANCE
LIBRARY
LOCK OUT READOUT RESET TO FACTORY SETTING
SOFTWARE VERSIONINTERFACE
RESET READOUTS
RESET
PRINT
CHANGE RS232 CHANGE UNITS
OPTION
MODE SET BALANCE
RESET
SETUP GLPPRINT OPTION
SETRESET GLP PRINT OPTION
TIME/DATE
EXIT TO WEIGH
AUTOCAL
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT
SOFTWARE VERSION
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
43
4.9 Lock Out
Lock Out when selected permits various measurement units, calibration methods, and balance functions to be
selected and either turned on or off or locked out.
Procedure
WEIGHT
• Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU,
0%
press Enter button.
Go Back 100%
Help
Print
0.0 Enter
press Enter button.
• Press or arrow button and select LOCK
GRAMS STABLE
CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU OUT.
• Press Enter button, LFT LOCK screen is displayed.
• Press arrow button and select either UNIT
LOCK, CALIBRATION LOCK or FUNCTION LOCK.
• Depending on which category was selected, you may
MAIN MENU
select either ON or OFF and press Enter button.
• When you have finished selecting items to be ON or
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE OFF, use the arrow buttons and scroll to SAVE &
EXIT, press Enter button, display returns to WEIGHT.
SETUP MAIN MENU
BALANCE
READOUT
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT READOUT LFT LOCK
SOFTWARE VERSION UNIT LOCK
INTERFACE
CALIBRATION
PRINT
CHANGE OPTION
MODE LOCK
FUNCTION
SETUP GLP LOCK
SETEXIT TO WEIGH
TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT
SOFTWARE VERSION
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print 0.0 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
44
4.10 Custom Menu
Custom menu provides a convienent way of selecting one or more balance functions. By entering the Custom menu,
you can quickly select your most used function and operate the balance. There are 16 items in the menu which
parallel the menus in the CHANGE MODE and SET BALANCE menus and are listed with the associated paragraphs
in the manual at the bottom of the page..
Procedure
WEIGHT
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
•
•
Using the arrow buttons, select CUSTOM MENU.
Press Enter button, CUSTOM MENU is displayed.
GRAMS STABLE
CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU • Press or arrow button and select SETUP
CUSTOM MENU.
• Press Enter button, FUNCTION LIST is displayed.
This list contains the various functions available in the
balance.
MAIN MENU
• Press or arrow button and select desired
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE functions.
MAIN MENU
CUSTOM • Press Enter button, FUNCTION SELECT with a YES
SETUP CUSTOM MENU
EXIT TO WEIGH
or NO choice is displayed.
Press or arrow button and select either
MAIN MENU
CUSTOM
SETUP CUSTOM MENU
FUNCTION LIST YES or NO. When YES is selected, that function is
EXIT TO WEIGH
FILLING CALIBRATION
CUSTOM MENU YES
LIBRARY
CHECK
CHANGE WEIGHING
MODE CHANGE UNITSNO SET BALANCE available under the Custom menu for operation.
ANIMAL WEIGHING NO
EASY COUNT NO • Repeat the above steps for all functions to be in-
ADVANCED COUNT NO MAIN MENU
CUSTOM
DIFF WEIGHING NO
SETUP CUSTOM MENU
FUNCTION LIST cluded in the Custom menu.
QUICK CHECK
CUSTOM MENU EXIT CALIBRATION
TO WEIGH NO LIBRARY
INTERFACE NO
FORMULATION
STATISTICS CHANGEPRINT
MODE
NO
OPTION
NOCHANGE UNITSNO SET BALANCE
• When you entered all of the selected functions,using
SETUP GLP NO
SET TIME/DATE NO the arrow button, scroll down to SAVE & EXIT.
AUTOCAL ENABLE NO
PRINT CURRENT SETUP
RESET
NO
NO
• Press Enter button. The selections you have made
SAVE & EXIT
EXIT TO WEIGH are stored and can be accessed when the Custom
menu is selected.
MAIN MENU
CUSTOM MENU
FILLING Paragraph References
SETUP CUSTOM MENU
EXIT TO WEIGH
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE FILLING - Paragraph 3.7
CHECK WEIGHING - Paragraph 3.9
ANIMAL WEIGHING - Paragraph 3.8
EASY COUNT - Paragraph 3.61
ADVANCED COUNT - Paragraph 3.62
DIFFERENTIAL WEIGHING - Paragraph 3.10
Example of Filling Entered into Custom Menu
QUICK CHECK WEIGHING - Paragraph 3.12
FORMULATION - Paragraph 3.11
STATISTICS - Paragraph 3.13
READOUT - Paragraph 4.1
INTERFACE - Paragraph 4.2
PRINT OPTION - Paragraph 4.3
SETUP GLP - Paragraph 4.4
SET TIME/DATE - Paragraph 4.5
AUTO CALIBRATION - Paragraph 4.6
PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS - Paragraph 4.7
LEGAL FOR TRADE (LFT) - Paragraph 4.12
45
4.11 Menu Lock-Out Protection
Access to the various menus can be disabled setting the Lockswitch located on the PC board inside the balance to
OFF position. The Lockswitch locks out certain menus when Legal For Trade is turned ON. The default setting for
the Lockswitch is OFF.
Type Approved/Legal for Trade Procedure

Balance Sealing • Turn the display off and unplug the power cord.
All Voyager balances may be sealed for type approved/
legal for trade applications. Type Approved balances • On balances with a draft shield, slide the door open
include a lead seal with wire and security screw as shown and remove the pan and cover plate. Higher capacity
in the figures. balances with a 6" or 8" pan do not have a cover
plate.
For type approved balances consult local Weights and
Measures officials to determine sealing method require- • On balances without a draft shield, remove the pan
ments. and cover plate.
After the balance has been set up properly and LFT is set • Remove the protective cover seal.
ON, proceed to seal the balance.
• The Lockswitch is located to the left of the pan
support hole.
• Select the desired position on the Lockswitch and

reassemble the balance.
Lock Switch
shown in Locked
Position
Pan
Go
Ba
ck
He
lp
Prin
0%
t
NE
TW
EIG
HT
CE
CO NTE
>O/T
0.0
NT R O
RA
< ST F 0
100
MO
VE G
HIG RAM
HL S
IGH
T U
0 %
MA NSTA
IN B
ME LE
NU En
ter
OHAU
S ®
>O/T
<
Sealing Screw Cover Plate

Cover Seal
Lead Seal
Example of Sealing Method
46
4.12 Legal for Trade (LFT)
Legal for trade (LFT) is a software controlled option which can be set Legal For Trade ON or OFF. When set ON,
certain items in the Calibration and Set Balance menus are automatically preset and locked to permit the balance to
operate in a legal for trade application and works in conjunction with a Lock Out switch. Default setting is OFF. The
Readout menu enables you to set the balance legal for trade (LFT) ON or OFF. See default table.
Procedure
Go Back 0% 100%
Help
Print
0.00 Enter
GRAMS STABLE
• Press or arrow button and select READ-
CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU OUT.
• Press or arrow button and select LEGAL
FOR TRADE.
MAIN MENU
• Press or arrow button and select ON.
MAIN
SETUP MENU
BALANCE
• Press or arrow button and select SAVE &
READOUT
EXIT.
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
CHANGE MODE
SETUP GLP
CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE • Press Enter button.
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
SETUPMAIN MENU
BALANCE NOTE:
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT READOUT READOUT SETUP When LFT is turned ON, the last digit on the weight
INTERFACE
SOFTWARE VERSION
AVERAGING LEVEL 1
PRINT
CHANGE OPTION
MODE LEVEL
STABLILITY CHANGE UNITS
1 SET BALANCE display has a white colored block behind it. This signifies
SETUP
AUTOGLP
ZERO 0.5
SETLEGAL
TIME/DATE
FOR TRADE ON
that the balance is in a legal for trade operational mode
AUTOCAL
SAVE & EXIT
PRINT
EXITCURRENT
TO WEIGHSETTINGS and that the last digit should be ignored. The CENTER
RESET
CUSTOM MENU
LOCK OUT
WEIGH
OF Zero is displayed only for LFT operation.
SOFTWARE VERSION
LFT DEFAULT TABLE

LFT and Lockswitch Default Value
Set Balance Menu
Readout
Averaging Level Unlocked
Stability Level Locked to 1
Auto Zero Limited to OFF & 0.5
Interface Unlocked
Print Option
Auto Print Unlocked
Stable Data Locked ON
Numeric Data Unlocked WEIGHT
Print Data Unlocked Go Back 0% 100%

Print Time Unlocked
0.00
Help
Print Reference Unlocked
Setup GLP Unlocked Print Enter
Set Time and Date Unlocked CENTER OF 0 GRAMS STABLE

Autocal Enable Locked CONTRAST MOVE HIGHLIGHT MAIN MENU
Print Current Settings Unlocked
47
5. CARE AND MAINTENANCE
To keep the balance operating properly, the housing and platform should be kept clean and free from foreign material.
If necessary, a cloth dampened with a mild detergent may be used. Keep calibration masses in a safe dry place.
5.1 Troubleshooting
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE(S) REMEDY
Unit will not turn on. Power cord not plugged in or Check power cord connections.
properly connected to balance.
Incorrect weight reading. Balance was not re-zeroed before Press O/T with no weight on
weighing. the pan, then weigh item.
Balance not properly calibrated. Recalibrate correctly.
Cannot display weight in desired Desired unit not selected. Check setting.
unit or cannot access desired
weighing mode.
Unable to store menu settings/ Exit was not selected. You MUST use SAVE &Exit to
changes. leave menus and save settings.
RS232 interface not working. Print menu settings not properly Verify interface settings in RS232
set up. menu correspond to those of
peripheral device.
Cable connections. Check cable connections.
Random segments displayed or Turn power off, then turn on again.

display locks up. Microprocessor locks up. If condition persists, unit must be
serviced.
Unable to change Lock set ON. Set Lock switch to OFF.

settings. (LFT set ON)
Excessive air current Check environmental condition.

Unstable readings.
Place balance on a stable surface
Vibration on table surface. or change averaging level.
Error message display. See Error Codes list.
48
5.2 RS232 Interface
Voyager balances are equipped with a bi-directional
RS232 compatible interface for communication with RS232 Connection
printers and computers. When the balance is connected
directly to a printer, displayed data can be output at any
time by simply pressing PRINT.
Connecting the balance to a computer enables you to

operate the balance from the computer, as well as
receive data such as displayed weight, weighing mode,
stability status, etc.
The following sections describe the hardware and
software provided with the balance
Hardware
On the rear of the balance, the right-hand, 9-pin male Rear of Balance
subminiature “D” connector is provided for interfacing to
other devices. The pinout and pin connections are shown
in the adjacent illustration.
The balance will not output any data unless pin 5 (CTS)
is held in an ON state (+3 to +15 V dc). Interfaces not RS232 Commands
utilizing the CTS handshake may tie pin 5 to pin 6 to
All communication is accomplished using standard ASCII
defeat it.
format. Only the characters shown in the following table
are acknowledged by the balance. Invalid command
Output Formats response "ES" error indicates the balance has not
Data output can be initiated in one of three ways: 1) By regonized the command. Commands sent to the balance
pressing PRINT; 2) Using the Auto Print feature; 3) must be terminated with a carriage return (CR) or
Sending a print command (“P”) from a computer. carriage return-line line feed (CRLF). For example, a tare
command should appear as shown in the adjacent
The output format is illustrated in the RS232 command diagram. Data output by the balance is always terminated
table which follows. with a carriage return - line feed (CRLF).
.
TARE *
PRINT *
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
RS232 COMMAND TABLE
Command 1 N/C
Character Description 2 Data Out (TXD)
3 Data In (RXD)
? Print current mode Field: Mode Stab CR LF 4* Tare (External signal)
Length: 5 1 1 1 5 Clear To Send (CTS)
6 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
blank if stable 7 Ground
“ ? ” if unstable 8 Request To Send (RTS)
9* Print (External signal)
mg GN N
g tael tical * External PRINT and/or TARE
kg tael custm
dwt tael
switches may be installed
Pcs
ct momme % as shown in the diagram.
oz lb Momentary contact
oz t switches must be used.
nnnnA Set Auto Print feature to “nnnn” nnn = 0 Turns feature OFF
(see table). nnn = S Output on stability
nnn = C Output is continuous
nnnn = 1-3600 Sets Auto Print
Interval
49
5.2 RS232 Interface ( Cont.)
RS232 COMMAND TABLE (Cont.)
Command
Character Description
xD Set 1 second print delay (set x = 0 for OFF, or x = 1 for ON)
F Print current function.

0 = minimum level
xI Set Averaging Filter Level to “x”,
1 =
where x = 0 to 9 (see table).
2 =
If LFT, level 0 to 2.
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 = maximum level
xM Places balance in mode “x”, 1 = milligrams

where x = 1 to 17 (see table). 2 = grams
3 = kilo grams
If unit or mode is not already 4 = dwt
enabled, command will be ignored. 5 = Carats
6 = Ounces
7 = Ounces troy
8 = Grains
9 = Taels Hong Kong
10 = Taels Singapore
11 = Taels Taiwan
12 = Mommes
13 = Decimal Pounds
14 = Pounds-Ounces
combined
15 = Newton's
16 = tical
17 = Custom Units
P Print display data
T Same effect as pressing O/T button.
V Print EPROM version
Esc V Print balance ID (13 characters).
xZ Set Auto Zero to “x”,where x = 0 to 3 ). 0=Off, 1=0.5d, 2=1d, 3=5d.If LFT,

programs Auto zero level from 0 to 1.
Esc R Resets Setup and Print menus to factory defaults.

CAUTION: This will reset RS232 configuration.
ON Turns balance on.
OFF Turns balance off.
? Print current weigh mode.
50
Command
# Print current Parts Count Reference Weigh.
% Print current Percent Reference Weigh.
xA Set Auto Print feature, action CA - continuous printing, SA - print on stability,

0A - turns all selections off.
ID Print Current ID String.
XID Program User ID String, 1-8 characters.
SN Show Serial Number.
xS Print Stable Only. Where x =0 Off and x=1 On.
TIME Print Current Time. Note, a ? mark will follow if date or time has not been set.
SETDATE Set Date Command and remove Invalid Indicator
SETTIME Set Time Command and Remove Invalid Time Indicator
DATE Prints Current Date. Note, a ? mark will follow the year if date or time has not
been set.
51
5.3 Error Codes List
Error Codes List
The following list describes the various error codes and which can appear on the display and the suggested remedy.
Data Errors
1.0 Transient error (hardware error, probably static discharge). If error persists, the balance must be
serviced.
1.1 Balance temperature transducer hardware error.
1.2 No data from main board.
Tare Errors
2.0 Balance is unable to stabilize within time limit after taring. Environment is too hostile or balance needs
recalibration.
Calibration Errors
3.0 Incorrect or no calibration mass used for calibration. Recalibrate with correct masses.
3.1 Balance was unable to acquire stable data during calibration. The balance will try again.
RS232 Errors
4.4 RS232 buffer is full.
User Errors
7.0 User entry out of bounds.
7.2 Number outside of display capacity.
Over-Under Load Errors

8.0 Hardware error causing an internal weight signal which is too low. Check if pan is off. If not, the balance
must be serviced.
8.1 Hardware error caused by an internal weight signal which is too high. Check load on the pan which may
be excessive. If error persists, the balance must be serviced.
8.2 Power-on load out of specification (LFT only)
8.3 Rated capacity exceeded. Remove excessive weight from pan.
8.4 Underload condition on balance. Check that the proper pan is installed.
8.5 AutoCalTM weight internal sensor indicated its weight on the pan.
CheckSum Errors
9.1 Bad factory checksum. If error persists, have the balance serviced.
9.4 AutoCalTM data failed checksum. This failure will disable access to the autocal feature (if installed).
9.5 Factory calibration data failed checksum.
9.6 Bad program checksum.
9.7 Bad CMOS checksum.
9.8 User calibration data failed checksum.
9.9 Temperature compensation data failed checksum.
5.4 Information Messages

Informational messages such as calibrate now and error messages appear on the display either when an action is
required on the users part or a malfunction has occurred in the balance due to hardware, software errors or misappli-
cation.
52
5.5 Service Information
If the Troubleshooting section does not resolve or describe your problem, you will need to contact an authorized
Ohaus Service Agent. For Service assistance in the United States, please call Aftermarket, Ohaus Corporation toll-
free at (800) 526-0659. An Ohaus Product Service Specialist will be available to help you.
5.6 Replacement parts

Description Ohaus Part No.
Power Pack, 100/120 V ac US Plug (Cord set part of power pack) 490202-01
Power Pack, (Cord set required for UK, European and Australian) 490203-01
Cord Set, 230 V ac, UK Plug 76448-00
Cord Set, 230 V ac, European Plug 76212-00
Cord Set, 230 V ac, Australian plug 76199-01
5.7 Accessories
Calibration Masses - ASTM Class 1 Tolerance:
20 g 49024-11
50 g 49054-11
100 g 49015-11
200 g 49025-11
500 g 49055-11
1 kg 49016-11
2 kg 49026-11
4 kg 49046-11
In-Use Display Cover Kit 470003-010

Security Device 470004-010
Draftshield Kit 470006-010
Density Determination Kit 470007-010
Modular Display Upgrade Kit 470008-010
Auxilliary Display Kit
(Table Mount) 470009-010
(Wall Mount) 470009-020
(Tower Mount) 470009-030
Remote Display Kit
(Wall Mount) 470010-020
RS232 Interface Cable, Blunt end (user defined) AS017-01
RS232 Interface Cable, IBM® - PC 25 Pin AS017-02
RS232 Interface Cable, (connects impact printer) AS017-06
RS232 Interface Cable, Apple® llGS/Macintosh AS017-10
Printer AS142
Battery, Memory - 3 Volt Lithium ( Use BR2325, Ray O Vac or Panasonic) ---------
NOTE: When the Memory Battery is replaced, all stored data in the balance will be lost.
53
5.8 Specifications
Analyticals
Capacity (g) 62 110 210 100/210 *
Readability (mg) 0.1 0.1/1
Weighing modes g, mg, oz , oz t, ct, dwt, taels (3), mommes, gn, ti, N, custom unit
Functions Parts counting, differential weighing, quick check, statistics, formulation, filling, animal weighing, percent
formulation, check weighing, density determination, SQC & pipette calibration.
Performance enhancing features Program-LinkTM, GLP protocol, contrast and brightness control, custom menu, pop-up windows, application
library, go-back key, help text
Repeatability (Std. dev.) (mg) 0.1 0.1/0.5
Linearity (mg) (+) 0.2 0.2/0.5
Tare range Full capacity by subtraction
Safe overload capacity 150% of capacity
Stabilization time <4 seconds
Sensitivity drift PPM/°C 3
(10°C - 30°C)
Operating temperature range:
w/internal calibration 10° to 40°C/ 50° to 104°F
w/o internal calibration 10° to 30°C/50° to 86°F
Calibration Auto calibration
Power requirements External Adapter, 100 -120 V ac, 220 - 240 V ac, 50/60 Hz
Plug configuration for US, Euro, UK, Japan & Australia
Draft shield (in/cm) 10.2/25.9
(free height above platform)
Display (in/cm) 0.6/1.5
Pan size (in/cm) 3.5/9. diameter
Dimensions 9 x 15.25 x14/22.8 x 38.7 x 35.5

(WxHxD) (in/cm)
Precision Top Loaders

Capacity (g) 210 410 100/410* 610 2100 4100 1000/4100* 4100 6100 8100
Readability (g) 0.001 0.001/0.01 0.01 0.01/0.1 0.1
Weighing modes g, mg, kg, lbs, oz , oz t, ct, dwt, taels (3), mommes, gn, ti, N, custom unit
formulation, check weighing, density determination, SQC & pipette calibration.
library, go-back key, help text
Repeatability (Std. dev.) (g) 0.0005 0.0005/0.005 0.005 0.01/0.05 0.05
Linearity (g) (+) 0.002 0.002/0.005 0.02 0.02/0.05 0.1
Sensitivity drift PPM/°C 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3
(10°C - 30°C)
Operating temperature range:
w/internal calibration 10° to 40°C/50° to 104°F
w/o internal calibration 10° to 30°C/50° to 86°F
Calibration Auto-calibration
Power requirements External Adapter, 100 -120 V ac, 220 - 240 V ac, 50/60 Hz
Pan size (in/cm) 4.7/12 Dia. 6.8 x 6.8/17.2 x 17.2 w/windshield 8 x 8/ 20.3 x 20.3
Dimensions 9 x 15.25 x14/22.8 x 38.7 x 35.5 8.25 x 4 x 14/23.4 x 10.1 x 35.5
(WxHxD) (in/cm)
* Moveable FineRange TM
NOTE: Not all weighing modes apply depending upon capacity and resolution of the balance.
54
55
56
LIMITED WARRANTY
Ohaus products are warranted against defects in materials and workmanship from the date of
delivery through the duration of the warranty period. During the warranty period Ohaus will repair,
or, at its option, replace any component(s) that proves to be defective at no charge, provided that
the product is returned, freight prepaid, to Ohaus.
This warranty does not apply if the product has been damaged by accident or misuse, exposed to
radioactive or corrosive materials, has foreign material penetrating to the inside of the product, or
as a result of service or modification by other than Ohaus. In lieu of a properly returned warranty
registration card, the warranty period shall begin on the date of shipment to the authorized dealer.
No other express or implied warranty is given by Ohaus Corporation. Ohaus Corporation shall not
be liable for any consequential damages.
As warranty legislation differs from state to state and country to country, please contact Ohaus or
your local Ohaus dealer for further details.
Ohaus Corporation Ohaus Europe Ltd.
29 Hanover Road, ENGLAND
Florham Park, NJ 07932, USA Tel: +44 (0) 1954 251343,
Tel: (201) 377-9000, Fax: +44 (0) 1954 250205
Fax: (201) 593-0359
With offices in Germany, France, Spain, Italy, Canada, Mexico and Japan.
P/N 400040-022 © Ohaus Corporation 1997, all rights reserved.

Ohaus Corporation
29 Hanover Road
Florham Park, NJ
07932-0900
Operating instructions
balances
1
Ohaus Corporation, 29 Hanover Road, Florham Park, New Jersey, 07932, USA
Declaration of Conformity We, Ohaus Corporation, declare under our sole responsibility that the balance models listed below marked with CE - are in
conformity with the directives and standards mentioned.
Konformitätserkärung Wir, die Ohaus Corporation, erklären in alleiniger Verantwortung, dass die untenstehenden Waagentypen, gekennzeichnet mit CE -
mit den genannten Richtlinien und Normen übereinstimmen.
Déclaration de conformité Nous, Ohaus Corporation, déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité, que les types de balance ci-dessous cité - munis de la
mention «CE» - sont conformes aux directives et aux normes mentionnées ci-après.
Declaración de Conformidad Nosotros, Ohaus Corporation, declaramos bajo responsabilidad exclusiva que los modelos de balanzas indicados a
continuación - con el distintivo ,CE - están conformes con las directivas y normas citadas.
Dichiarazione di conformità Noi, Ohaus Corporation, U.S.A, dichiariamo sotto nostra unica responsabilità, che i tipi di bilance specificati di seguito -
contrassegnati con la marcatura CE - sono conformi alle direttive e norme citate.
Balance Type/Waagentyp/Type de balance/Modelo de balanza/Tipo di biliancia Explorer and Voyager
Marked with: Directive Standard

Gekennzeichnet mit: Richtlinie Norm
Munis de la mention: Directive Norme
Con el distintivo: Directiva Norma
Contrassegnati con la Direttiva Norma
Marcatura:
EU 73/23 Low Voltage IEC1010-1 & EN60950:1992 Safety Regulations
EU 73/23 Niederspannung IEC1010-1 & EN60950:1992 Sicherheitsbestimmungen
EU 73/23 Basse tension IEC1010-1 & EN60950:1992 Consignes de sécurité
EU 73/23 Baja tensión IEC1010-1 & EN60950:1992 Disposiciones sobre seguridad
EU 73/23 Bassa tensione IEC1010-1 & EN60950:1992 Prescrizioni . di sicurezza
EU 89/336, 92/31, 93/68 EN55022:1987 Emissions

Year of attachment of Electromagnetic compatibility EN45501:1992, EN50082-1:1992 Immunity
the CE mark EU 89/336, 92/31, 93/68 EN55022:1987 Funkstörungen
Jahr der ersten Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit EN45501:1992, EN50082-1:1992 Immunität
Eichung EU 89/336, 92/31, 93/68 EN55022:1987 Emissions parasites
Année de la premère Compatibilité électromagnétique EN45501:1992, EN50082-1:1992 Immunité
vérification EU 89/336, 92/31, 93/68 EN55022:1987 Radiointerferencias
Año de la primera Compatibilidad electromagnética EN45501:1992, EN50082-1:1992 Inmunidad
verificación EU 89/336, 92/31, 93/68 EN55022:Verträglichkeit 1987 Radiointerferenze
annodella prima Compatibilità elettromagnetica EN45501:1992, EN50082-1:1992 Immunità
verifica

EU 90/384 FNSW EN45501:1992 Für nicht selbsttätige Waagen
EU 90/384 BFNA EN45501:1992 Balances à fonctionnement non automatique
EU 90/384 PBNA EN45501:1992 Para balanzas no automátäcas
EU 90.384 BFNA EN45501:1992 Per bilance a funzionamento non automatics
ISO 9001 Certificate for Ohaus Corporation. Ohaus Corporation, USA, was examined and evaluated in 1994 by the Bureau Veritas Quality International,
BVQI, and was awarded the ISO 9001 certificate. This certifies that Ohaus Corporation, USA, has a quality system that conforms with the international
standards for quality management and quality assurance (ISO 9000 series). Repeat audits are carried out by BVQI at intervals to check that the quality
system is operated in the proper manner.
ISO 9001-Zertifikat für Ohaus Corporation. Die Firma Ohaus Corporation, USA, wurde 1994 durch das Bureau Veritas Quality International BVQI geprüft, und
erhielt das ISO 9001 Zertifikat. Dieses bescheinigt, dass Ohaus Corporation, USA über ein Qualitätssystem verfügt, welches den internationalen Normen für
Qualitätsmanagement und Qualitätssicherung (ISO 9000er-Reihe) entspricht. Anlässlich von Wiederhol-Audits durch das BVQI wird periodisch überprüft, ob
das Qualitätssystem zweckmässig gehandhabt wird.
Certificat ISO 9000 pour Ohaus Corporation. La société Ohaus Corporation, USA, a été contrôlée en 1994 par Bureau Veritas Quality International BVQI et a
obtenu le certificat, degré ISO 9001. Celui-ci atteste que Ohaus Corporation, USA, dispose dun système qualité correspondant aux normes internationales
pour la gestion de la qualité et pour Iassurance qualité (degré ISO 9000). Des audits réguliers effectués par la BVQI vérifient si le système qualité est
appliqué de facon appropriée.
Certificado ISO 9001 para Ohaus Corporation. La firma Ohaus Corporation, USA, ha sido inspeccionada por la Bureau Veritas Quality International (BVQI) y
ha obtenido el certificado ISO 9001. Esto acredita que Ohaus Corporation, USA, dispone de un sistema de calidad que cumple las normas internacionales
para gestión y garantfa de calidad (ISO serie 9000). Con ocasión de las inspecciones de repetibilidad por parte de la BVQI, se comprueba periódicamente si
el sistema de calidad se manipula de forma correcta.
Certificato ISO 9001 per la Ohaus Corporation. ll sistema di garanzia della qualità della Società Ohaus Corporation, USA è certificato ISO 9001 sin dal
1994 dall Bureau Veritas Quality International BVQI, e così fomice la dimostrazione che il suo sistema die Garanzia Qualità soddisfa i massimi requisite. ll
sistema della garanzia della qualità Ohaus Corporation viene verificato periodicamente dall BVQI, dando cosi evidenza di.
2
Notice
Certified scales,scales used for legal applications have the general type designation E...5 / V...5 and EU type Ap-
proval (T2914). The year of the initial verification is shown next to the CE mark. Such scales are verified in the
factory and carry the "M" mark on the actual scale and the packaging. The year of the initial verification is shown
next to the CE mark. If the letter M is shown against a solid background, the scale may be put into operation imme-
diately. Should the background be partitioned and hatched, the scale must be verified at its place of use by the
certified Ohaus service. If national regulations limit the duration of the validity of the verification certificate in indi-
vidual countries, the end user of such a scale is personally responsible for arranging the repeat verification in good
time.
Hinweise
Geeichte/eichpflichtige Waagen tragen die allgemeine Typenbezeichnung E... 5 / V...5. Für sie liegt eine EU
Bauartzulassung vor (T2914). Das Jahr der ersten Eichung ist neben dem CE Zeichen aufgeführt. Solche Waagen
sind ab Werk geeicht und tragen die Kennzeichnung "M" auf dem Gerät selbst und auf der Verpackung. Erscheint der
Buchstabe M auf vollem Grund, darf die Waage sofort in Betrieb genommen werden. Ist der Grund geteilt und
schraffiert, muss die Waage am Verwendungsort durch den zertifizierten Ohaus Service ortsgeeicht werden. Sofern
gemäss den nationalen Vorschriften in den einzelnen Staaten die Gültigkeitsdauer der Eichung beschränkt ist, ist der
Betreiber einer solchen Waage für die rechtzeitige Nacheichung selbst verantwortlich.
Remarques
Les balances vérifiées/admissibles à la vérification portent la désignation de modèle générale E...5 / V ... 5. Elles
font lobjet dune approbation de modèle UE (T2914). Lannée de la vérification primitive est indiquée à côté de la
marque CE. Ces balances sont vérifidées dorigine et portent la marque "M" sur Iappareil lui-même et sur
lemballage, Si la lettre M apparaît sur un fond totalement vert, la balance peut être mise en service immédiatement.
Si le fond est divisé et hachuré, la balance doit être vérifiée sur le lieu dustilisation par le service après-vente Ohaus
certifié. Dans les pays où la durée de validité de la vérification est limitée par des prescriptions nationales,
lutilisateur est lui-même responsable de la vérification ultérieure dune telle balance en temps voulu.
Notas
Las balanzas verificadas/verificables llevan la designatión general E...5 / V ...5 y cuentan con una aprobación de
modelo UE (T2914). EL año de la primera verficación está indicado al lado del distintivo CE. Estas balanzas están
verificadas en fábrica y Ilevan la designatión "M" sobre el propio aparato y sobre el embalaje. Cuando la letra M
aparece sobre fondo sólido, la balanza se puede poner inmediatamente en funcionamiento. Si el fondo está dividido
y rayado, la balanza ha de ser verificada en el lugar de uso por el sevicio técnico Ohaus certificado. Si la duración
de la validez de la verificación está limitada de acuerdo con las normas de los distintos países, el propio usuario de
tal balanza es responsable de la verificación posterior a su debido tiempo.
Avvertenza
Le bilance approvate hanno la denominazione del modello E... 5 / V ...5. Per esse esiste unappprovazione CE del
tipo. Lanno delia prima verifica è indicato a fianco della marcatura CE. I tipi marcati con un contrassegno "M" su
sfondo verde pieno possono essere impiegati da subito. I tipi marcati con ii contrassegno "M" su sfondo nero/
barrato diagonalmente dovranno essere verificati sul luogo dinstallazione da parte dun tecnico autorizzato dal
Servizio Assistenza Ohaus o ispettore dellUfficio Metrico. Queste bilance sono state verificate in fabbrica
e recano il contrassegno "M" sullapparecchio stesso, e sullimballo. É obbligo delluntente denunciare la detenzione
dello strumento allufficio metrico competente per territorio e sottoporio alia prescritta verifica periodica come da
disposizioni ministeriali.
3
NOTE: THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A
DIGITAL DEVICE, PURSUANT TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES.
THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST HARMFUL INTERFER-
ENCE WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT. THIS EQUIPMENT
GENERATES, USES, AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND, IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL, MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE TO RADIO
COMMUNICATIONS. OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE
HARMFUL INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFER-
ENCE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE.
THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS A LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM
DIGITAL APPARATUS AS SET OUT IN THE INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD ENTITLED
DIGITAL APPARATUS, ICES-003 OF THE DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS.
CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE RESPECTE LES LIMITES DE BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES APPLICABLES AUX
APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE CLASSE A PRESCRITES DANS LA NORME SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR :
APPAREILS NUMERIQUES, NMB-003 EDICTEE PAR LE MINISTRE DES COMMUNICATIONS.
NOTICE:
This manual was prepared by:
George W. Smidhum - Technical Writer
Mark de Haas - Software Engineer
Michael Sattan - Project Engineer
4
Contents
OVERVIEW OF CONTROLS ..................................................................................................... 8
1. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VOYAGER BALANCE....................................................................... 9
1.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 9
1.2 Overview of the Voyager balance ........................................................................................... 9
1.3 What you should know about these instructions .................................................................... 10
1.4 Safety is first ..................................................................................................................... 10
2. INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Unpacking and checking the standard equipment .................................................................. 11
2.2 Selecting the location ......................................................................................................... 12
2.3 Leveling the balance .......................................................................................................... 12
2.4 Installing cover plate and pan ............................................................................................. 12
2.5 Installing wind shield ......................................................................................................... 13
2.6 Power supply .................................................................................................................... 13
2.7 Switching the balance on or off ........................................................................................... 14
2.8 Weigh below preparation .................................................................................................... 14
3. THE MENU ....................................................................................................................... 15

3.1 What is the menu? ............................................................................................................. 15
3.2 Menu operation ................................................................................................................. 16
3.3 Library ............................................................................................................................. 17
4. CALIBRATION ................................................................................................................... 18
4.1 Span calibration ................................................................................................................ 20
4.2 Linearity calibration............................................................................................................ 21
4.3 User calibration ................................................................................................................. 22
4.4 Calibration test .................................................................................................................. 23
4.5 Auto calibration ................................................................................................................. 24
4.6 AutoCalTM delta correction ................................................................................................... 25
5
5. WEIGHING MADE SIMPLE .................................................................................................. 26
5.1 Selecting a weighing unit .................................................................................................... 26
5.2 Taring the balance ............................................................................................................. 27
5.3 Performing a simple weighing ............................................................................................. 27
5.4 Custom unit ...................................................................................................................... 28
6. BALANCE MODES ............................................................................................................. 31

6.1 Parts counting ................................................................................................................... 31
6.1.1 Easy count ............................................................................................................ 31
6.1.2 Advanced counting ................................................................................................. 32
6.2 Filling ............................................................................................................................... 33
6.3 Animal weighing ............................................................................................................... 34
6.4 Check weighing ................................................................................................................. 35
6.5 Differential weighing........................................................................................................... 36
6.6 Formulation ...................................................................................................................... 41
6.7 Quick check weighing ........................................................................................................ 43
6.8 Statistics/function link ......................................................................................................... 44
6.9 Density ............................................................................................................................. 45
6.9.1 Balance preparation with density kit .......................................................................... 45
6.9.2 Solid density determination for items more dense than water ........................................ 46
6.9.3 Solid density determination for items less dense than water ......................................... 48
6.9.4 Improving the accuracy of the result of solid density ................................................... 49
6.9.5 Liquid density determination .................................................................................... 50
6.10 Statistical quality control (SQC) ........................................................................................... 51
6.10.1 Resuming a particular SQC setup ............................................................................. 54
6.10.2 Specifing a new SQC setup ...................................................................................... 55
6.10.3 Redoing or correcting a batch .................................................................................. 56
6.11 Pipette calibration .............................................................................................................. 57
7. BALANCE SETTINGS .......................................................................................................... 62

7.1 Reset to factory settings ...................................................................................................... 62
7.2 Setting contrast and brightness of the display ........................................................................ 62
7.3 Setting the readout ............................................................................................................. 63
7.4 Setting the interface ............................................................................................................ 64
7.5 Setting print option ............................................................................................................. 65
6
7.6 Setting GLP print options .................................................................................................... 66
7.7 Setting time and date ......................................................................................................... 67
7.8 Setting auto calibration ....................................................................................................... 68
7.9 Print current settings .......................................................................................................... 68
7.10 Lock out ...............................................................................................................................
69
7.11 Software version ................................................................................................................ 70
7.12 Setting custom menu ......................................................................................................... 70
7.13 Legal for trade ................................................................................................................... 71
7.14 Menu lock-out protection .................................................................................................... 72
8. RS232 INTERFACE/PRINTING DATA .................................................................................... 73

8.1 RS232 interface ................................................................................................................ 73
8.2 Printing data ..................................................................................................................... 76
9. CARE AND MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................. 79

9.1 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................. 79
9.2 Error codes list .................................................................................................................. 80
9.3 Information messages ........................................................................................................ 81
9.4 Service information ............................................................................................................ 81
9.5 Replacement parts ............................................................................................................. 81
9.6 Accessories....................................................................................................................... 81
9.7 Specifications .................................................................................................................... 82
A APPENDIX SPECIAL APPLICATIONS ................................................................................... 83

A-1 Sieve analysis ................................................................................................................... 83
A-2 Porous material density determinations ................................................................................ 86
7
Overview
Overview of controls
1
6
8
2
9
3 7
4 10
5 11
12
3 Help button Non functional.
5
6 button When pressed, travels up through menu options and selects alphanumeric
characters.
7 button When pressed, travels down through menu options and selects alphanumeric
characters.
8
Getting to know your Voyager balance
1. Getting to know your Voyager balance

This section provides you with detailed information on your Voyager balance. Please read through the
section carefully even if you have experience with OHAUS balances and be sure to familiarize yourself with
the safety notes.
1.1 Introduction
Thank you for deciding to purchase a Voyager Balance from Ohaus. Behind your instrument stands
OHAUS, a leading manufacturer of precision Balances, Scales and Indicators. An Aftermarket Department
with trained instrument technicians is dedicated to provide you with the fastest service possible in the event
your instrument requires servicing. OHAUS also has a Customer Service Department to answer any inquir-
ies regarding applications and accessories.
To ensure you make full use of the possibilities offered by your Voyager balance, please read the manual
completely before installation and operation.
1.2 Overview of the Voyager balance

The Voyager balances offer a high level of operating convenience and useful functions to make accurate
measurements.
The Voyager balances have the following features:
Extremely rugged and chemically resistant construction.

Convenient operating controls and large, easily readable display.
Easy to follow menus for simplified operation.
Go Back button permits going back in menus.
Built-in functions for filling, percent weighing, piece counting, animal weighing, check weighing, density, pipette
calibration, statistics, and SQC.
Built-in leveling feet and level indicator for consistent operation on unlevel surfaces.
Automatic internal calibration (on some models).
Menu locks which prevent settings from being changed.
Built-in RS232 interface.
14 units of measurement and custom units.
Bar graph indicator for quick visual indication of values in addition to a large numerical readout.
A variety of accessories includes in-use display cover kit, table mount, remote displays, interface com-
munication cables and security device.
A brief word regarding standards, directives and procedures for quality assurance: Your Voyager balance conforms
with all common standards and directives. It supports standard procedures, work techniques and records as
required by GLP (Good Laboratory Practices) and SOP (Standard Operating Procedure). Recording of the sequences
of operations and calibration work is highly important in this connection: we recommend use of OHAUS AS-142
Printer. Your Voyager balance has a CE declaration of conformity and OHAUS is registered to ISO 9001 - Manage-
ment System.
9
1.3 What you should know about these instructions

These instructions contain orientation aids which represent certain functions, notices and controls. These graphic
aids are not meant to be step by step operational procedures but simply a guide.
This symbol indicates pressing a button.
This representation symbolizes the current display of your balance.
This symbol indicates additional information and instructions which facilitate

your handling of the balance and contribute to proper and economical use.
These symbols indicate safety and hazard instructions which must be com-
plied with. Nonconformance with such instructions can lead to personal
injuries to the user, damage to the balance or other tangible assets or to
malfunctions.
1.4 Safety is first

Please note the following instructions for safe and problem-free operation of your balance.
Voyager balances may be used only indoors and only when attached to receptacle outlets with a
ground connection.
The Voyager balances may not be operated in a hazardous environment.
Use only the AC adapter supplied with your Voyager balance and ensure that the voltage value
printed on it matches the local line voltage.
Operate and use your Voyager balance only in accordance with these operating instructions.
Use only optional equipment and peripherals supplied by OHAUS.
Your Voyager balance is ruggedly constructed, but is still a precision instrument. Treat it with the
appropriate care and it will provide you with years of trouble-free operation.
10
Installation
2. Installation
In this section, you will learn how you unpack and install your new balance and prepare it for operation. On comple-
tion of the steps described in this section, your balance is ready for operation.
2.1 Unpacking and checking the standard equipment

Open the package and remove the instrument and the accessories. Check the completeness of the delivery.
The following accessories are part of the standard equipment of your new Voyager balance.
Analytical Capacity
Equipment 62g, 110g, 210, 410, 610g - 4100g 6100g -8100g
210g 210/100g 410/100g 4100/1000g
Pan 3.5
Pan 4.75
Pan 6 (0.01g units)
Pan 8 (0.1g units)
Draft Shield
Wind Shield (6" Pan Units, 0.01g)
AC Power Adapter
Instruction Manual
Warranty Card
4100g, 6100g and 8100g balances with internal calibration are equipped with 6 Pan and Windshield.
Remove packing material from the instrument.
Check the instrument for transport damage. Immediately inform your Ohaus dealer if you have complaints or parts
are missing.
Store all parts of the packaging. This packaging guarantees the best possible protection for the transport of your
instrument.
11
Installation
2.2 Selecting the location

The balance should always be used in an environment which is free from excessive air currents, corrosives, vibration,
and temperature or humidity extremes. These factors will affect displayed weight readings.
Next to open windows or doors causing drafts or

Near air conditioning or heat vents.
Near vibrating, rotating or reciprocating equipment.
Near magnetic fields or equipment that generates

magnetic fields.
On an unlevel work surface.
In confined areas, allow sufficient space around the

instrument for ease of operation and keep away from
radiating heat sources.
2.3 Leveling the balance

Exact horizontal positioning and stable installation are prerequisites for repeatable results. To compensate for small
irregularities or inclinations at the location, the instrument can be leveled.
Adjust the leveling feet at the rear of the balance until the air bubble in the
indicator is centered.
Leveling NOTE: The instrument should be leveled each time its location is changed.
Indicator
Leveling
Foot
2.4 Installing cover plate and pan

62g to 410g balances do not have the pan and protective cover plate
installed.
On balances with a draft shield, open the door and place the cover plate
into position. Insert the pan into the center hole.
Pan
Higher capacity balances with 6" or 8" pans do not have a cover plate.
Cover Plate
12
Installation
2.5 Installing wind shield

Wind Shield On 610g to 4100g balances with 0.01g resolution, a wind shield is
required to reduce the possibility of air currents from disturbing the pan.
2.6 Power supply

Check to ensure the voltage printed on the AC adapter matches your local
line voltage. If this is not the case, on no account connect the AC adapter to
the power supply, but contact your responsible OHAUS dealer.
Ensure that the AC adapter can never come into contact with liquids!
Connect the AC Adapter supplied to the three pin connector located at the
rear of the balance.
The balance now performs a self-test, loads parameters, displays the

software version, capacity, indicates if autocal is installed and the normal
AC Adapter Connection weight display then appears.
Rear of Balance
Allow your balance to warm up for at least 30 minutes to enable it to

adapt itself to the ambient conditions. If the balance has been stored in a
very cold environment before installation, it may require several hours for the
balance to stabilize.
13
Installation
2.7 Switching the balance on and off

Your balance is on at all times when connected to a power source, the display is on initially and can be turned off.
BASIC WEIGHING To switch the balance on, press the button. As soon as the weight
display appears, your balance is ready.
0.000 To switch the balance off, press the button. After the balance has been
switched off, your balance is in the standby mode. If you wish to perform a
weighing, press the button again.
As your balance needs no warm-up time when in the standby mode and is
immediately ready for weighing, we advise you to switch the display off by
use of the button and not to disconnect it from the power supply. This
also ensures that the balance is always in thermal equilibrium.
2.8 Weigh below preparation

The Voyager balance is equipped with a weigh below hook at the bottom of the balance. To use this fea-
ture, remove power from the balance and remove the protective cover underneath the balance. See illustra-
tion for location. The balance can be supported using lab jacks or any other convenient method. Make
sure the balance is level and secure. Apply power and operate the balance. Attach items to be weighed to
the hook underneath the balance.
14
The menu
3. The menu
3.1 What is the menu?
The menu allows you to match your balance to your specific weighing needs. In the menu, you can change the
settings of your balance and activate functions. The Main Menu contains 7 selections.
CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE CUSTOM MENU LIBRARY CALIBRATION CONTRAST
Basic weighing Milligrams Readout Run Contains list of Span LCD contrast/
Parts counting Grams Interface Setup custom menu stored setups Linearity brightness adjust
Filling Kilograms Print option Exit to weigh User
Animal weighing Pennyweight Setup GLP Calibration test
Check weighing Carats Autocal
Set time/date
Ounces
Diff weighing Autocal enable Autocal delta correction
Troy ounces
Formulation Print current settings Exit to weigh
Grains
Quick check Reset
Hong Kong taels
Statistics Lockout
Singapore taels
Density Software version
ROC taels
SQC Mommes Exit to weigh
Pipette Pounds
Newtons
Ticals
Custom units
Exit to weigh
1. Change mode: Permits setting the balance to one of 12 different operating modes.
2. Change units: Allows balance to measure in any of 15 selected measuring units and custom units.
3. Set balance:
Readout: Permits setting averaging level, stability level, auto zero and legal for trade.
Interface: Communication settings of baud, data, parity and stop bits can be set.
Print option: Includes auto print, stable & numeric data, date, time and reference.
Setup GLP: Project name, user name and GLP print options can be entered.
Set time/date: Allows balance to be set to current time and date with options on date types.
Autocal enable: Automatic calibration can be set to on or off (when balance is equipped with autocal).
Print current settings: When selected, current balance settings can be printed.
Reset: Allows resetting of readouts, RS232, print option, GLP or all to factory defaults.
Lockout: Units, calibration and functions can be set to on or off.
Software version: Indicates software version installed in balance at time of manufacture.
4. Custom menu: Permits running a custom menu and setting up of a custom menu.
5. Library: Contains a list of stored setups which can be recalled for operating the balance.
6. Calibration: Span, linearity, user, calibration test, auto calibration can be selected to calibrate
the balance. Autocal delta correction permits user to adjust internal calibration
weight to match local standard.
7. Contrast: Allows LCD screen contrast to be set for best viewing conditions.
15
The menu
3.2 Menu operation

In this section you will learn how to work with the menu. Information regarding the individual menu options and
available settings can be found in the following sections.
BASIC WEIGHING
How to change from the weighing mode to the main
menu
0.000 The balance is operating in the basic weighing mode.
GRAMS STABLE
Enter MAIN MENU Press the Enter button. The main menu is displayed with the first option
CHANGE MODE
CHANGE UNITS highlighted.
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST
or How to select the menu options

Press either the up or down arrow buttons and scroll to the desired option.
Each time the arrow button is pressed, the balance switches to the next
menu option. Each time the arrow button is pressed, the balance
switches to the previous menu option.
Enter MAIN MENU

CHANGE MODE
How to enter the menu option
CHANGE UNITS
SET BALANCE
Press the Enter button when the desired menu option is highlighted.
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST
How to enter alpha numeric data

Certain menu options can have names or numerical entries made. When
prompted to enter information, use the arrow buttons as follows:
Press the and arrow buttons to scroll through numbers or alpha-
bet.
Press the arrow button to advance to the next character in the display.
Press the arrow button to go back to the previous character in the

display.
Enter Press the Enter button to accept entry.
Go Back Press the Go Back button to cancel entry.
16
The menu
Enter MAIN MENU How to save your settings and quit the menu
Certain menu options have ON and OFF settings. In these options, pressing
SAVING
the Enter button saves the setting after you make a selection.
In options which offer various settings, after you have selected a setting,
press the Enter button. SAVING is momentarily displayed and the display
returns to the same option.
Go Back BASIC WEIGHING How to back out of a menu

You can back out of a menu and return to the weighing mode at any time
0.000 with the Go Back button. Use the Go Back button to cancel a number,
GRAMS STABLE alphanumeric entry or to leave a mode.
3.3 Library
Approximately 200 names can be stored in the library. Eight functions in the balance have provisions for storing a
library name, they are: Advanced Counting, Check Weighing, Statistics, Differential Weighing, Formulation, Density,
SQC and Pipette. When a library name is selected, the associated function is also displayed. A Library menu is
provided which allows the selected library name and function to be run, deleted or delete all entries. If you have
accessed the library and do not want to run or delete a name, an exit to weighing selection can be made by press-
ing the Go Back button which does not affect the library
CHANGE MODE
MAIN MENU From main menu
CHANGE UNITS
SET BALANCE
Select LIBRARY, then press the Enter button. Display advances to
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
LIBRARY % USED menu indicating all previously entered names, their
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST corresponding functions and the percentage of the library which has been
used.
LIBRARY 15.21% USED The sample shown indicates six library entries. Entries are stored in
P1 PIP 1.26%
P2 PIP 1.26% alphabetical order.
SQ1 SQC 3.17%
SQ2 SQC 3.17%
SQ3 SQC 3.17%
SQ5 SQC 3.17%
or Accessing library function

LIBRARY Select LIBRARY function and press the Enter button. Display advances to
RUN
DELETE LIBRARY menu with RUN, DELETE and DELETE ALL options shown.
DELETE ALL
Select either RUN, DELETE, or DELETE ALL. When RUN is selected, that
particular balance operation is enabled and can be run. When a particular
name is selected and the DELETE selection is made, that particular name
and function with all parameters is removed from the library. DELETE ALL,
when selected, removes the entire contents of the library.
17
Calibration
4. Calibration
Your balance can be calibrated with an internal mass (optional) or external masses. The balance can also be
checked by a test with internal or external masses. If you have a printer attached to your balance, the data of the
calibration and the results are printed out following GLP recommendations. A choice of six calibration methods are
available: Span, Linearity, User, Test, Automatic AutoCalTM and AutoCalTM with Delta Correction.
CALIBRATE Span - Span calibration ensures that the balance reads correctly
SPAN
LINEARITY within specifications using two weight values: zero and a
USER
CALIBRATION TEST weight value at 100% of the balances full capacity.
AUTOCAL
AUTOCAL DELTA CORRECTION
EXIT TO WEIGH
Linearity - Linearity calibration minimizes deviation between actual

and displayed weights within the balances weighing
range. Three weight values are used: zero, a weight
value at midpoint of the balances weighing range, and a
weight value at or near the balances specified capacity.
User - User calibration is a method where the balance can be

calibrated using a mass of known value by entering that
value into the balance.
Test - Calibration test allows the stored calibration data to be

tested against the current mass being used for the test.
AutoCalTM On balances equipped with AutoCalTM, automatic calibra-

tion of the balance is accomplished by an internal mass.
AutoCalTM On balances equipped AutoCalTM, a software feature

W/Delta allows the internal calibration mass to be adjusted ± 100
Correction divisions at full scale capacity. This permits adjusting
the balance using an external Class I mass which is
traceable to a certified standard.
18
Calibration
Calibration may be locked out to prevent unauthorized personnel from

changing calibration under LFT (Legal for Trade) mode. If calibration has
been locked out, you can only access Internal Weight Calibration and
Calibration Test.
To lock out calibration menu, after calibration, refer to paragraph 7.14 titled
Menu Lock-Out Protection.
Linearity, Span and User calibration are disabled for Type Approved/LFT
balances.
Calibration Masses
Before beginning calibration, make sure masses are available. If you begin
calibration and realize calibration masses are not available, exit the menu.
The balance will retain previously stored calibration data. Calibration should
be performed as necessary to ensure accurate weighing. Masses required
to perform the procedures are listed in the following table.
CALIBRATION MASSES
LINEARITY SPAN ONLY
CAPACITY CAL POINT CAL POINT
62g 20g/50g 50g
110g 50g/100g 100g
210g 100g/200g 200g
410g 200g/400g 400g
610g 200g/500g 500g
2100g 1000g/2000g 2000g
4100g 2000g/4000g 4000g
6100g 2000g/5000g 5000g
8100g 4000g/8000g 8000g
Masses must meet or exceed ASTM Class 1 Tolerance.

Calibration masses are available as accessories.
19
Calibration
4.1 Span calibration

Span calibration normally requires that calibration be made using a mass equal to the full capacity of the
balance, however, the Voyager balance can be calibrated using other lesser values as specified on the
display.
Enter
SPAN
CALIBRATE From main menu
LINEARITY
USER
Scroll to CALIBRATION and press the Enter button. Display advances to
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
CALIBRATE with SPAN highlighted.
EXIT TO WEIGH
Enter SPAN CALIBRATION Clear the pan.

PLEASE CLEAR THE PAN. . .
AND PRESS <ENTER>.
Enter SPAN CALIBRATION Place indicated mass value on pan.

PLEASE PUT 400.000 GRAMS
ON PAN AND PRESS <ENTER...
300 200 100
Enter SPAN CALIBRATION Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the last
PLEASE WAIT. . . calibration.
THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THIS CAL
AND THE LAST CAL IS: 0.000 GRAMS
PRESS <ENTER> TO CONTINUE
Enter BASIC WEIGHING Display indicates weight of the calibration masses. Remove masses from
0% 100% pan. Balance returns to a weighing mode.
400.000
GRAMS STABLE
PRESS <ENTER> FOR MENU
20
Calibration
4.2 Linearity calibration

zero, a weight value at midpoint of the balance's weighing range and a weight value at or near the specified capac-
ity.
Enter
SPAN
LINEARITY
USER
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
CALIBRATE with SPAN highlighted. Scroll to LINEARITY.
EXIT TO WEIGH
Enter LINEARITY CALIBRATION Clear the pan.

AND PRESS <ENTER>.
Enter LINEARITY CALIBRATION Place indicated mass value on pan.


Enter LINEARITY CALIBRATION Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the last
400.000
GRAMS STABLE
21
Calibration
4.3 User calibration

User calibration is used when it is desired to calibrate the balance using a mass of known value. To use this calibra-
tion feature, proceed as follows:
Enter CALIBRATE From main menu

SPAN
LINEARITY Scroll to CALIBRATION and press the Enter button. Display advances to
USER
CALIBRATION TEST CALIBRATE with SPAN highlighted. Scroll to USER.
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
Enter USER CALIBRATION User calibration range is specified.

USER CALIBRATION RANGE:
100-400 GRAMS
PRESS <ENTER. TO CONTINUE.
USER CALIBRATION Enter the calibration value.

ENTER CAL VALUE IN GRAMS
200.000 200.000
Enter USER CALIBRATION Clear the pan.

AND PRESS <ENTER>.
Enter USER CALIBRATION Place selected mass value on pan.

Enter USER CALIBRATION Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the last
200.000
GRAMS STABLE
22
Calibration
4.4 Calibration test

Calibration test feature allows a check of a known calibration mass against the last stored calibration information in
the balance.

SPAN
USER
CALIBRATION TEST CALIBRATE with SPAN highlighted. Scroll to CALIBRATION TEST.
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
Enter CALIBRATION TEST Clear the pan.

AND PRESS <ENTER>.
Enter CALIBRATION TEST Place indicated mass value on pan.

Enter CALIBRATION TEST Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the last
200.000
GRAMS STABLE
23
Calibration
4.5 Auto calibration (AutoCalTM)

On balances equipped with the AutoCalTM feature, calibration can be accomplished using an internal calibration mass.
Auto calibration can be performed at any time providing the balance has warmed up to operating temperature.

SPAN
USER
CALIBRATION TEST CALIBRATE with SPAN highlighted. Scroll to AUTOCAL.
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
Enter INTERNAL CALIBRATION Clear the pan.

AND PRESS <ENTER>.
INTERNAL CALIBRATION Please wait is displayed while the balance is calibrating. If the balance is
PLEASE WAIT... unstable, a message indicating this appears. The balance will continue self
calibration until successful.
INTERNAL CALIBRATION Display indicates if calibration was successful and the difference between
PLEASE WAIT. . . the last calibration. It is not necessary to press the Enter button, the bal-
AND THE LAST CAL IS: 0.000 GRAMS ance returns to a weighing mode automatically.
BASIC WEIGHING Balance returns to a weighing mode.

0% 100%
0.000
GRAMS STABLE
24
Calibration
4.6 AutoCalTM delta correction

Balances with AutoCalTM contain software which allows the internal calibration mass to be adjusted + 100 divisions
at full scale capacity. This permits calibrating the balance using an external ASTM Class 1 mass which is traceable
to a certified standard.
BASIC WEIGHING Tare the balance, then place an ASTM Class 1 mass equal to the span
->O/T<-
0% 100% calibration value of the balance. Note the reading. If the reading is higher or
0.000 lower than the value of the mass, proceed as follows:

SPAN
USER
CALIBRATION TEST CALIBRATE with SPAN highlighted. Scroll to AUTOCAL DELTA CORRECTION.
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
CALIBRATE Enter the number of digits shown between the span calibration value of the
AUTOCAL DELTA CORRECTION balance and the actual reading. For example, on a 400g balance, the
2 2 reading is 400.002g. The difference is 0.002g. This indicates a correction
of 2 divisions is required.
Enter INTERNAL CALIBRATION Clear the pan. Internal calibration starts.

AND PRESS <ENTER>.
PLEASE WAIT. . . the last calibration. It is not necessary to press the Enter button, the bal-
AND THE LAST CAL IS: 0.000 GRAMS ance returns to a weighing mode automatically. If a difference still exists,
repeat the procedure. The difference should be 0.000 grams.

0% 100%
0.000
GRAMS STABLE
25
Weighing made simple
5. Weighing made simple

In this section, you will learn how to select a weighing unit, tare the balance, perform simple weighings and enter a
custom unit.
5.1 Selecting a weighing unit

In this menu option you specify which weighing unit is to be displayed. There are a total of 15 measuring units and
custom units which can be selected.
BASIC WEIGHING The balance shows the result in grams
0.000
GRAMS STABLE
Enter MAIN MENU

CHANGE MODE
From main menu
CHANGE UNITS
SET BALANCE
Select CHANGE UNITS. Scroll to the desired measuring unit and press Enter
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
button. If a custom unit is desired, refer to paragraph 5.4. The following
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST units are available:
Display/Designation Comments
milligrams with mg balances only
grams
kilograms with higher capacity balances only
penny weight
carats
ounces
troy ounces
grains
Hong Kong taels
Singapore taels
ROC taels
mommes
pounds
newtons
ticals
custom units available in library
26
5.2 Taring the balance

The weight of any container can be tared by the press of a button. The taring range covers the entire weighing range
of your balance.
To tare a container, place it on the weighing pan.
->O/T<-
Close all draft shield doors (if draft shield is used).
Press the >O/T< button to start the taring operation.
BASIC WEIGHING You cannot tare the balance when the weighing pan is unstable. On
completion of taring, the word STABLE appears in the lower right hand
0.000 portion of the display and the numerical display indicates zero.
GRAMS STABLE
Remember, when taring a container, the weight of the container is subtracted

from the total capacity of the balance.
5.3 Performing a simple weighing

The balance always starts in a weighing mode when first turned on.
After taring the balance, place sample on the pan. Wait until display indi-
cates STABLE. Now read the weight in the display.
If the balance is in another mode, press the Go Back button repeatedly to get
back to the weighing mode.
27
5.4 Custom unit

Custom unit allows the creation of your own custom weighing units. It permits entering a conversion factor which the
balance will use to convert grams to the desired unit of measure. Custom Units are stored in the Library. Values for
up to fifteen different custom units can be entered.
Conversion Factor x Weight in grams = Weight in custom unit
Conversion factors are expressed in scientific notation and entered into the balance in three parts:
1) a number between 0.1 and 1.999999 called the mantissa
2) a power of 10 called the exponent
3) a least significant digit (LSD)
SCIENTIFIC NOTATION EXPONENTS

Number
Between E-3 Moves decimal point 3 places to the left.
Conv. 0.1 and Power Man-
Factor 1.999999 of 10 tissa Exp. E-2 Moves decimal point 2 places to the left.
123.4 = .1234 x 1000 = .1234 x 10 3
E-1 Moves decimal point 1 place to the left.
12.34 = .1234 x 100 = .1234 x 102
E0 Leaves decimal point in normal position.
1.234 = .1234 x 10 = .1234 x 101
E1 Moves decimal point 1 place to the right.
.1234 = .1234 x 1 = .1234 x 100
E2 Moves decimal point 2 places to the right.
.01234 = .1234 x .1 = .1234 x 10-1
.001234 = .1234 x .01 = .1234 x 10-2 E3 Moves decimal point 3 places to the right.
.000123 = .123 x .001 = .123 x 10-3
Enter From main menu

CUSTOM UNITS Select CHANGE UNITS. Scroll to CUSTOM UNITS and press Enter button. The
GO TO LIBRARY
SETUP display indicates GO TO LIBRARY.
EXIT TO WEIGH
When using the balance for the first time, the library is empty and does not
contain any custom units. Later, after you have performed the setup proce-
dures, you will be able to select a custom unit by a name you have as-
signed. Proceed to SETUP.
Enter Scroll to SETUP and press Enter button. UNIT NAME is displayed.
CUSTOM UNITS
GO TO LIBRARY
SETUP
EXIT TO WEIGH
28
Unit name
UNIT NAME
Enter a unit name. The name you enter and custom unit characteristics will
UNIT1
<LEFT> / <RIGHT> TO MOVE CURSOR be stored in the library when you complete all entries. Display returns to
<UP> / <DOWN> TO SCROLL
CHARACTERS CUSTOM UNIT SETUP with ENTER FACTOR highlighted.
PRESS <ENTER> TO ACCEPT
CUSTOM UNIT SETUP

Factor
UNIT NAME UNIT1 Enter the factor number. This can be a number between 0.1 and
ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT DP E-2 1.999999. For conversion factors outside of this range, the exponent will
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN be used to move the decimal point.
CUSTOM UNIT SETUP Decimal point

UNIT NAME UNIT1 Scroll to SELECT DP, press Enter button. SELECT DP LOCATION is dis-
ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT DP E-2 played.
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN
Select a decimal point. Scroll to either E-3, E-2, E-1, E0, E1, E2, or E3,
SELECT DP LOCATION
E-3
and press Enter button. Display returns to CUSTOM UNIT SETUP with UNIT
E-2
E-1 NAME highlighted.
E0
E1
CUSTOM UNIT SETUP Least significant digit

UNIT NAME UNIT1 Scroll to SELECT LSD which is the Least Significant Digit, press Enter button.
ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT DP E-2 SELECT LSD is displayed.
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN
LSDs
LSD 0.5 Adds one decimal place display counts by
5s.
LSD 1 Display counts by 1s.
RETURN TO SETUP
29
Select the least significant digit. Scroll to either LSD 0.5, LSD 1, LSD 2, LSD
SELECT LSD
LSD 0.5
5 or LSD 10 and press Enter button. Display returns to CUSTOM UNIT
LSD
LSD
1
2
SETUP with UNIT NAME highlighted.
LSD 5
LSD 10
Scroll to RETURN, press Enter button. CUSTOM UNITS menu is displayed

CUSTOM UNIT SETUP
UNIT NAME UNIT1
with GO TO LIBRARY highlighted.
ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT DP E-2
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN
Enter At this point, you can select the custom unit you just entered from the library
CUSTOM UNITS or exit to weigh. When LIBRARY is selected, scroll to the custom unit you
GO TO LIBRARY
SETUP
entered, press Enter button and select RUN from the menu. The abbreviation
EXIT TO WEIGH
for custom units in the display is CU.
30
Balance modes
6. Balance modes
Your balance has 11 additional modes of operation in addition to basic weighing. These built-in modes expand the
possibilities of your balance and facilitate your daily work. The following sections will acquaint you with these
modes.
6.1 Parts counting

Your balance can be set to either Easy Count or Advanced Count parts method.
6.1.1 Easy count

Easy count is a simplified method for counting parts. After specifying a sample size, the balance will display the
actual number of samples placed on the pan. Accuracy is based on the average piece weight (APW) of a single
part. All parts must be reasonably uniform in weight.
Enter
CHANGE MODE From main menu
EASY PARTS COUNTING
Enter CHANGE MODE, scroll to PARTS COUNTING and select EASY PARTS
COUNTING.
PARTS COUNTING Enter numeric sample size and press Enter button.
SAMPLE SIZE
PARTS COUNTING Place specified number of samples on the pan. After a few seconds, the
APW 0.3898 WEIGHT: 3.900 display indicates the number of pieces based on the sample size. Repeated
SIZE 10 batches of samples may be placed on the pan and counted.
10
PIECES STABLE
31
Balance modes
6.1.2 Advanced counting

Advanced Count contains a number of entries which include assigning a library name, filling and sorting applications
and statistical information which can be printed. Once a library name is assigned, this particular counting function
can be recalled at any time.
Enter
PARTS COUNTING From main menu
ADVANCED PARTS COUNTING
Enter CHANGE MODE. Select PARTS COUNTING and then select ADVANCED
PARTS COUNTING. Display advances to PARTS COUNTING SETUP with
LIBRARY NAME highlighted.
PART COUNTING SETUP Library name

LIBRARY NAME Enter library name, up to 8 characters and press Enter button. The library
name can be recalled later and the same type of items can be counted at
any time. The display advances to APW/SIZE.
APW/SIZE APW/Size
SAMPLE SIZE
SET A.P.W. Enter APW/SIZE. You have a choice of entering a sample size or average
piece weight. Enter required data. Display advances to TARE WEIGHT.
PART COUNTING SETUP Tare weight

TARE WEIGHT Enter the tare weight. This is the tare weight of the container holding the
samples.
or PARTS COUNTING SETUP Auto optimization

AUTO OPTIMIZATION ON An ON or OFF function. When set ON, optimizes the accuracy based on
sample size. After selecting, the display advances to FUNCTION LINK.
FUNCTION LINK Function link

OFF
FILLING Four options are available, OFF, FILLING, CHECK WEIGHING and STATIS-
CHECK WEIGHING TICS.
STATISTICS When FILLING is selected, a target weight is entered which is shown as
100% on the bar graph on the display. When material is added to the
balance pan, it is displayed as a percentage and weight. When CHECK
PARTS COUNTING SETUP
Enter APW/SIZE
WEIGHING is selected, a separate display has entries for nominal pieces,
TARE WT over pieces, under pieces, run and exit. This type of function permits check-
AUTO OPTIMIZATION ing of individual pieces against the stored information in the balance. When
FUNCTION LINK
RUN
STATISTICS is selected, provides display of Standard Deviation, either
population or sample, Mean, Sum, High, Low and Difference readings.
Each can be individually set ON or OFF. RUN when selected starts the
program.
32
Balance modes
6.2 Filling
Filling permits you to enter a target reference weight, then view other loads as a percentage of the reference which has
been set in the balance parameters. The load placed on the pan is displayed as a percentage of what was entered
into the balance. A twin bar display indicates to 89% on the first bar and to 110% on the second bar.
Enter
CHANGE MODE
Enter CHANGE MODE.
CHANGE MODE Select FILLING, display advances to TARGET.

FILLING
FILLING Enter the target weight, up to 8 characters and press Enter button. The
TARGET
display advances to FILLING with a dual bar display.
FILLING Place filling material on the balance pan, the display indicates on the bar
0% 90%
graph as a percentage and displays the actual load weight numerically.
90% 110%
Target and difference weights are also displayed.
TARGET:
0.000
DIFF:
GRAMS STABLE
After you have completed the filling procedure, you have choices at the
bottom of the display to either enter a new target value, change mode or
return to the main menu.
33
Balance modes
6.3 Animal weighing

This feature permits weighing small animals directly on the balance. If an animal cage is used, the balance can be
tared (weight of cage is subtracted) and then the subject is placed in the cage and weighed. An averaging filter
compensates for animal movements. The filter can be set in a range from Good to Best. The large numeric display
indicates the weight of the subject and the bar graph indicates balance capacity used.
Enter
CHANGE MODE
Enter CHANGE MODE. Select ANIMAL WEIGHING, display advances to
ANIMAL WEIGHING SETUP.
ANIMAL WEIGHING SETUP Enter AVERAGING LEVEL, display advances to AVERAGING LEVEL FILTER.
Enter AVERAGING LEVEL 5
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
RUN
or ANIMAL WEIGHING SETUP A setting of GOOD is used for subjects which are inactive. The balance will
AVERAGING LEVEL FILTER respond quickly and present an average reading. When a setting of BEST is
GOOD BEST used, the balance responds slowly providing a much longer averaging time
5
for very active subjects. Select filtering level and press Enter button.
ANIMAL WEIGHING SETUP AUTO SAMPLE when selected and set ON permits placing subjects on pan
Enter
AVERAGING LEVEL 5 one after another with the weight showing automatically after each subject.
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
RUN When OFF is selected, user must press Enter button after each subject is
placed on the pan.
ANIMAL WEIGHING SETUP Select RUN. Place animal on the pan, press Enter button, START SAMPLE is
AVERAGING LEVEL 5
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
highlighted at the bottom of the display. An averaged reading is displayed
RUN after a count-down. The count-down time is affected by the averaging level
filter setting.
Enter
When AUTO SAMPLE has been selected, it is not necessary to press the
Enter button to activate sampling.
34
Balance modes
6.4 Check weighing

Check weighing is used when items are checked against preset balance parameters. This feature permits you to
weigh an item, assign a library name, set balance parameters such as the nominal weight, over weight and under
weight. Library recall eliminates the need to enter the weighing parameters again. A bar graph at the top of the
Check
Weighing screen indicates UNDER, ACCEPT and OVER for items being checked.
MAIN MENU
Enter CHECK WEIGHING From main menu
Enter CHANGE MODE. Select CHECK WEIGHING, display advances to
LIBRARY NAME.
CHECK WEIGHING SETUP Enter a Library Name, up to 8 characters and press Enter button. Display
LIBRARY NAME
advances to NOMINAL WT entry. If a previous name was entered and
CW1 selected, the balance displays the parameters which were set.
CHECK WEIGHING SETUP Enter the Nominal option.

LIBRARY NAME
NOMINAL
OVER
UNDER
RUN
CHECK WEIGHING SETUP Enter the nominal weight and then enter over and under weights. Press
NOMINAL WT
Enter button after each entry.
200.000
CHECK WEIGHING SETUP Select RUN.

LIBRARY NAME
NOMINAL
OVER
UNDER
RUN
Enter
CHECK WEIGHING Place the item to be checked on the balance pan, the display indicates the
UNDER ACCEPT OVER over, under, nominal and difference weight of the item. The bar graph
OVER: 202.000
UNDER: 199.000
NOMINAL: 200.00
DIFF: 0.026
indicates UNDER, ACCEPT and OVER.
200.026
35
Balance modes
6.5 Differential weighing

Differential weighing stores tare and weight values so samples can be dried or processed and the difference in weight
calculated at a later time. Up to 80 samples can be stored. The balance has the capability to work with one or two
different containers or no container at all. A Sieve Analysis procedure is also included in Appendix A-1 for this type of
application. Samples can be added to the applications library or extracted by name using the previously stored data.
The balance can be used for other applications during processing time.
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING
Enter CHANGE MODE. Select DIFF WEIGHING, display advances to LIBRARY
NAME.
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP Library name

LIBRARY NAME Enter a Library Name, up to 8 characters and press Enter button. Display
advances to DIFF STARTUP. If a previous name was entered and selected,
the balance displays the parameters which were set.
DIFF STARTUP For first time entries, select SETUP. Display advances to DIFF WEIGHING
SETUP SETUP. RESUME will bring you directly to RUN which starts the program.
RESUME
Do
not use RESUME initially.
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP Enter TARE SETUP.

Enter LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLEOFF
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
TARE SETUP TARE SETUP offers a choice of NO TARE (no container is used), SINGLE
NO TARE
SINGLE TARE
TARE (one container used during entire process), and DUAL TARE (two
DUAL TARE containers used, one at the start of a process and a different container at the
RETURN
end of a process). DUAL TARE is also used for sieve analysis. Select the
appropriate tare option for your process.
Enter TARE SETUP Select RETURN. Display returns to DIFF WEIGHING SETUP.
NO TARE
SINGLE TARE
DUAL TARE
RETURN
36
Balance modes
Enter DIFF WEIGHING SETUP

LIBRARY NAME
Automatic sampling
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF Enter AUTO SAMPLE. Auto Sampling permits repetitive sampling automati-
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES cally. Select ON or OFF. Display advances to DIFF RESULT.
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME
Difference result
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
Enter DIFF RESULT. Difference result enables final weighing results to be
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES shown by weight, percentage (for sieve analysis), or % retention. Select
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA appropriate result for your process.
RUN
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP Select RETURN and press Enter. Display advances to DIFF WEIGHING
Enter LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP SETUP with NUMBER OF SAMPLES highlighted. Enter the NUMBER OF
AUTO SAMPLEOFF
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
SAMPLES display.
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP Enter number of samples

NUMBER OF SAMPLES
Enter the number of samples you want to test. A maximum of 80 samples
can be run per library entry. After specifying number of samples, press
Enter button, display returns to DIFF WEIGHING SETUP with RUN highlighted.
Processing the samples

Since there are three options of taring, each procedure will be covered
separately. Follow either NO TARE, SINGLE TARE or DUAL TARE methods
depending upon which you have selected.

LIBRARY NAME
No Tare - Initial weighing
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF After pressing the Enter button, the display indicates PUT INITIAL SAMPLE #
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 1 ON PAN. This first sample is your unprocessed sample.
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
DIFF WEIGHING Put first unprocessed sample on the pan. When the weight has stabilized,
TARE WT: TARE WT: press Enter button with START/SAMPLE highlighted on the display. This
IN IT WT: FINAL WT:
advances to the next sample. Continue adding samples and pressing the
0.000
PUT INITIAL SAMPLE #1 ON PAN STABLE Enter button for each sample until all samples have been weighed. When
START/SAMPLE EDIT SETUP
the last sample has been weighed, the display indicates the initial weight of
all samples.
37
Balance modes
TAREWT INIT WT TARE WT FINAL \VT This sample display indicates 3 samples taken with no tare.
N/A 7.705 NA 0.000
N/A 7.702 N/A 0.000 Four options are available at the bottom of the display. CONTINUE permits
N/A 7.701 N/A 0.000
continuing with the procedure. SAVE permits saving the data and returns
the
CONTINUE SAVE RESAMPLE DELETE
balance to a weighing mode. RESAMPLE allows going back to
resample a selected entry. DELETE permits deleting a selected entry.
To return to your final weighing, find and select the Library name of your
test.
The balance then returns to where you left off in your sampling procedure for
final weighing.
Enter DIFF WEIGHING No Tare - Final weighing

TARE WT:
IN IT WT:
TARE WT:
FINAL WT:
After pressing the Enter button, the display returns to final weighing. Put first
processed sample on the pan. When the weight has stabilized, press Enter
7.299
PUT INITIAL SAMPLE #1 ON PAN STABLE
button with START/SAMPLE highlighted on the display. This advances to the
next sample. Continue adding samples and pressing the Enter button for
each sample until all final samples have been weighed. When the last
sample has been weighed, the display indicates the final weight of all
samples.
TAREWT INITWT TARE WT FINAL \VT With CONTINUE highlighted, press Enter button to review final display.
Enter N/A 7.705 NA 7.299
N/A 7.702 N/A 7.299
N/A 7.701 N/A 7.299
SAMPLE # INIT WT FINAL WT WT DIFF Final display.

N/A 7.705 7.220 -0.407
N/A 7.702 7.299 -0.403
N/A 7.701 7.299 -0.402
TOTAL 23.109 21.896 -1.212

LIBRARY NAME
Single Tare - Initial weighing (one container)
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF This procedure is used when one container is used with the initial and final
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES samples. After pressing the Enter button, the display indicates PUT INITIAL
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA CONTAINER #1 ON PAN.
RUN
DIFF WEIGHING Put container #1 on the pan. When the weight has stabilized, press Enter
TARE WT: TARE WT: button with START/SAMPLE highlighted on the display. This advances to the
IN IT WT: FINAL WT:
next container. Continue adding containers and pressing the Enter button for
0.000
PUT INITIAL SAMPLE #1 ON PAN STABLE each container until all containers have been weighed. When the last
container has been weighed, the display indicates the initial weight of all
containers.
38
Balance modes
TAREWT INIT WT TARE WT FINAL \VT This sample display indicates 3 containers weighed. Four options are
8.739 0.000 N/A 0.000
8.744 O.O00 N/A 0.000 available at the bottom of the display. CONTINUE permits continuing with the
8.738 0.000 N/A 0.000
procedure. SAVE permits saving the data and returns the balance to a
weighing mode. RESAMPLE allows going back to resample a selected entry.
DELETE permits deleting a selected entry.
DIFF WEIGHING Select CONTINUE. Display changes to PUT INITIAL SAMPLE #1 ON PAN.
Enter
TARE WT: TARE WT: Place sample # 1 on the pan, press Enter button. Repeat steps and place
IN IT WT: 20.006 FINAL WT:
each sample on the pan.
20.006
TAREWT INIT WT TARE WT FINAL \VT When the last sample is placed on the pan and entered, the display indicates
8.739 20.006 N/A 0.000
8.744 20.096 N/A 0.000 the tare weight of the containers and the initial weight of the samples.
8.738 20.096 N/A 0.000
SAMPLE #1
DIFF WEIGHING Single Tare - Final weighing (one container)

TARE WT:
IN IT WT:
TARE WT:
FINAL WT:16.144 After pressing the Enter button, the display returns to final weighing. Put first
16.144 processed sample with the container on the pan. When the weight has
PUT FINAL SAMPLE #1 ON PAN STABLE
stabilized, press Enter button with START/SAMPLE highlighted on the display.
This advances to the next sample. Continue adding samples and pressing
the Enter button for each sample until all final samples have been weighed.
When the last sample has been weighed, the display indicates the final
weight of all samples.
TARE WT INIT WT TARE WT FINAL \VT With CONTINUE highlighted, press Enter button to review final display.
Enter 8.739 20.006 N/A 16.143
8.744 20.096 N/A 16.598
8.738 20.096 N/A 16.685
SAMPLE #1

1 11.267 7.404 -3.863
2 11.352 7.854 -3.498
3 11.358 6.947 -4.411
TOTAL 33.977 22.205 -11.772
39
Balance modes

LIBRARY NAME
Dual Tare - Initial weighing (two containers)
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF This procedure is used when separate containers are used at the start of a
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES process and the end of a process. After pressing the Enter button, the
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
display indicates to PUT INITIAL CONTAINER #1 ON PAN.
TARE WT: 8.738
IN IT WT:
TARE Wf:
FINALWT:8.738
next container. Continue adding containers and pressing the Enter button
8.738
PUT INITIAL CONTAINER #1 ON PAN STABLE for each container until all containers have been weighed. When the last
containers.
8.738 0.000 N/A 0.000
8.738 O.O00 N/A 0.000 available at the bottom of the display. CONTINUE permits continuing with
8.738 0.000 N/A 0.000
the procedure. SAVE permits saving the data and returns the balance to a
Enter
TARE WT: TARE WT: Place sample # 1 on the pan, press Enter button. Repeat steps and
place each sample on the pan.
23.076
TAREWT INIT WT TARE WT FINAL \VT When the last sample is placed on the pan and entered, the display indi-
8.738
8.738
23.989
23.994
N/A
N/A
0.000
0.000 cates the tare weight of the containers and the initial weight of the samples.
8.738 24.064 N/A 0.000
SAMPLE #1
DIFF WEIGHING Dual Tare - Final weighing (two containers)

TARE WT:
IN IT WT:
TARE WT:
FINAL WT:8.738
After pressing the Enter button, the display returns to final weighing. Put final
container #1 on the pan. Repeat process for all containers.
8.738
PUT FINAL CONTAINER #1 ON PAN STABLE
TARE WT INIT WT TARE WT FINAL \VT Put first processed sample with the container on the pan. When the weight
Enter 8.738 23.989 8.738 19.647
8.738 23.994 8.741 20.580 has stabilized, press Enter button with START/SAMPLE highlighted on the
8.738 24.064 8.738 20.102
display. This advances to the next sample. Continue adding samples and
SAMPLE #1 pressing the Enter button for each sample until all final samples have been
weighed. When the last sample has been weighed, the display indicates the
final weight of all samples. With CONTINUE highlighted, press Enter button
to review final display.

1 15.251 10.909 .342
2 15.256 1.839 -3.417
3 15.326 11.364 -3.962
TOTAL 45.833 34.112 -11.721
40
Balance modes
6.6 Formulation
Formulations can be named and have from 2 to 10 components specified. Names are limited to 8 characters. Once
named, they may be recalled and used at any time. Each component of a given formulation can be specified as to
its weight or percentage. Each element of a formulation is shown on a dual bar graph as a percentage and displays
the desired weight. Thus, each component may be placed on the pan until 100% is indicated.

FORMULATION
Enter CHANGE MODE. Select FORMULATION, display advances to LIBRARY
NAME.
FORMULATION SETUP Library name

LIBRARY NAME Enter a library name, up to 8 characters and press Enter button. Display
advances to FORMULATION SETUP with WEIGH TYPE highlighted. If a
previous name was entered and selected, the balance displays the param-
eters which were set.
FORMULATION SETUP
Enter LIBRARY NAME FORM2
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN
Enter WEIGHT
WEIGH TYPE Weigh type
PERCENT
RETURN
Enter the weigh type. You can select the components to be specified by
weight or percentage. Display returns to FORMULATION SETUP.
FORMULATION SETUP Number of items

LIBRARY NAME FORM 2
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT Select NUMBER OF ITEMS.
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN
FORMULATION SETUP Specify the number of items (components) in the formulation. After specify-
NUMBER OF ITEMS ing the number of items, the display returns to FORMULATION SETUP with
SETUP highlighted.
41
Balance modes
Enter FORMULATION SETUP Enter SETUP in the FORMULATION SETUP. Display advances to a split
LIBRARY NAME FORM2
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT screen.
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN
FORMULATION SETUP Specifying component names

1 0.000
Specify the name for the first component of the formula, then press Enter
2 0.000
button. Display advances to right of screen which is either weight or percent-
age (whichever was previously selected).
FORMULATION SETUP Specifying weight or percentage values

1
2
0.000
Specify either weight value or percentage value which you had previously
selected for the first component. Repeat these two steps for all components
in your formula. After you enter all component names and values, the
display advances to FORMULATION SETUP with RUN highlighted.
FORMULATION SETUP Select RUN. A dual bar display appears indicating the weight or percentage
LIBRARY NAME FORM2
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT to be placed on the pan.
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN
Enter
FORMULATION Adding first component
0% 90%
Add the first component on the pan. The bar graph is used as a guide to
90% 110%
precisely add 100% of the first component. NEXT appears highlighted at the
A1=200.000
200.044
DIFF WT: 0.044 bottom of the display. Press Enter button to add next component. Sample
GRAMS STABLE
indicates 200.044 grams. Leave the first component on the pan. Repeat
this procedure for all additional components.
Enter
FORMULATION Adding remaining components
Add all remaining components one at a time, pressing the Enter button after
90% 110%
each component is placed on the pan.
A1=200.000
200.021
DIFF WT: 0.021
GRAMS STABLE
Enter Al
TARGET
200.000
RESULT
200.044
DIFF
0.044
Final results
A2 200.000
TOTAL 400.000
200.021
400.065
0.021
0.065
After the last component is placed on the pan, the final result is indicated on
the display.
42
Balance modes
6.7 Quick check weighing

Quick check weighing permits placing a reference sample on the balance pan which is used as a reference weight to
measure against similar samples. A single bar display indicates up to 100% of the capacity of the balance. The
difference in percentage is also shown along with the reference weight. The large numeric display indicates the
weight of the sample.

Enter CHANGE MODE. Select QUICK CHECK, display advances to QUICK
CHECK.
QUICK CHECK
QUICK CHECK Setting reference weight

->O/T<- DIFF: 0.000
DIFF%: 0.020
REF WT: 14.798 Tare the balance. The display indicates PUT REF WT ON PAN. Place the
14.800 reference weight on the pan. WAIT is momentarily displayed as the balance
PUT REF WT ON PAN
WAIT GRAMS STABLE accepts the reference weight.
NEW REF WT MODE MAIN MENU
QUICK CHECK Adding samples

DIFF: 0.030
DIFF%: 0.020
REF WT: 14.798
After the balance accepts the weight, remove the reference weight and place
14.768 the first sample on the pan. The display indicates the difference in weight
GRAMS STABLE
and
percentage of the sample against the reference weight. You may continue to
weigh additional samples.
Enter QUICK CHECK Setting new reference weight

DIFF: 0.030
DIFF%: 0.020
REF WT: 14.798 Clear the pan and tare the balance. With NEW REF WT highlighted at the
0.0000 bottom of the display, press Enter button. The display indicates PUT REF WT
GRAMS STABLE ON PAN. You may now place a new reference weight on the pan and repeat
the above procedure for new samples using a new reference weight.
When you exit quick check weighing and use other balance functions and
return to quick check weighing, the previous reference weight appears in the
display. Disregard display readings. When you place a new reference
weight on the pan, the balance resets to the new weight.
43
Balance modes
6.8 Statistics/Function link

Statistics are used when it is desired to compare a number of samples and examine the relative deviation of the
samples along with other statistical data. A minimum of three samples is required in this program. Statistics con-
tains menu options which include standard deviation, mean, sum, maximum, minimum, difference, relative devia-
tion, auto sample and sample size. Most of these can be set ON or OFF except sample size which can be set for a
particular number. When a printer or computer is connected to the balance, all statistical information can be ob-
served and printed. FUNCTION LINK offers a choice of three functions; CHECK WEIGHING, FILLING and ANIMAL
WEIGHING which can be linked directly to statistical data. Statistics can be enabled either through the CHANGE
MODE menu or the LIBRARY. The library method will automatically run the link. Changes can be made through the
CHANGE MODE menu setup.
Enter
CHANGE MODE
Enter CHANGE MODE and select STATISTICS, display advances to LIBRARY
NAME.
STATISTICS SETUP Library name

advances to STATISTICS SETUP with STD DEV highlighted. If a previous name
was entered and selected, the balance uses the parameters which were
previously set.
STATISTICS SETUP
LIBRARY NAME STATS1
Turning statistics on or off
STD DEV
MEAN
ON
ON
Select each option under the STATISTICS SETUP and turn either ON or OFF.
SUM ON
MAXIMUM ON When you reach FUNCTION LINK, you have a choice of linking the statistical
MINIMUM ON
DIFFERENCE ON data to either CHECK WEIGHING, FILLING or ANIMAL WEIGHING or not
RELATIVE DEV ON
linking and leave the FUNCTION LINK OFF.
OFF
FUNCTION LINK Selecting a function link
FILLING
CHECK WEIGHING
Selecting FUNCTION LINK offers a choice of either FILLING, CHECK WEIGH-
ANIMAL WEIGHING
RETURN TO SETUP
ING, or ANIMAL WEIGHING functions to have statistics available on printouts.
Select the desired function and press Enter button.
STATISTICS SETUP
DIFFERENCE ON
Running the program
RELATIVE DEV
AUTO SAMPLE
ON
OFF
Select RUN and press Enter button. If statistics was selected to link with any
AUTO PRINT
SAMPLE SIZE
OFF
3 function, the display for that function will indicate STATS ON at the top of the
FUNCTION LINK OFF
RUN display.
STATISTICS RESULT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES: 3 Statistical result display
UNIT: GRAMS
MEAN: 203.571
MAXIMUM: 203.929
When a program has been run, a typical display as shown appears.
MINIMUM: 203.283
STD DEVIATION: 0.310
RELATIVE DEV: 0.064
SUM: 610.713
DIFFERENCE:0.546
Function links when set up to a particular function such as FILLING, CHECK

WEIGHING, or ANIMAL WEIGHING can be run directly from the Library
listing. Scrolling through the Library will reveal which item(s) are linked to
statistics.
44
Balance modes
6.9 Density
Four methods of density determinations can be made with the Voyager balance. These are: solids more dense than
water, solids less dense than water, porous material (impregnated with oil), and liquid density. A Density Determina-
tion Kit Part Number 470007-010 is specifically designed to be used with Ohaus® Analytical Voyager balances.
Illustrations in this procedure refer to the density kit, however, you may use whatever lab apparatus that will suit the
requirements for density measurements. A built in reference density table for water at temperatures between 10ºC and
30ºC is included in the balance software. When making density measurements, the material should weigh at least
10.0 mg on an analytical balance and 100 mg on a precision balance.
6.9.1 Balance preparation with density kit

Allow the balance to warm up sufficiently before making measurements.
Support Bracket
Washer
Equalizing Weigh Bracket Pan
Washer Below Hook
Kit Components Balance preparation Bracket and Washer Mounting
Open either the left or right side door of the balance and remove the Pan as shown. Insert the Bracket into the
balance where the Pan was removed.
On balances which are rated over 400g, place the Equalizing Washer on top of the Bracket as shown in the illustra-
tion.
Place the Support into position over the bracket making sure the Support
does not make contact with the Bracket as shown in illustration.
Bracket
Support
Support Mounting
Install beaker on support as shown.
NOTE: Beaker and thermometer are not

supplied as part of the density kit.
Beaker Installation
45
Balance modes
6.9.2 Solid density determinations for items more dense than water
The density Q is the quotient of the mass m and the volume V.
Q= m
V
Density determinations are performed by using Archimedes principle. This principle states that every solid body
immersed in a fluid loses weight by an amount equal to that of the fluid it displaces. The density table for water is
included in the Voyager balance software.
The density of a solid is determined with the aid of a liquid whose density, Qo, is known (water is used as an
auxiliary liquid). The solid is weighed in air (A) and then in the auxiliary liquid (B). The density Q can be calculated
from the two weighings as follows:
A
Q= •Q0
A -B
The balance allows direct determination of the buoyancy P (P =A - B ) and consequently the above formula can be
simplified:
A
Q= •Q0
P

B = Weight of the solid in the auxiliary liquid
Q0 = Density of the auxiliary liquid at a given temperature (this value depends on the temperature). The density table
for water is included in Voyager balances.
P = Buoyancy of the solid in the auxiliary liquid (corresponds to A -B).
In the event that a different liquid is to be used, provisions are made to enter the density of the desired liquid and
enter its name into a library. The following procedure uses water.
Enter
CHANGE MODE
Enter CHANGE MODE. Select DENSITY, display advances to LIBRARY NAME.
DENSITY SETUP Library name

advances to DENSITY SETUP with SOLID DENSITY highlighted. If a previous
name was entered and selected, the balance uses the parameters which
were previously set.
DENSITY SETUP After you select SOLID DENSITY, display advances to AUX LIQ & MODE with
Enter LIBRARY NAME D2
SOLID DENSITY <-SELECTED H2O highlighted.
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
RUN
46
Balance modes
Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Selecting water as auxiliary liquid
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
Select H2O, and perform the next step. If you are using a different liquid,
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
O.000
0.0000
skip the next step and continue.
RETURN TO SETUP
AUX LIQ & MODE Specify temperature

ENTER TEMPERATURE CELSIUS Enter the temperature of the water and press Enter button. Display
advances to AUX LIQ & MODE with POROUS MATERIAL highlighted. Skip the
next two steps.
Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Selecting an auxiliary liquid
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
Select OTHER, and perform the next step.
DRY WEIGHT O.000
DENSITY OF OIL 0.0000
RETURN TO SETUP
AUX LIQ & MODE Specify auxiliary liquid density

ENTER LIQUID DENSITY IN CC Enter the density of the auxiliary liquid and press Enter button. Display
advances to AUX LIQ & MODE with POROUS MATERIAL highlighted.
Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Return to setup
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
Select RETURN TO SETUP. Disregard POROUS MATERIAL in menu as this is
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
O.000
0.0000
explained in Appendix A-2. Display returns to DENSITY SETUP with AUTO
RETURN TO SETUP SAMPLE highlighted.
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
<-SELECTED Select AUTO SAMPLE and turn it ON or OFF. A setting of ON allows samples
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
to be sequentially sampled without pressing the Enter button for each
RUN
sample.
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto print
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
<-SELECTED At this point you can select AUTO PRINT. To turn on, press the Enter button
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
and select ON. If you do not want automatic printing, select OFF.
RUN
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Testing the sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
<-SELECTED Select RUN and press the Enter button. The display advances to DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
and requests WEIGH IN AIR shown at the bottom of the screen.
RUN
DENSITY - - D2
WEIGH IN AIR: 0.000 TEMP:25.0
WEIGH IN LIQ: AUX D= 9.971
VOLUME:
WEIGH IN AIR 0.000

START/SAMPLE SETUP MAIN MENU
47
Balance modes
START/SAMPLE is highlighted.
Make sure a beaker with liquid is in position on the stand in the balance.
Press the >O/T< button to zero the balance reading.
Place solid on top of the bracket as shown and close the draft shield doors.
Weigh the solid (weight A) and press the Enter button. The display now
Sample Weighing in Air requests WEIGH IN LIQUID.
Open the draft shield of the balance and place the solid in the Weighing Pan
on the Weigh Below Hook in the liquid as shown. Ensure that there are no
air bubbles on the solid to be weighed.
Close the draft shield doors and weigh the solid (buoyancy P) by pressing
the Enter button. The display indicates the density in grams/cc.
Successive samples may be taken simply by pressing Enter with the START
Sample Weighing in Liquid
SAMPLE bar highlighted. If AUTO SAMPLE was selected previously, samples
can be taken as per the indication on the display.
DENSITY - - D2 A typical final display is shown which indicates all of the parameters and
WEIGH IN AIR: 15.703
WEIGH IN LIQ: 15.306
TEMP:25.0
AUX D= 9.971
values.
VOLUME: 0.40
GRAMS/CC
39.438
STABLE
6.9.3 Solid density determinations for items less dense than water
For density determination of solids with a density less than 1 g/CM3, the bottom of the Weigh Below Hook for solids
must be used as it holds the solid body below the surface of the auxiliary liquid. If the buoyancy of the solid is
greater than the weight of the Weigh Below Hook, the Weigh Below Hook must be weighted by placing an additional
mass on the submerged part of the Weigh Below Hook as shown.
Weigh the sample in air first as explained in the previous procedure.
After loading the additional mass, tare the balance and start the weighing
Mass again. Wait until the balance has reached stability and note the displayed
weight P (buoyancy of the solid).
Sample
48
Balance modes
6.9.4 Improving the accuracy of the result of solid density

Temperature
changes in the order of magnitude 0.I to 1% per °C. This effect is already apparent in the third decimal place of the
result.
To obtain accurate results, we recommend that you always take the temperature of the auxiliary liquid into account on
Air buoyancy
1 CM3 of air weighs approximately 1.2 mg (depending on the physical condition). As a consequence, in the weigh-
ing in air, each solid experiences a buoyancy of this magnitude (the so-called air buoyancy) per cm3 of its volume.
decimal places. To correct for this, the air buoyancy (0.0012 g per cm3 volume of the body) is added to the calcu-
lated result:
Surface tension of the auxiliary liquid

liquid), the influence of the apparent weight increase can be neglected because the balance is tared before every
measurement.
49
Balance modes
6.9.5 Liquid density determinations

The density of a liquid can be made using a sinker of known volume. The sinker is weighed in air and then in the
liquid whose density is to be determined, The density, Q, can be determined from the two weighings as follows:

A-B B = Weight of the sinker in liquid
Q=
P = Buoyancy of the sinker in the liquid ( P = A-B)
DENSITY SETUP Select liquid density

LIBRARY NAME D2
SOLID DENSITY <-SELECTED The balance is prepared in the same manner. Follow the same procedure
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLEOFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
for solid density determination except select LIQUID DENSITY under the
RUN DENSITY SETUP display. Press the Enter button. The display advances to
ENTER SINKER VOLUME IN CC.
DENSITY SETUP Enter sinker volume

ENTER SINKER VOLUME IN CC
Enter the sinker volume in CCs. The display starts with 30 cc. Continue
30.000 with the instructions on the displays and select RUN.
DENSITY - - D3 After weighing the sinker in air and then weighing the sinker immersed in
WEIGH IN AIR: 211.395 liquid, the balance calculates the density of the liquid and is displayed in
WE GH iN LIQ: 200.043 SKRVOL:30.000
grams/cc. See illustrations below for placement of the sinker. When the
0.378
GRAMS/CC STABLE sinker is immersed in the liquid, it must not come into contact with the
bottom of the beaker.
Sinker
Sinker
Sinker In Air Sinker In Liquid
50
Balance modes
6.10 Statistical quality control (SQC)

The Statistical Quality Control (SQC) feature is extremely useful during various types of process filling operations
when it is desired to monitor and control the process to eliminate under and over filling. Provisions are made in the
balance to accommodate the weight of various packaging methods. During operation, parameters of the packaged
product are set into the balance such as packaging weight, acceptable weight limits and non-acceptable weight limits
of the product. These weight limits are identified as +Tl, +T2, NOMINAL and -TI, -T2. As samples are weighed and
stored in the balance, a trend analysis is developed and displayed on the balance. Up to 25 samples in a batch with
up to ten batches are visible on a trend screen for quality control purposes. Each batch of samples is shown on the
display which indicates the maximum/minimum standard deviation and mean values for each batch. An on going
examination of the relative deviation of the samples along with other statistical data can be viewed and is stored. By
observing the results of the TREND ANALYSIS screen, you can effectively monitor the filling process operation. Setup
parameters can be stored in the library and up to 5 products with statistical history can be stored in memory. All SQC
information can be printed.
Enter
SQC Enter CHANGE MODE and select SQC, display advances to LIBRARY NAME.
SQC SETUP Library name

advances to SQC SETUP with TOLERANCE highlighted. If a previous name
previously set.
Enter SQC SETUP

LIBRARY NAME SQC1
Tolerance
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE
Enter TOLERANCE. Display advances to DEFINE TOLERANCE with +T2 high-
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO SAMPLEOFF l lighted.
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES I
BATCH NAME
+T2
DEFINE TOLERANCE
0.000
Defining tolerances
+T1 0.000 Define the tolerances for your product. Start with +T2, continue with +Tl,
NOMINAL WEIGHT O.O00
-Ti
-T2
0.000
0.000
NOMINAL WEIGHT, then -TI, finish with -T2. After entering values, press
RETURN TO SETUP Enter button. Display advances to RETURN TO SETUP, press Enter button.
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
Selecting tare
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE Select TARE and press Enter button. Display advances to TARE SELECTION
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO SAMPLEOFF l with NO TARE highlighted.
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES I
BATCH NAME
51
Balance modes
TARE SELECTION Selecting type of tare

NO TARE
MEAN TARE Four types of taring are available. NO TARE is self explanatory, MEAN TARE
INDIVIDUAL TARE
ADD. WITH MT is used to subtract the packaging weight automatically, INDIVIDUAL TARE is
RETURN TO SETUP
for each sample with display prompts, ADD with MT is additive weighing
with
mean tare. After selecting tare type, press Enter button.
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
Selecting auto sample/auto print
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE AUTO SAMPLE and AUTO PRINT are ON/OFF selectable functions. When
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO SAMPLE OFF AUTO SAMPLE is turned ON, samples can be taken without pressing any
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
BATCH NAME
I buttons. When AUTO PRINT is set ON, automatic printing of results are
made. Select functions and press Enter button.
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
Specifying sample size
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE Enter NUMBER OF SAMPLES. Specify the number of samples to be mea-
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO SAMPLE OFF sured. After specifying sample size, display advances to SQC SETUP with
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
BATCH NAME
3 BATCH NAME highlighted. Press Enter button.
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
Specifying batch name
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE Enter BATCH NAME. Specify the name of the batch and press Enter button.
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO SAMPLE OFF After specifying the batch name, the display advances to SQC SETUP with
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
BATCH NAME
3 RUN highlighted. You are now ready to take samples.
SQC SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
Taking samples
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
3
The balance has a total limit of 5 history files which can include other
BATCH NAME
V IEW MEAN VALUE TRACE
0
functions such as Differential Weighing and Formulation. If more than five
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
RUN
sets are entered, one or more data files will have to be removed. If when
saving, a message appears FAILED TO SAVE, the library is full.
SQC - - SQC2 Sample # 1

0% 100% With the SQC SETUP displayed and RUN highlighted, press Enter button,
PUT SAMPLE #1 ON PAN
display indicates the previously entered data Library name at the right hand
0.000 top of the display and instructs: PUT SAMPLE #1 ON PAN.
SQC - - SQC2 Place your first sample on the balance pan, then press Enter button. When
0% 100% the balance stabilizes, it will record the weight you have placed on the pan
and will automatically advance to sample number 2.
11.905
52
Balance modes

0%
100%
Remove the first sample from the pan and place the second sample on the
pan. When the balance stabilizes, press the Enter button. When AUTO
12.305
SAMPLE is ON, you do not have to press Enter.
SQC - - SQC2 Remaining samples

0%
100%
Continue this procedure until all of your samples have been entered. When
all samples have been entered, a History screen is displayed which indi-
12.710
cates the parameters of the first batch.
SAMPLES 3 BATCH NAME: NOI

UNIT GRAMS
NOMINAL WT: 12.181
Batch history result
MEAN 12.307
MAXIMUM 12.710
MINIMUM 11.906
The sample history result at the left represents a batch of three samples. To
RELATIVE DEVIATION: O.108
>+T2 0.00% 0
run additional batches of samples, press the Enter button, the display will
>+T1 0.00% 0
TI>N>-TI 100.00%, 3
<-T10.00%, 0 return to PUT SAMPLE #1 ON PAN. Remember that only ten batches will be
<-T20.00% 0
displayed, however, if more batches are run, data is still recorded.
Go Back
AUTO SAMPLE
SQC SETUP
OFF
Analyzing data
AUTO PRINT OFF Press the Go Back button until SQC SETUP is displayed. Select VIEW MEAN
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 3
VIEW MEAN VALUE TRACE
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
VALUE TRACE. Press the Enter button and the Trace Value screen appears.
RUN This screen indicates the limits you have set for your samples and the
amount of deviation per batch.
SQ1 TOTAL BATCHES I 1

05/24/99 08:06:28A 05/24/99 02:34:19
Viewing mean value trace
19.513 +T2 After you have taken the required number of data samples, you can view the
16.076 +T1
12.181 N sample value trace and/or the sample batch history. Screen indicates 11
8.742 -Tl
batches were processed with the last 10 displayed.
7.500 -T2
Sample Value Trace
MAXIMUM LIMIT Symbol Definitions

STANDARD The sample illustration at the left describes the symbols used on the Mean
MEAN VALUE OF SQC SET
DEVIATION
Value Trace screen and their definitions.
MINIMUM LIMIT
Symbol definitions
53
Balance modes
Go Back
AUTO SAMPLE
SQC SETUP
OFF
Selecting batch history
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
3
To select the batch history, press the Go Back button to enter the SQC SETUP
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
screen and scroll down to VIEW BATCH HISTORY. Press the Enter button.
RUN
Viewing batch history

START SAMPLING: 05/24/99 08:26:28A
TOTAL BATCHES:11
TOTAL SAMPLES: 33
MEAN: 14.314
MAXIMUM: 20.523
MINIMUM: 8.745 Eleven batches of samples with three samples per batch were taken as an
>+T2: 9.09%
>+T1: 24.24%
T1>N>-T1: 66%, 22
3
8 example. The sample illustration at the left indicates the parameters taken
<-T1:0.00%,
<-T2:0.00%,
0
0
LAST SAMPLE: 05/24/99 02:34:19P
during the last 33 samples.
6.10.1 Resuming a particular SQC setup

SQC has a resume feature which enables you to recall any SQC procedure which has been named and stored in the
library. The Setup procedure enabled you to designate the product parameters and assign a basic name. To use a
stored product parameter with a new set of samples, you recall the procedure by name.

Enter SQC
Enter CHANGE MODE and select SQC, display advances to LIBRARY NAME.
STATISTICS SETUP Enter library name

LIBRARY NAME Enter the library name of the previous SQC procedure you want to resume.
Press Enter button. Display advances to SQC STARTUP with RESUME
highlighted. The balance uses the parameters which were previously set.
In the next step, you cannot use the Go Back to exit the menu. If you decide
to exit, you must enter RESUME first, then back out.
Enter
SQC SETUP Select resume
RESUME
NEW SETUP When RESUME is selected, the display returns to the SQC SETUP with RUN
PREVIOUS SETUP/REDO BATCH
PREVIOUS SETUP/CLEAR ALL DATA! highlighted.
54
Balance modes
Enter
SQC SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
Select run
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
3
With RUN selected, press Enter button.
BATCH NAME 0
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
RUN
SQC - - SQI Adding additional samples

PUT SAMPLE # 1 ON PAN Display returns to the name of the SQC identified and is ready to run sample
0.000 # 1. You may now run additional samples with the parameters previously
set. These samples will be added to the original sample set. The last ten
samples are displayed on the MEAN VALUE TRACE.
6.10.2 Specifying new SQC setup

There are two methods of entering SQC for a new setup. One is to start at the beginning of the SQC procedure. The
second method is to enter the SQC STARTUP menu. The second method is specified.
Enter
SQC
Enter CHANGE MODE and select SQC, display advances to
LIBRARY NAME.

LIBRARY NAME If you have selected an existing library name you can still change the setup
in the next step. Press the Enter button. Display advances to SQC STARTUP
with RESUME highlighted.
Enter RESUME
SQC STARTUP Select new setup
NEW SETUP When NEW SETUP is selected, the display returns to the SQC SETUP with
PREVIOUS SETUP/CLEAR ALL DATA! TOLERANCE highlighted.
Enter
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC 1
Completing new setup
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE Refer back to section 6.10 and enter all information required for a new
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO SAMPLE 0FF setup.
AUTO PRINT OFF
N NUMBER OF SAMPLES 1
BATCH NAME
55
Balance modes
6.10.3 Redoing or correcting a batch

If during the course of taking samples, an error has occurred and you want to rerun the set of samples you are
currently working with, this procedure will allow you to start a new set without recording data from the set containing
errors.
Go Back
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME
Exiting a sample set containing an error
TOLERANCE
TARE When the current sample you are working with is incorrect, you can exit by
MEAN TARE VALUE
AUTO SAMPLE pressing the Go Back button. The display returns back to SQC SETUP with
AUTO PRINT
N NUMBER OF SAMPLES LIBRARY NAME highlighted. Press the Enter button.
BATCH NAME
STATISTICS SETUP Entering current library name

LIBRARY NAME The current name you assigned should be displayed. Press the Enter
button. Display advances to SQC STARTUP with RESUME highlighted.
Enter
RESUME
SQC STARTUP Select previous setup
NEW SETUP
Select PREVIOUS SETUP/REDO BATCH and press Enter button. The display
PREVIOUS SETUP/CLEAR ALL DATA! returns to SQC SETUP with VIEW BATCH HISTORY highlighted.
Enter SQC SETUP

MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
Select run
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF Scroll to RUN. With RUN selected, press the Enter button. The balance
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 3
BATCH NAME N01 returns to the sample set interrupted and you may continue to take samples.
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
RUN
Clearing previous data set

When you are in the SQC STARTUP menu, you can elect to remove all data if
desired by selecting PREVIOUS SETUP/CLEAR ALL DATA and pressing Enter
button.
56
Balance modes
6.11 Pipette calibration

Pipette calibration checks the accuracy and precision values of pipettes by weight analysis. An analytical balance is
recommended for maximum accuracy. The balance is capable of recording data from 3 to 30 samples of each
pipette tested. Each test run is stored in the application library. The number of tests which can be stored will depend
on the number of samples per test. The density table for water is included. If other liquids are used for pipette
calibration, you must enter the liquids density in g/cc at current room temperature. Since all calculations are made
within the balance, it is also required that you know the atmospheric pressure which has to be entered. A printout
can be made which specifies all parameters of the test made.
Enter CHANGE MODE From main menu

PIPETTE
Enter CHANGE MODE and select PIPETTE, display advances to LIBRARY
NAME.
PIPETTE SETUP Library name

advances to PIPETTE SETUP with TEST LIQUID G/CC highlighted. If a previ-
ous name was entered and selected, the balance uses the parameters which
Enter PIPETTE SETUP

LIBRARY NAME P2
Test liquid
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
Press Enter button. Display advances to SELECT TEST LIQUID with H2O
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
highlighted.
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 10
PIPETTE NAME
Enter H2O
SELECT TEST LIQUID Selecting water as the test liquid
OTHER
RETURN TO SETUP
If you are using water as the test liquid, press the Enter button. If you are
using a liquid other than water, skip the next step and continue.
Enter temperature of water

ENTER TEMPERATURE CELSIUS Measure the temperature of water you will be using for Pipette measure-
25.000 25.000 ments in Celsius. A standard room temperature of 25 degrees Celsius has
been pre-entered in the balance. Enter the correct value.
H2O
SELECT TEST LIQUID Selecting other test liquid
OTHER
RETURN TO SETUP
If you are using a liquid other than water as the test liquid, scroll to OTHER
and press the Enter button. The display advances to ENTER LIQUID DENSITY
IN CC.
57
Balance modes
Enter density of test liquid

ENTER LIQUID DENSITY IN CC Enter the density value for the test liquid. The standard density for water has
0.9971 0.9971 been pre-entered. Enter the correct value for the liquid you are using, and
press Enter button. Display advances to RETURN TO SETUP.
Enter H2O
SELECT TEST LIQUID Return to setup
OTHER
RETURN TO SETUP
Press the Enter button. Display advances to PIPETTE SETUP with BARO
PRESSURE highlighted.
Enter PIPETTE SETUP

LIBRARY NAME P2
Enter barometric pressure
TEST LIQUID(G/CC) 0.9971 Press the Enter button. The display advances to BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
BARO PRESSURE 1.0ATM
AUTO SAMPLE OFF with ATM highlighted.
AUTO PRINT OFF
PIPETTE NAME
BAROMETRIC PRES-
ATM SURE
Select unit of atmospheric pressure measurement
PSIG Select unit, press Enter button. The display advances to BAROMETRIC
MMHG
MBAR PRESSURE.
HPA
INHG
Specify barometric pressure

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE Enter the barometric pressure of the test area, then press the Enter button.
1.0000 1.000 Display advances to PIPETTE SETUP with AUTO SAMPLE OFF highlighted. If
you do not want auto sampling, skip next two steps and select AUTO PRINT.
It should be noted that in the next step you can select AUTO SAMPLE either
ON or OFF. When AUTO SAMPLE is turned ON, it is a real time saver as the
balance controls do not have to be touched during sampling.
Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
LIBRARY NAME P2
Select auto sampling
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
If you want auto sampling, press Enter button. Display advances AUTO
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
SAMPLE with ON highlighted. Press the Enter button.
PIPETTE NAME
Enter PIPETTE SETUP

LIBRARY NAME P2
Select auto print on
TEST LIQUID(G/CC) 0.9971 Press the Enter button. The display advances to PIPETTE SETUP with AUTO
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
PRINT OFF highlighted.
PIPETTE NAME
58
Balance modes
Enter AUTO PRINT Set auto print on

ON
OFF When set ON, results are automatically printed. Press the Enter button.
Display advances to PIPETTE SETUP with NUMBER OF SAMPLES highlighted.
Enter PIPETTE SETUP

LIBRARY NAME P2
Select number of samples
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
Press the Enter button. The display advances to NUMBER OF SAMPLES.
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
PIPETTE NAME
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
Enter sample size
Enter the number of samples. Press Enter button. The display advances to
10 1 10 PIPETTE SETUP with PIPETTE NAME highlighted.
Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
LIBRARY NAME P2
Select pipette name
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
Press Enter button. Display advances to new screen PIPETTE NAME.
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
PIPETTE NAME
Enter pipette name

PIPETTE NAME Enter the name of the pipette. Press Enter button. Display advances to
WHEAT PIPETTE NUMBER. Press Enter button.
Enter pipette number

PIPETTE NUMBER Enter the number of the pipette. Press the Enter button. The display ad-
345 vances to PIPETTE SETUP with NOMINAL highlighted.
Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
Select nominal
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
Press the Enter button. The display advances to NOMINAL VALUE UNITS with
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
PIPETTE NAME
10
WHEAT
ML highlighted.
PIPETTE NUMBER 345
NOMINAL 0.00ML
or NOMINAL VALUE UNITS Select nominal value unit

ML
UL Select either ML (milliliters) or UL (microliters). Press the Enter button.
RETURN TO SETUP
Display advances to NOMINAL.
59
Balance modes
Enter nominal value

NOMINAL Enter the nominal value. Press the Enter button. The display advances to
0.0000 0.0000 PIPETTE SETUP with INACCURACY highlighted.
Enter AUTO SAMPLE

PIPETTE SETUP
OFF
Select inaccuracy
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
10
Select INACCURACY. Press Enter button. The display advances to INACCU-
PIPETTE NAME
PIPETTE NUMBER
WHEAT
345
RACY.
NOMINAL 3.45ML
INACCURACY 2.00%
Enter inaccuracy value

INACCURACY Enter the percentage of acceptable inaccuracy. This indicates the deviation
2.000 2.000 of all pipette samples (mean error). Press Enter button. The default setting
is 2 percent. Display advances to IMPRECISION.
Enter AUTO PRINT

PIPETTE SETUP
OFF
Select imprecision
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
PIPETTE NAME
10
WHEAT
Select IMPRECISION. Press the Enter button. Display advances to IMPRECI-
PIPETTE NUMBER
NOMINAL
345
3.45ML
SION.
INACCURACY 2.00%
IMPRECISION 2.00%
Enter imprecision value

IMPRECISION Enter the imprecision value. This indicates the variation of all pipette
2.000 2.000 samples from the mean value (Coefficient of Variation). Press the Enter
button. The default setting is 2 percent. The display advances to RUN.
When placing samples in the vessel during pipette calibration, make

sure to continue the calibration to the end without significant pauses in
between each sample. If a significant amount of time has elapsed
(30 seconds or more) between samples, re-tare the balance before
adding the next sample. This is to eliminate errors introduced by
evaporation.
Enter PIPETTE SETUP

PIPETTE NUMBER 345
Taking samples
NOMINAL
INACCURACY
3.45ML
2.00%
With RUN highlighted, press the Enter button. The display advances to a
IMPRECISION
VIEW RESULTS
2.00% screen requesting to PUT SAMPLE #1 ON PAN.
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
PIPETTE - - P2 Press Enter, the display indicates PIPETTE -- NAME of test at the top of the
0% 100% screen.
0.000
AUTO SAMPLE ON GRAMS STABLE START/SAMPLE is at the bottom of the screen. Pressing Enter starts the
testing. If you are using water,use distilled water only.
Place empty vessel on the balance, fill the vessel with a small amount of
liquid, and then tare the balance.
60
Balance modes
Enter button for each sample. If the balance fails to advance to the next
sample, press the Enter button.
Place the first sample from the pipette into the vessel and press Enter. The
display indicates SAMPLE #1. Place the second sample from the pipette into
the vessel and press Enter.
P1
05/26/99 03:11:03P
STATUS PASS
INACCURACY: 0.30%
Repeat the above steps until all samples have been run. When the last
NOMINAL: 3.45ML
3.525 2S
IMPRECISION:0.97%
sample is placed on the balance and the Enter button is pressed, the panel
3.492 S
3.458 M
display indicates the results of the test which includes the Date, Time, Status,
3.425 S Nominal value, Inaccuracy and Imprecision. The graph on the display
3.391 2S
indicates the mean value in the center with standard deviation and 2
times standard deviation above and below shown as lines across the
screen. Each sample is shown as a diamond shaped mark on the graph. A
ten sample set is shown.
If AUTO PRINT was selected during the setup, the results are automatically
printed. Printout contains numerical results and all statistics.
For manual printing of test results, press the Print button on the balance.
61
Balance settings
7. Balance settings
7.1 Reset to factory settings
In this menu option you can reset selected functions or all menu settings to factory settings.
SET BALANCE
Select SET BALANCE, display advances to SET BALANCE.
SET BALANCE Select RESET, press Enter button. Display advances to RESET TO FACTORY
READOUT
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
SETTINGS.
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
RESET
or SET BALANCE
RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS
Reset to factory settings
RESET READOUTS
RESET RS232
The RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS has several reset functions. To reset a
RESET PRINT OPTION
RESET GLP
function, select the function using the arrow buttons and press Enter button.
RESET ALL
EXIT TO WEIGH To reset all functions, select RESET ALL using arrow buttons and press Enter
Enter button.
RESET ALL when selected, will return the balance to factory default settings.
7.2 Setting contrast and brightness of display

When the balance is first turned on, you may want to adjust the balance's LCD display contrast and bright-
ness to suit your needs.
Enter MAIN MENU Enter the MAIN MENU and select CONTRAST and press Enter button. Display
CHANGE MODE
CHANGE UNITS advances to LCD CONTRAST / BRIGHTNESS ADJUST.
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST
MAIN MENU Using arrow buttons, adjust contrast as needed.

or
LCD CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS
MAIN MENU Press arrow buttons and adjust brightness as needed. Press Enter or Go
Back button to return to MAIN MENU.
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS
62
Balance settings
7.3 Setting the readout

This menu option enables you to set the balance averaging level, stability level, auto zero, and legal for trade (LFT).
Enter SET BALANCE From main menu

READOUT
Select SET BALANCE and press the Enter button. Display advances to SET
BALANCE with READOUT highlighted. Press the Enter button, display
advances to READOUT SETUP.
or READOUT SETUP Setting averaging level

AVERAGING LEVEL FILTER
Press Enter button, AVERAGING LEVEL FILTER is displayed. Averaging level
GOOD BEST filter compensates for vibration or excessive air currents. A zero setting
5
(GOOD) corresponds to minimum filtering with fastest stabilization time. A
setting of (BEST)10 is maximum filtering with the slowest stabilization time.
Adjust to desired setting and press Enter button.
or READOUT SETUP Setting stability level

STABILITY LEVEL FILTER
Scroll to STABILITY LEVEL and press Enter button, STABILITY LEVEL FILTER is
GOOD BEST displayed. Stability level filter determines the variation range in divisions for
5 a given reading depending upon the filter setting. A setting of zero (GOOD)
permits the balance to respond to variations of .5 divisions. A setting of
(BEST) 10 sets the threshold to 3 divisions. Adjust to desired setting and
press Enter button.
or READOUT SETUP Setting auto-zero

AZT
OFF
Scroll to AUTO ZERO and press Enter button, AZT is displayed. Auto zero
0.5 minimizes the effects of temperature changes and shift on the zero reading.
1
3
There are 4 settings, OFF, 0.5, 1, and 3. The numbers represent display
divisions. The balance maintains the zero display until the set threshold is
exceeded. Select the desired setting and press Enter button.
or READOUT SETUP Setting legal for trade

AVERAGING LEVEL 5
STABILITY LEVEL 5 Scroll to LEGAL FOR TRADE and press Enter button. Legal for trade can be
AUTO ZERO 0.5 set ON or OFF. When set ON, only the functions allowed by the national
LEGAL FOR TRADE OFF
EXIT TO WEIGH weights and measures legislation are available. Press Enter button after
making your selection.
63
Balance settings
7.4 Setting the interface

This menu option enables you to set the balance communication parameters for the RS232 interface which include:
baud rate, data bits, parity and stop bit.

INTERACE Select SET BALANCE and press the Enter button. Display advances to SET
BALANCE with READOUT highlighted. Scroll to INTERFACE and press the
Enter button, display advances to INTERFACE.
or INTERFACE
BAUD RATE
Setting baud rate
300 Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800 and 9600 are available for commu-
1200
2400 nications. Select the appropriate rate. Default setting is 2400 baud. Press
4800
9600 Enter button.
RETURN
or INTERFACE
DATA BITS
Setting data bits
7 Data bits of 7 or 8 are selectable. Select appropriate bit rate. Default setting
8 is 7. Press Enter button.
RETURN
or INTERFACE
PARITY
Setting parity
NONE Select appropriate parity setting of either NONE, EVEN, ODD, 0, or 1. Default
EVEN
ODD setting is NONE. Press Enter button.
0
1
RETURN
or INTERFACE
STOP BITS
Setting stop bits
1 Select appropriate stop bits setting of either 1 or 2. Default setting is 2.
2 Press Enter button.
RETURN
64
Balance settings
7.5 Setting print option

This menu option enables you to set various print features ON or OFF and include Auto Print, Data, Numeric Data,
Print Date, Print Time and Print Reference.

PRINT OPTION Select SET BALANCE and press the Enter button. Display advances to SET
BALANCE with READOUT highlighted. Scroll to PRINT OPTION and press the
Enter button, display advances PRINT OPTION with AUTO PRINT OFF high-
lighted.
or AUTO PRINT Setting auto print

OFF
CONTINUOUS
Enter AUTO PRINT. AUTO PRINT can be set to output display data in one of
STABLE three ways: CONTINUOUS, STABLE or INTERVAL at user specified interval
INTERVAL
(seconds). When Interval is selected, you will have to specify number of
seconds. Select desired mode and press Enter button.
or PRINT OPTION Setting stable data, numeric data, print date, print time,
STABLE DATA OFF
NUMERIC DATA OFF print reference
PRINT DATE OFF All of these features can be set ON or OFF. STABLE DATA, when set ON,
PRINT TIME OFF
PRINT REFERENCE OFF prints only when the reading is stable. NUMERIC DATA, when set ON, prints
numerical data. PRINT DATE, when set ON, prints current date. PRINT TIME,
when set ON, prints current time. PRINT REFERENCE, when set ON, prints
the value of the weight used as a reference to the printer.
or STABLE DATA Setting functions on or off

ON Select each of the above functions and select either ON or OFF.
OFF
Enter
65
Balance settings
7.6 Setting GLP print options

This menu GLP (Good Laboratory Practices) options allows the entering of a Project Name, User Name, and GLP
Print Options which include: Date & Time, Balance ID, Project Name, User Name and Calibration all of which can be
set ON or OFF.

SETUP GLP
BALANCE with READOUT highlighted. Scroll to SETUP GLP and press the
Enter button, display advances SETUP GLP with PROJECT NAME high-
lighted.
Enter
SETUP GLP Enter project name
PROJECT NAME
Enter PROJECT NAME, the display advances to permit entering project name.
SETUP GLP Specify the project name

PROJECT NAME Specify the project name. The name can have any combination of alpha
numeric characters not to exceed 8 characters. After specifing the project
name, the display advances to USER NAME.
Enter
SETUP GLP Select user name
USER NAME
SETUP GLP Specify the user name

USER NAME Specify the user name, and press Enter button. The display advances to
GLP PRINT OPTIONS. Press Enter, the display advances to GLP PRINT
OPTIONS with DATE & TIME highlighted.
or GLP PRINT OPTIONS

DATE & TIME OFF
Setting GLP print options
BALANCE ID OFF GLP PRINT OPTIONS permit DATE & TIME, BALANCE ID, PROJECT NAME,
PROJECT NAME OFF
USER NAME OFF USER NAME, and CALIBRATION DATA to be turned ON or OFF for printing.
CALIBRATION OFF
RETURN

OFF
Enter
66
Balance settings
7.7 Setting time and date

This menu permits entering time and date. A battery backup is used for the memory. The battery has a life of 5 years.

SET TIME/DATE Select SET BALANCE and press the Enter button. Display advances to SET
BALANCE with READOUT highlighted. Scroll to SET TIME/DATE and press the
Enter button.
Enter
SETUP DATE/TIME Setting date type
DATE TYPE MM/DD/YY
This option offers 6 arrangements of date styles to suit your needs. They
are: MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, YY/MM/DD, MM/YY/DD, DD/YY/MM, YY/DD/MM.
Enter the date type option and press the Enter button. The display advances
to SET DATE.
Enter
SETUP DATE/TIME Setting date
SET DATE This option permits entering the current date. Enter the SET DATE option.
The display advances to a new SET DATE display.
SETUP DATE/TIME Enter the date in the format you have chosen above. After entering the date,
SET DATE
press the Enter button. The display advances to SETUP DATE/TIME with
TIME TYPE highlighted.
Enter
SETUP DATE/TIME Setting time type
TIME TYPE
This option permits entering either a 12 hour or 24 hour display for time.
Enter the TIME TYPE option. The display advances to SELECT TIME TYPE.
or SELECT TIME TYPE Select either 24 hour or 12 hours. This will be displayed on printouts which
24 HOUR have time and date turned on. After selecting time type, press the Enter
12 HOUR button. The display advances to SET TIME.
RETURN
Enter
67
Balance settings
Enter SETUP DATE/TIME Enter set time

SET TIME 11:23:21AM Enter the SET TIME option. The previously entered time appears in the
display. Press the Enter button.
SETUP DATE/TIME Setting the time

SET TIME
Enter the time in the format you have chosen above. After entering the time,
the display advances to SELECT AM/PM display only if 12 hour time type
was selected.
or SETUP DATE/TIME Setting am/pm

AM
PM
Select AM or PM as required. The display returns to the DATE TYPE. Press
the Go Back button to return to SET BALANCE menu, SET TIME/DATE is
displayed.
7.8 Setting auto calibration

Automatic calibration of the balance can be accomplished when equipped with this option. When this function is
turned ON, the balance automatically calibrates itself due to a temperature change.

AUTOCAL ENABLE BALANCE with READOUT highlighted. Scroll to AUTOCAL ENABLE and press
the Enter button.
or AUTOCAL ENABLE Select either ON or OFF and press the Enter button. The display returns to
ON AUTOCAL ENABLE.
OFF
7.9 Print current settings

When this option is selected, you may view all settings made in your balance on an external printer.

Enter SET BALANCE and select PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS. Press the Enter
PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS button. The balance wil print current settings out to a printer. If a printer is
not connected or improperly connected, the balance will display PRINT
FAILED after displaying PRINTING.
68
Balance settings
7.10 Lock out

This software option works in conjunction with a hardware Lockswitch and LFT software. It permits various measure-
ment units, calibration methods and balance functions to be selected and either turned ON or OFF.
Before using this sofware function, check the status of the hardware lock switch and Legal for Trade software (see
section 7.14). If the hardware switch is ON, and the Legal for Trade software is set ON (locked), you cannot access
the LFT LOCK software.

Enter the SET BALANCE menu and scroll to LOCK OUT.
LOCK OUT
or LFT LOCK Select any one of the available options and press Enter button.
TURN UNITS <ON> OR <OFF>
TURN CALIBRATION <ON> OR <OFF>
TURN FUNCTIONS <ON> OR <OFF>
Enter Depending on what you have selected, an entire list of all Units, Calibration
methods and balance Functions are displayed. Every item in each list can
be individually turned ON or OFF. These items when turned OFF will not be
available for balance operation and are locked out.
All selected items which have been turned OFF will still function. Menu lock
out is accomplished with the setting of a physical switch located under the
pan. Paragraph 7.14 describes how to lock out the selected menus. The
balance can then be sealed if required.
69
Balance settings
7.11 Software version

This option allows you to view the software version number, date installed and main board version number. These
numbers are very important for servicing. To view software version, proceed as follows;

SOFTWARE VERSION Enter SET BALANCE. Select SOFTWARE VERSION, press the Enter button, the
software version is indicated on the display. Keep a written record of this
information in the event servicing is required and the display does not work.
Software Version_______________________________.
7.12 Setting custom menu

This option allows you to enter specific balance functions. These functions can be selected conveniently from this
menu to operate the balance in a RUN mode. There are 18 items which can be selected and are listed with the
associated paragraphs in the following table.
Enter CUSTOM MENU From main menu

RUN
SETUP CUSTOM MENU
Enter the CUSTOM MENU and select SETUP CUSTOM MENU. Review list on
menu shown in table.

ON Select any of the functions and set either ON or OFF.
OFF
Enter
LIST OF CUSTOM MENU ITEMS

FILLING SQC
CHECK WEIGHING PIPETTE
ANIMAL WEIGHING READOUT
PARTS COUNTING INTERFACE
DIFF WEIGHING PRINT OPTION
QUICK CHECK SETUP GLP
FORMULATION SET TIME/DATE
STATISTICS AUTOCAL ENABLE
DENSITY PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS
Enter CUSTOM MENU To run a particular function, select RUN and press the Enter button..
RUN
SETUP CUSTOM MENU
70
Balance settings
7.13 Legal for trade (LFT)

LFT is a software controlled option which can be set to Legal For Trade ON or OFF. When set ON, certain items in the
CALIBRATION and SET BALANCE menus are automatically preset and locked to permit the balance to operate in a
legal for trade application and works in conjunction with a Lock Out switch (see section 7.14). Default setting is OFF.
The READOUT menu enables you to set the balance legal for trade (LFT) ON or OFF. See default table.

READOUT
Enter SET BALANCE and select READOUT. The READOUT SETUP menu is
displayed.
READOUT SETUP Select LEGAL FOR TRADE, press Enter button .
LEGAL FOR TRADE
Legal for trade default settings

The following table indicates the menus and options which are locked and
unlocked when LFT is set ON.
LFT DEFAULT TABLE
Set Balance Menu
Readout
Interface Unlocked
Print Option
Auto Print Unlocked
Numeric Data Unlocked
Print Data Unlocked
Print Time Unlocked
Setup GLP Unlocked
Set Time and Date Unlocked
Autocal Enable Locked
When LFT is turned ON, the last digit on the weight display has a
white colored block behind it. This signifies that the balance is in a
legal for trade operational mode and that the last digit should be
ignored. The CENTER OF ZERO is displayed only for LFT operation.
71
Balance settings
7.14 Menu lockout protection

Access to the various menus can be disabled by setting the Lock switch located on the PC board inside the balance
to ON position. The Lock switch locks out certain menus when Legal For Trade is turned ON. The default setting for
the Lock switch is OFF.
Type Approved/Legal for Trade Balance Sealing

All Voyager balances may be sealed for type approved/legal for trade applications. Type Approved balances include a
lead seal with wire and security screw as shown in the illustration.
For type approved balances consult local Weights and Measures officials to determine sealing method requirements.
After the balance has been set up properly and LFT is set ON, proceed to sealing the balance.
Sealing the balance

— Turn the display off and unplug the power cord.
— On balances with a draft shield, slide the door open and remove the pan and cover plate.
Higher capacity balances with a 6" or 8" pan do not have a cover plate.
— On balances without a draft shield, remove the pan and cover plate.
— Remove the protective cover seal.
— The Lock switch is located to the left of the pan support hole.
— Select the desired position on the Lock switch, seal and reassemble the balance.
Lock Switch shown in Locked Position

Pan
Sealing Screw
Cover Seal
Lead Seal Cover Plate
72
RS232 Interface/printing data
8. RS232 interface/printing data

8.1 RS232 interface
The balance is equipped with a bi-directional RS232 compatible interface for communication with printers and
computers. When the balance is connected directly to a printer, displayed data can be output at any time by simply
pressing PRINT.
The balance can be operated from a computer, as well as receive data such as displayed weight, weighing mode,
stability status, etc. The following sections describe the hardware and software provided with the balance
RS232 Connection Hardware

On the rear of the balance, the right-hand, 9-pin male subminiature D
connector is provided for interfacing to other devices.
1 N/C Output Formats

2 Data Out (TXD) Data output can be initiated in one of three ways: 1) By pressing PRINT; 2)
3 Data In (RXD)
Using the Auto Print feature; 3) Sending a print command (P) from a
4* Tare (External signal)
5 Clear To Send (CTS)
computer.
7 Ground
8 Request To Send (RTS) RS232 Commands
9* Print (External signal) All communication is accomplished using standard ASCII format. Only the
* External PRINT and/or TARE switches may characters shown in the following table are acknowledged by the balance.
be installed as shown in the diagram.
Invalid command response "ES" error indicates the balance has not recog-
Momentary contact switches must be used.
nized the command. Commands sent to the balance must be terminated
with a carriage return (CR) or carriage return-line line feed (CRLF). For
example, a tare command should appear as shown in the adjacent dia-
gram. Data output by the balance is always terminated with a carriage
return - line feed (CRLF).
73
RS232 COMMAND TABLE

Command
Field: Mode Stab CR LF
? Print current mode Length: 5 1 1 1
blank if stable
mg ? if unstable
GN N
g tael tical
kg tael custm
dwt tael Pcs
ct momme %
oz lb
oz t
nnnn Set Auto Print feature to nnnn nnn = 0 Turns feature OFF
(see table) nnn = S Output on stability
nnnn = 1-3600 Sets Auto Print Interval
xI Set Averaging Filter Level to x,

If LFT, level 0 to 2. 0 = minimum level
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 = maximum level
xM Places balance in mode x,

where x = 1 to 17 (see table). 1 = milligrams
If unit or mode is not already 2 = grams
enabled, command will be ignored. 3 = kilo grams
4 = dwt
5 = Carats
6 = Ounces
7 = Ounces troy
8 = Grains
9 = Taels Hong Kong
11 = Taels Taiwan
12 = Mommes
13 = Decimal Pounds
14 = Pounds-Ounces
combined
15 = Newton's
16 = tical
17 = Custom Units

Field Number field Units 6 characters Stab CR LF
Lenght: Variable 3-9
mg GN N blank if stable
g tael tical
kg tael custm ? if unstable
dwt tael Pcs
ct momme %
oz lb
oz t
74

Command
xZ Set Auto Zero to x,where x = 0 to 3 ). 0=Off, 1=0.5d, 2=1d, 3=5d.If LFT,


xA Set Auto Print feature, action CA - continuous printing, SA - print on stability, 0A -

turns all selections off.
DATE Prints Current Date. Note, a ? mark will follow the year if date or time has not been
set.
75
8.2 Printing data

Printing data to an external computer or printer requires that the communications parameters be set first.
Printing to an external printer or computer will occur each time the Print button is pressed unless the autoprint feature
is turned on, in which case, printing can occur in a continuous fashion at specified intervals or each time a stable
reading is achieved. When an external printer or computer is properly connected and the communication parameters
are set correctly, the display indicates PRINTING... If the external printer or computer is improperly connected or the
communication parameters are set incorrectly, PRINT FAILED is displayed. To clear the screen, press the Go back
button. Check computer/printer settings and connections.
This section defines the various printing setups with printing samples.
The sample shown, indicates the status in the menus.
SAMPLE PRINTOUTS Time and date

When time and date are entered in the balance with both Time and Date
TYPE= MM/DD/YY options set to ON, each printout starts with the date and time on the first line.
TYPE= 24 HOUR
12/01/99 16:00:00
READOUT
AZT LEVEL = 0.5d
GLP PRINT OPTIONS
DATE & TIME = OFF
BALANCE ID = OFF
PROJECT NAME = OFF
USER NAME = OFF
DIFFERENCE = OFF
PRINT OPTION
AUTO PRINT = OFF
INTERVAL= 0
STABLE PRINT = OFF
NUMERIC DATA = OFF
DATE= OFF
TIME= OFF
RS232 = 2400: NONE: 7 : 2
76
Span calibration printout

- - - - - SPAN CAL - - - - - -
When performing a Span calibration with GLP turned ON, a printout is
12/01/99 1:00:00 PM
automatically made after the calibration mass is placed on the pan.
Bal Id 1234
Cal: 400.000g
Old: 400.000g
Dif: 0.000g
Wt. Ref......................................
USER NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -
Linearity calibration printout

- - - - - LIN CAL - - - - - -
When performing a Linearity calibration with GLP turned on, a printout is
12/01/99 1:00:00 PM
Bal Id 1234
Cal: 400.000g
Old: 399.094g
Dif: 0.006g
Wt. Ref......................................
USER NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -
- - - - - CAL TEST - - - - - - Calibration test printout

12/01/99 1:00:00 PM When performing a Calibration Test with GLP turned on, a printout is auto-
Bal Id 1234 matically made after the calibration mass is placed on the pan.
Cal: 400.000g
Act: 400.004g
Dif: 0.004g
Wt. Ref......................................
USER NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -
77
Pipette test printout

Pipette Results
When performing a Pipette Test with GLP turned on, a printout is
available. The following sample printout is shown.
Pipette Name: WHEATON
Pipette Number: 832
Water Temp<C>: 25.0
Test Liquid Density<g/cc: 0.9971
Barometric Pressure: 1.00PSIA
Nominal Value: 3.448ml
INACCURACY
E%: 0.31%
E% Limit: 2.00%
Mean Value: 3.459ml
IMPRECISION
CV: 0.88%
CV Limit: 2.00%
Standard Deviation: 0.031ml
Status: PASS
07/01/99
-----Sample Data ml----
3.488
3.485
3.487
3.435
3.458
3.430
3.470
3.510
3.446
3.456
Operator:----------------------
78
Care and maintenance
9. Care and maintenance

To keep the balance operating properly, the housing and platform should be kept clean and free from foreign mate-
rial. If necessary, a cloth dampened with a mild detergent may be used. Keep calibration masses in a safe dry
place.
9.1 Troubleshooting
Incorrect weight reading. Balance was not re-zeroed before Press >O/T< with no weight on the
weighing. pan, then weigh item.
weighing mode.
Unable to store menu settings/ Exit was not selected. You MUST use SAVE & Exit to leave
changes. menus and save settings.
RS232 interface not working. Print menu settings not properly set Verify interface settings in RS232
up. menu correspond to those of the
peripheral device.
Random segments displayed or Microprocessor locks up. Turn power off, then turn on again.
display locks up. If condition persists, unit must be
serviced.

Unstable readings. Excessive air current Check environmental condition.
Vibration on table surface. Place balance on a stable surface

or change averaging level.
79
9.2 Error codes list

Error Codes List
Data Errors
1.0 Transient error (hardware error, probably static discharge). If error persists, the balance must be serviced.
Tare Errors
recalibration.
Calibration Errors
RS232 Errors
User Errors

must be serviced.
8.1 Hardware error caused by an internal weight signal which is too high. Check load on the pan which may be
excessive. If error persists, the balance must be serviced.
CheckSum Errors
80
9.3 Information messages

Informational messages and error messages appear on the display either when an action is required on the users part
or a malfunction has occurred in the balance due to hardware, software errors or misapplication. A typical message
is shown below.
SCALE UNSTABLE -Balance was unable to acquire stable data during calibration. The balance will try again.
9.4 Service information

If the Troubleshooting section does not resolve or describe your problem, you will need to contact an authorized Ohaus
Service Agent. For Service assistance in the United States, please call Aftermarket, Ohaus Corporation toll-free at (800)
526-0659. An Ohaus Product Service Specialist will be available to help you.

9.6 Accessories
20 g 49024-11
50 g 49054-11
100 g 49015-11
200 g 49025-11
500 g 49055-11
1 kg 49016-11
2 kg 49026-11
4 kg 49046-11
(Wall Mount) 470009-050
Remote Display Kit
(Wall Mount) 470010-020
RS232 Interface Cable, (connects impact printer) AS017-06
Printer AS142
Battery, Memory - 3 Volt Lithium ( Use BR2325, Ray O Vac or Panasonic) -----
----
81
9.7 Specifications
Analyticals
Capacity (g) 62 110 210 100/210 *
Weighing modes mg, g, kg, dwt, ct, oz , oz t, gn, taels (3), mommes, lbs, N, ti, custom unit
weighing, check weighing, density determination, SQC & pipette calibration.
library, go-back key
Linearity (mg) (+) 0.2 0.2/0.5
Sensitivity drift PPM/°C 3 ..................
(10°C - 30°C)
Operating temperature range: ..................
w/internal calibration 10° to 40°C/ 50° to 104°F ..................
w/o internal calibration 10° to 30°C/ 50° to 86°F
Calibration InCALTM calibration
Power requirements External Adapter, 100 -120 V ac, 220 - 240 V ac, 50/60 Hz ..................
Draft shield (in/cm) 10.2/25.9 ..................
Pan size (in/cm) 3.5/9 diameter
Dimensions 9 x 15.25 x14/22.8 x 38.7 x 35.5 ..................
(WxHxD) (in/cm)

Capacity (g) 210 410 100/410* 610 2100 4100 1000/4100* 4100** 6100** 8100**
Readability (g) 0.001 0.001/0.01 0.01 0.01/0.1 0.1
Weighing modes mg, g, kg, dwt, ct, oz , oz t, gn, taels (3), mommes, lbs, N, ti, custom unit
Repeatability (Std. dev.) (g) 0.0005 0.0005/0.005 0.005 0.01/0.05 0.05
Linearity (g) (+) 0.002 0.002/0.005 0.02 0.02/0.05 0.1
Sensitivity drift PPM/°C 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 ..................
(10°C - 30°C)
Operating temperature range: ..................
w/internal calibration 10° to 40°C/ 50° to 104°F ..................
w/o internal calibration 10° to 30°C/ 50° to 86°F ..................
Calibration InCALTM calibration
Power requirements External Adapter, 100 -120 V ac, 220 - 240 V ac, 50/60 Hz ..................
Dimensions 9 x 15.25 x14/22.8 x 38.7 x 35. 8.25 x 4 x 14/20.9x 10.1 x 35.5 ..................
(WxHxD) (in/cm)
* Moveable FineRange TM ** Balances with internal calibration are equipped with a 6" x 6" Pan and Windshield.
82
Appendix A - special applications
A-1 Sieve analysis

During most sieving operations, it is necessary to record the initial weight of each sieve before beginning as the
weights of the sieves may change due to particles being retained from the previous operation. In this procedure, the
basic sample is weighed first with its container weight tared. This sample weight is entered into the balance manu-
ally and stored during the procedure. Then, each sieve is weighed in sequence and the weights are stored. After the
screening process, each sieve along with its retained sample, is weighed in sequence. The balance stores the
weight values and automatically subtracts the weight of each sieve and displays the retained amount in a table as
percent retension. Up to 80 sieve weights can be stored.

DIFF WEIGHING
Enter CHANGE MODE and select DIFF WEIGHING, display advances to DIFF
WEIGHING SETUP with LIBRARY NAME highlighted.
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP Specify the library name

LIBRARY NAME Specify the library name. The name can have any combination of alpha
DIFF4 numeric characters not to exceed 8 characters. After specifing the library
name, the display advances to DIFF STARTUP with SETUP highlighted. Press
the Enter button. The display advances to DIFF WEIGHING SETUP with TARE
SETUP highlighted.
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
Tare setup
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
OFF Press the Enter button, the display indicates a choice of NO TARE, SINGLE
DIFF RESULT WEIGH
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 1 TARE, DUAL TARE and RETURN. Select type of tare and press Enter button.
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA Then scroll to RETURN and press Enter button.
RUN
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
Auto sample
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
OFF Press the Enter button, the display indicates a choice of ON or OFF, then
DIFF RESULT WEIGH
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 1 press Enter button. AUTO SAMPLE permits one sieve after another to be
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA weighed without pressing the Enter button. Display returns to DIFF RESULT
RUN
highlighted.
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
Diff result
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
OFF Press the Enter button, the display indicates a choice of WEIGHT, PERCENT,
DIFF RESULT % RETENSION
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 1 % RETENSION and RETURN. Select % RETENSION, then press Enter button.
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA Display indicates to ENTER TOTAL SAMPLE WEIGHT.
RUN
83
Enter total sample weight

ENTER TOTAL SAMPLE WEIGHT
Enter the total sample weight. This is the weight of the actual sample. Press
200.025 Enter button. Display advances to RETURN.
DIFF RESULT With RETURN highlighted, press the Enter button.

Enter
WEIGHT
PERCENT
% RETENSION <-SELECTED
RETURN
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
Enter number of samples
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
OFF Enter the number of samples, press the Enter button.,
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 1
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
Specify the number of samples

NUMBER OF SAMPLES Specify the number of samples and press Enter button. Display advances to
3 DIFF WEIGHING SETUP with RUN highlighted.
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SIEVE 2
Initial weighing of sieves
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
OFF
ON Press the Enter button, the display indicates to PUT EMPTY SIEVE #1 ON
DIFF RESULT % RETENTION
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 3 PAN.
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
DIFF WEIGHING Place empty sieve #1 on the pan and press Enter button. When AUTO
Enter
TARE WT: TARE WT:3.426 SAMPLE is set ON, display advances to the next sieve. Continue adding
IN IT WT: FINAL WT:
sieves until all sieves have been weighed pressing the Enter button after
3.426
PUT EMPTY SIEVE # 1 ON PAN STABLE each sieve. When the last sieve has been weighed, the display indicates the
tare weight of all sieves. Press the Enter button.
TAREWT INIT WT TARE WT FINAL \VT This sample display indicates 3 sieves were weighed. With CONTINUE
N/A NA 3.426 0.000
N/A N/A 3.969 0.000 highlighted at the bottom of the display, press Enter button. The display
N/A N/A 3.962 0.000
advances and indicates PUT FULL SIEVE #1 ON PAN.
SAMPLE #1
84
DIFF WEIGHING Final weighing of sieves

TARE WT:
INIT WT:
TARE WT:
FINAL WT:3.841
After pressing Enter button, the display returns to final weighing. Place first
3.841 full sieve on the pan and press Enter button. Repeat weighing with remain-
PUT FULL SIEVE #1 ON PAN STABLE
ing sieves pressing the Enter button after each sieve. When the last sieve
has been weighed, the display indicates the final weight of all samples.
TAREWT INIT WT TARE WT FINAL \VT With CONTINUE highlighted, press Enter button to review final display.
Enter N/A NA 3.426 3.839
N/A N/A 3.969 4.388
N/A N/A 3.962 4.377
SAMPLE #1
SAMPLE # INIT WT FINAL WT % RETENSION

Final display indicates the initial weight, final weight of all sieves and the
1 200.025 0.413 0.206
2 200.025 0.419 0.209 total weight and total amount of retention in percent.
3 200.025 0.415 0.207
TOTAL 1.247 0.623
The above illustration represents 3 sieves which weighed between 3.4 and
3.9 grams each. TARE SETUP was set OFF, AUTO SAMPLE was set OFF and
% RETENTION was selected. The sample weight retained in each different
sieve weighed between 3.839 and 4.377 grams. The total amount of
retention is shown in percent on the last display which was 0.623 for three
sieves. Initial sample was 200.25 grams.
85
A-2 Porous material density determinations

The density of a porous (oil impregnated part) can be made with the balance. Weigh the part (dry) prior to oil
impregnation and record its weight. You must also know the density value of the oil to be used in immersing the
part before starting. In this procedure, you will follow the method for solid density measurements using water.
Enter
CHANGE MODE

DENSITY SETUP Select SOLID DENSITY, display advances to AUX LIQ & MODE with H2O
SOLID DENSITY <-SELECTED highlighted.
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
RUN
Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
Select H2O, display advances to AUX LIQ & MODE with ENTER TEMPERA-
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
O.000
0.0000
TURE CELSIUS highlighted.
RETURN TO SETUP

Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Specify porous material
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF Select Porous Material and press Enter button. Display advances to POROUS
DRY WEIGHT O.000
DENSITY OF OIL 0.0000 MATERIAL ON/OFF. Select ON and press Enter button.
RETURN TO SETUP
H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Enter dry weight
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL ON
Enter the dry weight of the part as previously measured. Press Enter button.
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
200.040
0.0000
Display advances to DENSITY OF OIL highlighted.
RETURN TO SETUP
86
H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Enter oil density
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL ON
Enter the density of the oil being used to impregnate the part. Press Enter
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
200.040
0.4000 button. Display advances to RETURN TO SETUP highlighted. Press Enter
RETURN TO SETUP
button. Display returns to DENSITY SETUP with AUTO SAMPLE highlighted.
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
<-SELECTED
Select AUTO SAMPLE and turn it ON or OFF. A setting of ON allows samples
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF to be sequentially sampled without pressing the Enter button for each
RUN
sample.
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto print
SOLID DENSITY <-SELECTED At this point you can select automatic printing. To turn on, press the Enter
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
button and select ON. If you do not want automatic printing, select OFF.
RUN
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Testing the sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
<-SELECTED
Select RUN and press Enter button. Display advances to final DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF display and requests to weigh the sample in air.
RUN
DENSITY - - D7 Now follow balance prompts to weigh sample in air and water. After weigh-
TEMP: 25.0
AUX: D:0.9971 ing in air, weigh the sample in water. The balance will calculate Dry Density
DRY WEIGHT: 200.040 VOLUME: 3.59
and Oil Content by Volume (P1).
WEIGH IN AIR
57.779
P1: 535.58%
GRAMS/CC STABLE
To determine wet density
Wet density of the sample can be calculated by following the normal Solid
Density procedure using the oil impregnated part. When in AUX LIQ MODE
menu, turn OFF POROUS MATERIAL, then follow previous solid density
measuring procedure.
87
LIMITED WARRANTY
Ohaus products are warranted against defects in materials and workmanship from the date of delivery
through the duration of the warranty period. During the warranty period Ohaus will repair, or, at its option,
replace any component(s) that proves to be defective at no charge, provided that the product is returned,
freight prepaid, to Ohaus.
This warranty does not apply if the product has been damaged by accident or misuse, exposed to radioac-
tive or corrosive materials, has foreign material penetrating to the inside of the product, or as a result of
service or modification by other than Ohaus. In lieu of a properly returned warranty registration card, the
warranty period shall begin on the date of shipment to the authorized dealer. No other express or implied
warranty is given by Ohaus Corporation. Ohaus Corporation shall not be liable for any consequential dam-
ages.
As warranty legislation differs from state to state and country to country, please contact Ohaus or your local
Ohaus dealer for further details.
88
Ohaus Corporation
29 Hanover Road,
Florham Park, NJ 07932, USA
Tel: (973) 377-9000,
Fax: (973) 593-0359
With offices worldwide.
P/N 400040-023 © Ohaus Corporation 1999, all rights reserved.

89
balances

>O/T
<

!
"#

$

OHAU >O/T

S
<
®

>O/T

<

!"

#

>O/T
<
Ohaus Corporation, 19A Chapin Road, P.O. Box 2033, Pine Brook, NJ, 07058-2033, USA
Declaration of Conformity We, Ohaus Corporation, declare under our sole responsibility that the balance models listed below
marked with CE - are in conformity with the directives and standards mentioned.
Balance model (s) Voyager
Marked with: EC Directive (Including applicable amendments) Standard
73/23/EC IEC 1010 -1:1990 + A1: 92 + A2: 95

Electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits Safety requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control Laboratory Use, Part 1: General Requirements
Year of attach- 89/336/EC EN61326: -1:1997 (class B) + A1: 1998

ment of the Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Emissions, residential, commercial and light industry.
CE mark: 96
EN61326: -1:1997 A1:1998 (industrial requirements)
EMC Immunity.
EN61000-3-2:1995 + A1:1998 + A2: 1998; EN61000-3-3:1995

EMC Part 3 (for equipment rated input current < or=16A)
Limits- Section 2: Limits for harmonic current emissions
Limits- section 3: Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low
voltage supply systems
97
T2914
Additional Standards
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1-92; UL Std. No. 3101-1
Safety requirements for Electrical Equip. for measurement, Control and Laboratory Use, Part 1; General Requirements
FCC FCC, Part 15, class A Emission
AS/NZS4251.1 AS/NZS4252.1 Emission and Immunity
ISO 9001 Registration for Ohaus Corporation. Ohaus Corporation, USA, was examined and evaluated in 1994 by the Bureau Veritas Quality
International, BVQI, and was awarded ISO 9001 registration. This certifies that Ohaus Corporation, USA, has a quality system that conforms with the
international standards for quality management and quality assurance (ISO 9000 series). Repeat audits are carried out by BVQI at intervals to check that the
quality system is operated in the proper manner.
Ted Xia
President
Ohaus Corporation, Pine Brook, NJ USAn
Notice
Certified scales,scales used for legal applications have the general type designation E...5 / V...5 and EU type Ap-
proval (T2914). The year of the initial verification is shown next to the CE mark. Such scales are verified in the factory
and carry the "M" mark on the actual scale and the packaging. The year of the initial verification is shown next to the
CE mark. If the letter M is shown against a solid background, the scale may be put into operation immediately.
Should the background be partitioned and hatched, the scale must be verified at its place of use by the certified
Ohaus service. If national regulations limit the duration of the validity of the verification certificate in individual
countries, the end user of such a scale is personally responsible for arranging the repeat verification in good time.
Hinweise
Geeichte/eichpflichtige Waagen tragen die allgemeine Typenbezeichnung E... 5 / V...5. Für sie liegt eine EU
Bauartzulassung vor (T2914). Das Jahr der ersten Eichung ist neben dem CE Zeichen aufgeführt. Solche Waagen
sind ab Werk geeicht und tragen die Kennzeichnung "M" auf dem Gerät selbst und auf der Verpackung. Erscheint der
Buchstabe M auf vollem Grund, darf die Waage sofort in Betrieb genommen werden. Ist der Grund geteilt und
schraffiert, muss die Waage am Verwendungsort durch den zertifizierten Ohaus Service ortsgeeicht werden. Sofern
gemäss den nationalen Vorschriften in den einzelnen Staaten die Gültigkeitsdauer der Eichung beschränkt ist, ist der
Betreiber einer solchen Waage für die rechtzeitige Nacheichung selbst verantwortlich.
Remarques
Les balances vérifiées/admissibles à la vérification portent la désignation de modèle générale E...5 / V ... 5. Elles
font lobjet dune approbation de modèle UE (T2914). Lannée de la vérification primitive est indiquée à côté de la
marque CE. Ces balances sont vérifidées dorigine et portent la marque "M" sur Iappareil lui-même et sur
lemballage, Si la lettre M apparaît sur un fond totalement vert, la balance peut être mise en service immédiatement.
Si le fond est divisé et hachuré, la balance doit être vérifiée sur le lieu dustilisation par le service après-vente Ohaus
certifié. Dans les pays où la durée de validité de la vérification est limitée par des prescriptions nationales, lutilisateur
est lui-même responsable de la vérification ultérieure dune telle balance en temps voulu.
Notas
Las balanzas verificadas/verificables llevan la designatión general E...5 / V ...5 y cuentan con una aprobación de
modelo UE (T2914). EL año de la primera verficación está indicado al lado del distintivo CE. Estas balanzas están
verificadas en fábrica y Ilevan la designatión "M" sobre el propio aparato y sobre el embalaje. Cuando la letra M
aparece sobre fondo sólido, la balanza se puede poner inmediatamente en funcionamiento. Si el fondo está dividido
y rayado, la balanza ha de ser verificada en el lugar de uso por el sevicio técnico Ohaus certificado. Si la duración
de la validez de la verificación está limitada de acuerdo con las normas de los distintos países, el propio usuario de
tal balanza es responsable de la verificación posterior a su debido tiempo.
Avvertenza
Le bilance approvate hanno la denominazione del modello E... 5 / V ...5. Per esse esiste unappprovazione CE del
tipo (T2914). Lanno delia prima verifica è indicato a fianco della marcatura CE. I tipi marcati con un contrassegno
"M" su sfondo verde pieno possono essere impiegati da subito. I tipi marcati con ii contrassegno "M" su sfondo nero/
barrato diagonalmente dovranno essere verificati sul luogo dinstallazione da parte dun tecnico autorizzato dal
Servizio Assistenza Ohaus o ispettore dellUfficio Metrico. Queste bilance sono state verificate in fabbrica
e recano il contrassegno "M" sullapparecchio stesso, e sullimballo. É obbligo delluntente denunciare la detenzione
dello strumento allufficio metrico competente per territorio e sottoporio alia prescritta verifica periodica come da
disposizioni ministeriali.
FCC NOTE: THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE, PURSUANT
TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES.
THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST HARMFUL INTERFERENCE WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS
OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT. THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES, USES, AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY
AND, IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL, MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE TO
RADIO COMMUNICATIONS. OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE IN
WHICH CASE THE USER WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE.
THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS A LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARATUS AS SET OUT
IN THE INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD ENTITLED DIGITAL APPARATUS, ICES-003 OF THE DEPARTMENT OF COM-
MUNICATIONS CANADA.
CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE RESPECTE LES LIMITES DE BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE
CLASSE A PRESCRITES DANS LA NORME SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR: APPAREILS NUMERIQUES, NMB-003 EDICTEE PAR LE
MINISTRE DES
EC - DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Voyager
V10640 V00640 V10645
V11140 V01140 V11145
V12140 V02140 V12145
V1RR80 V0RR80 V1RR85
V12130 V02130 V12132 V02132 V12135
V14130 V04130 V14132 V04132 V14135
V1RV70 V0RV70 V1RV72 V0RV72 V1RV75
V16120 V06120 V16122 V06122 V16125
V1B120 V0B120 V1B122 V0B122 V1B125
V1D120 V0D120 V1D122 V0D122 V1D125
V1RW60 V0RW60 V1RW62 V0RW62 V1RW65
V1D110 V0D110 V1D112 V0D112 V1D115
V1F110 V0F110 V1F112 V0F112 V1F115
V1H110 V0H110 V1H112 V0H112 V1H115
V16130 V06130 V16135
V1F120 V0F120 V1F122 V0F122 V1F125
Ted Xia
President
Ohaus Corporation, Pine Brook, NJ USAn
New Jersey, 07058,

USA
03, April. 02
Contents
5
Contents
OVERVIEW OF CONTROLS .................................................................................................................. 8
1. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VOYAGER BALANCE .................................................................................... 9
1.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 9
1.2 Overview of the Voyager balance ......................................................................................................... 9
1.3 What you should know about these instructions ................................................................................. 10
1.4 Safety is first ................................................................................................................................... 10
2. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................ 11
2.1 Unpacking and checking the standard equipment ............................................................................... 11
2.2 Selecting the location ....................................................................................................................... 12
2.3 Leveling the balance ........................................................................................................................ 12
2.4 Installing pan .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.5 Wind shield .................................................................................................................................... 13
2.6 Power supply .................................................................................................................................. 13
2.7 Switching the balance on or off ......................................................................................................... 14
2.8 Weigh below preparation ................................................................................................................. 14
3. THE MENU ..................................................................................................................................... 15

3.1 What is the menu? .......................................................................................................................... 15
3.2 Menu operation ............................................................................................................................... 16
3.3 Library ........................................................................................................................................... 17
4. CALIBRATION ................................................................................................................................. 18
4.1 Span calibration .............................................................................................................................. 20
4.2 Linearity calibration ......................................................................................................................... 21
4.3 User calibration ............................................................................................................................... 22
4.4 Calibration test ................................................................................................................................ 23
4.5 Auto calibration ............................................................................................................................... 24
4.6 AutoCalTM delta correction ................................................................................................................. 25
Contents
6
5. WEIGHING MADE SIMPLE ............................................................................................................... 26

5.1 Selecting a weighing unit.................................................................................................................. 26
5.2 Taring the balance ........................................................................................................................... 27
5.3 Performing a simple weighing .......................................................................................................... 27
5.4 Custom unit .................................................................................................................................... 28
6. BALANCE MODES ........................................................................................................................... 31

6.1 Parts counting ................................................................................................................................ 31
6.1.1 Easy count .......................................................................................................................... 31
6.1.2 Advanced counting ............................................................................................................... 32
6.2 Filling ............................................................................................................................................. 33
6.3 Animal weighing ............................................................................................................................. 34
6.4 Check weighing .............................................................................................................................. 35
6.5 Differential weighing ........................................................................................................................ 36
6.6 Formulation .................................................................................................................................... 41
6.7 Quick check weighing ...................................................................................................................... 43
6.8 Statistics/function link ...................................................................................................................... 44
6.9 Density........................................................................................................................................... 45
6.9.1 Balance preparation with density kit ....................................................................................... 45
6.9.2 Solid density determination for items more dense than water ..................................................... 46
6.9.3 Solid density determination for items less dense than water ...................................................... 48
6.9.4 Improving the accuracy of the result of solid density ................................................................. 49
6.9.5 Liquid density determination .................................................................................................. 50
6.10 Statistical quality control (SQC) ......................................................................................................... 51
6.10.1 Resuming a particular SQC setup ........................................................................................... 54
6.10.2 Specifing a new SQC setup .................................................................................................... 55
6.10.3 Redoing or correcting a batch ................................................................................................ 56
6.11 Pipette calibration ............................................................................................................................ 57
7. BALANCE SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................ 62

7.1 Reset to factory settings ................................................................................................................... 62
7.2 Setting contrast and brightness of the display ..................................................................................... 62
7.3 Setting the readout ........................................................................................................................... 63
7.4 Setting the interface.......................................................................................................................... 64
7.5 Setting print option........................................................................................................................... 65
Contents
7
7.6 Setting GLP print options .................................................................................................................. 66

7.7 Setting time and date ....................................................................................................................... 67
7.8 Setting auto calibration..................................................................................................................... 68
7.9 Print current settings ........................................................................................................................ 68
7.10 Lock out ......................................................................................................................................... 69
7.11 Software version .............................................................................................................................. 70
7.12 Setting custom menu ....................................................................................................................... 70
7.13 Legal for trade ................................................................................................................................. 71
7.14 Menu lock-out protection .................................................................................................................. 72
8. RS232 INTERFACE/PRINTING DATA .................................................................................................. 73

8.1 RS232 interface .............................................................................................................................. 73
8.2 Printing data ................................................................................................................................... 76
9. CARE AND MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... 79

9.1 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 79
9.2 Error codes list ................................................................................................................................ 80
9.3 Information messages ..................................................................................................................... 81
9.4 Service information .......................................................................................................................... 81
9.5 Replacement parts ........................................................................................................................... 81
9.6 Accessories .................................................................................................................................... 81
9.7 Specifications.................................................................................................................................. 82
A APPENDIX SPECIAL APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................ 83

A-1 Sieve analysis ................................................................................................................................. 83
A-2 Porous material density determinations.............................................................................................. 86
Overview
8
1
6

8
2
9
Go Back
3
Help
Print Enter

7

4

10

5

11

>O/T
<

!
"#

$

OHAU >O/T
S®
<
12
5
characters.
characters.

9

This section provides you with detailed information on your Voyager balance. Please read through the section
carefully even if you have experience with OHAUS balances and be sure to familiarize yourself with the safety notes.
1.1 Introduction
Thank you for deciding to purchase a Voyager Balance from Ohaus. Behind your instrument stands OHAUS, a
leading manufacturer of precision Balances, Scales and Indicators. An Aftermarket Department with trained instrument
technicians is dedicated to provide you with the fastest service possible in the event your instrument requires
servicing. OHAUS also has a Customer Service Department to answer any inquiries regarding applications and
accessories.
To ensure you make full use of the possibilities offered by your Voyager balance, please read the manual completely
before installation and operation.

measurements.

Built-in functions for filling, percent weighing, piece counting, animal weighing, check weighing, density,
pipette calibration, statistics, and SQC.
A variety of accessories includes in-use display cover kit, table mount, remote displays, interface communi-
cation cables and security device.
with all common standards and directives. It supports standard procedures, work techniques and records as required
by GLP (Good Laboratory Practices) and SOP (Standard Operating Procedure). Recording of the sequences of
operations and calibration work is highly important in this connection: we recommend use of OHAUS AS-142 Printer.
Your Voyager balance has a CE declaration of conformity and OHAUS is registered to ISO 9001 - Management
System.
10

These instructions contain orientation aids which represent certain functions, notices and controls. These graphic aids
are not meant to be step by step operational procedures but simply a guide.
This symbol indicates additional information and instructions which

facilitate your handling of the balance and contribute to proper and
economical use.
These symbols indicate safety and hazard instructions which must be

complied with. Nonconformance with such instructions can lead to personal
malfunctions.
1.4 Safety is first

Voyager balances may be used only indoors and only when attached to receptacle outlets
with a ground connection.
Installation
11
2. Installation

Analytical Capacity
Equipment 62g, 110g, 210, 410, 610g 610g - 6100g 6100g - 8100g
210g, 210/100g 410/100g 4100/1000g
Pan 3.5
Pan 4.75
Pan 6 (0.01g units
and 0.1g units w/AutoCal)
Pan 8 (0.1g units w/o AutoCal)
Draft Shield
AC Power Adapter
Instruction Manual
Warranty Card
Check the instrument for transport damage. Immediately inform your Ohaus dealer if you have complaints or
parts are missing.
instrument.
Installation
12

The balance should always be used in an environment which is free from excessive air currents, corrosives,
vibration, and temperature or humidity extremes. These factors will affect displayed weight readings.


>O/T

<

!"

#

>O/T
<

magnetic fields.
>O/T<


!"

#

>O/T<


>O/T

<

!"

#


>O/T
<

Indicator

>O/T<

!
"#
$

OHAU
S >O/T<
Leveling
®
Foot
2.4 Installing pan

Balances are shipped with the pan not installed. On balances equipped with
a draft shield, slide open the side door and insert the pan into the center
hole which is the measuring transducer.
Pan
Go
Bac
k
Help
Prin
0%
t BA
SIC
WE
IGH
ING
>O/T<
PR 0.0
ES
S
<E
NT
ER GRAM
>
FO S
00
R ME
100%
NU ST
AB
LE
Ente
r
OHAU
S®
>O/T<
Installation
13
2.5 Wind shield


NOTE: 4100g, 6100g and 8100g balances with 0.1g resolution and

>O/T
<

internal calibration are equipped with a 6 Pan and Wind Shield.

!"

#

>O/T
<
2.6 Power supply

Check to ensure the voltage printed on the AC adapter matches your
local line voltage. If this is not the case, on no account connect the AC
adapter to the power supply, but contact your responsible OHAUS dealer.
Connect the AC Adapter supplied to the three pin connector located at the rear
of the balance.

Rear of Balance

very cold environment before installation, it may require several hours for
the balance to stabilize.
Installation
14

Your balance is on at all times when connected to a power source, the display is on initially and can be turned
off.
As your balance needs no warm-up time when in the standby mode and
is immediately ready for weighing, we advise you to switch the display off
by use of the button and not to disconnect it from the power supply.
This also ensures that the balance is always in thermal equilibrium.

The Voyager balance is equipped with a weigh below hook at the bottom of the balance. To use this feature, remove
power from the balance and remove the protective cover underneath the balance. See illustration for location. The
balance can be supported using lab jacks or any other convenient method. Make sure the balance is level and
secure. Apply power and operate the balance. Attach items to be weighed to the hook underneath the balance.

The menu
15
3. The menu
Check weighing Carats Autocal
Set time/date
Ounces
Troy ounces
Grains
Quick check Reset
Hong Kong taels
Statistics Lockout
Singapore taels
ROC taels
Pipette Pounds
Newtons
Ticals
Custom units
Exit to weigh
3. Set balance:
NOTE: Availability of shaded weighing units subject to local regulations.

The menu
16
3.2 Menu operation

BASIC WEIGHING
How to change from the weighing mode to the main menu
The balance is operating in the basic weighing mode.
0.000
GRAMS STABLE
CHANGE MODE
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST

Enter MAIN MENU

CHANGE MODE
CHANGE UNITS
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST

Press the and arrow buttons to scroll through numbers or
alphabet.

display.

The menu
17
SAVING

3.3 Library
accessed the library and do not want to run or delete a name, an exit to weighing selection can be made by pressing
the Go Back button which does not affect the library
CHANGE MODE
CHANGE UNITS
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST corresponding functions and the percentage of the library which has
been used.
LIBRARY 15.21% USED The sample shown indicates six library entries. Entries are stored in alpha-
P1 PIP 1.26%
P2 PIP 1.26% betical order.
SQ1 SQC 3.17%
SQ2 SQC 3.17%
SQ3 SQC 3.17%
SQ5 SQC 3.17%

RUN
DELETE ALL
Calibration
18
4. Calibration
SPAN
USER
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

User- User calibration is a method where the balance can be

Test- Calibration test allows the stored calibration data to be



Calibration
19

Calibration Test.
To lock out calibration menu, after calibration, refer to paragraph 7.14

titled Menu Lock-Out Protection.
balances.
Calibration Masses
be performed as necessary to ensure accurate weighing. Masses required to
perform the procedures are listed in the following table.
CALIBRATION MASSES
LINEARITY SPAN ONLY
62g 20g/50g 50g
110g 50g/100g 100g
210g 100g/200g 200g
410g 200g/400g 400g
610g 200g/500g 500g
2100g 1000g/2000g 2000g
4100g 2000g/4000g 4000g
6100g 2000g/5000g 5000g
8100g 4000g/8000g 8000g

Calibration
20

Enter
SPAN
LINEARITY
USER
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

AND PRESS <ENTER>.

300 200 100
Enter SPAN CALIBRATION Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the
PLEASE WAIT. . . last calibration.
400.000
GRAMS STABLE
Calibration
21


SPAN
USER
CALIBRATION TEST CALIBRATE with SPAN highlighted. Scroll to LINEARITY.
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

AND PRESS <ENTER>.


Enter LINEARITY CALIBRATION Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the
400.000
GRAMS STABLE
Calibration
22

User calibration is used when it is desired to calibrate the balance using a mass of known value. To use this
calibration feature, proceed as follows:

SPAN
USER
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

100-400 GRAMS

200.000 200.000

AND PRESS <ENTER>.

Enter USER CALIBRATION Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the
200.000
GRAMS STABLE
Calibration
23

Calibration test feature allows a check of a known calibration mass against the last stored calibration informa-
tion in the balance.

SPAN
USER
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

AND PRESS <ENTER>.

Enter CALIBRATION TEST Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the
200.000
GRAMS STABLE
Calibration
24


SPAN
USER
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

AND PRESS <ENTER>.
PLEASE WAIT. . . the last calibration. It is not necessary to press the Enter button, the balance
AND THE LAST CAL IS: 0.000 GRAMS returns to a weighing mode automatically.

0% 100%
0.000
GRAMS STABLE
Calibration
25

Balances with AutoCalTM contain software which allows the internal calibration mass to be adjusted + 100
divisions at full scale capacity. This permits calibrating the balance using an external ASTM Class 1 mass which is
->O/T<- 0% 100% calibration value of the balance. Note the reading. If the reading is higher or

SPAN
USER
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
CALIBRATE Enter the number of digits shown between the span calibration value of
AUTOCAL DELTA CORRECTION the balance and the actual reading. For example, on a 400g balance, the
2 2 reading is 400.002g. The difference is 0.002g. This indicates a correction of
2 divisions is required.

AND PRESS <ENTER>.
AND THE LAST CAL IS: 0.000 GRAMS returns to a weighing mode automatically. If a difference still exists, repeat
the procedure. The difference should be 0.000 grams.

0% 100%
0.000
GRAMS STABLE
26

In this section, you will learn how to select a weighing unit, tare the balance, perform simple weighings and
enter a custom unit.

0.000
GRAMS STABLE
Enter MAIN MENU

CHANGE MODE
From main menu
CHANGE UNITS
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
grams
penny weight
carats
ounces
troy ounces
grains
Hong Kong taels
Singapore taels
ROC taels
mommes
pounds
newtons
ticals

27

of your balance.
->O/T<-
GRAMS STABLE


After taring the balance, place sample on the pan. Wait until display
indicates STABLE. Now read the weight in the display.

>O/T

<

!

"
#$

%

>O/T
<
28
5.4 Custom unit

balance will use to convert grams to the desired unit of measure. Custom Units are stored in the Library. Values for up
to fifteen different custom units can be entered.

Number
123.4 = .1234 x 1000 = .1234 x 103 E-1 Moves decimal point 1 place to the left.
12.34 = .1234 x 100 = .1234 x 102
1.234 = .1234 x 10 = .1234 x 101
.1234 = .1234 x 1 = .1234 x 100
.01234 = .1234 x .1 = .1234 x 10-1
.000123 = .123 x .001 = .123 x 10-3

GO TO LIBRARY
EXIT TO WEIGH
When using the balance for the first time, the library is empty and does
not contain any custom units. Later, after you have performed the setup
procedures, you will be able to select a custom unit by a name you have
assigned. Proceed to SETUP.
CUSTOM UNITS
GO TO LIBRARY
SETUP
EXIT TO WEIGH
29
Unit name
UNIT NAME
UNIT1
<UP> / <DOWN> TO SCROLL CHARACTERS
PRESS <ENTER> TO ACCEPT CUSTOM UNIT SETUP with ENTER FACTOR highlighted.
CUSTOM UNIT SETUP

Factor
UNIT NAME UNIT1 Enter the factor number. This can be a number between 0.1 and 1.999999.
ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT DP E-2 For conversion factors outside of this range, the exponent will be used to
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN move the decimal point.
CUSTOM UNIT SETUP Decimal point

UNIT NAME UNIT1 Scroll to SELECT DP, press Enter button. SELECT DP LOCATION is displayed.
ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT DP E-2
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN
Select a decimal point. Scroll to either E-3, E-2, E-1, E0, E1, E2, or E3, and
SELECT DP LOCATION
E-3
press Enter button. Display returns to CUSTOM UNIT SETUP with UNIT NAME
E-2
E-1 highlighted.
E0
E1

ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN
LSDs
5s.
RETURN TO SETUP
30
SELECT LSD
LSD 0.5
5 or LSD 10 and press Enter button. Display returns to CUSTOM UNIT SETUP
LSD
LSD
1
2
with UNIT NAME highlighted.
LSD 5
LSD 10

CUSTOM UNIT SETUP
UNIT NAME UNIT1
ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT DP E-2
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN
Enter At this point, you can select the custom unit you just entered from the
CUSTOM UNITS library or exit to weigh. When LIBRARY is selected, scroll to the custom unit
GO TO LIBRARY
SETUP
you entered, press Enter button and select RUN from the menu. The
EXIT TO WEIGH
abbreviation for custom units in the display is CU.
Balance modes
31
6. Balance modes
modes.
6.1 Parts counting

6.1.1 Easy count

actual number of samples placed on the pan. Accuracy is based on the average piece weight (APW) of a single part.
All parts must be reasonably uniform in weight.
Enter
EASY PARTS COUNTING
COUNTING.
SAMPLE SIZE
APW 0.3898 WEIGHT: 3.900G display indicates the number of pieces based on the sample size. Repeated
10
PIECES STABLE
Balance modes
32

Enter

APW/SIZE APW/Size
SAMPLE SIZE

samples.


OFF
FILLING Four options are available, OFF, FILLING, CHECK WEIGHING and STATISTICS.
CHECK WEIGHING When FILLING is selected, a target weight is entered which is shown as
STATISTICS 100% on the bar graph on the display. When material is added to the
Enter APW/SIZE
over pieces, under pieces, run and exit. This type of function permits check-
TARE WT ing of individual pieces against the stored information in the balance. When
AUTO OPTIMIZATION STATISTICS is selected, provides display of Standard Deviation, either popu-
FUNCTION LINK
RUN
lation or sample, Mean, Sum, High, Low and Difference readings. Each can
be individually set ON or OFF. RUN when selected starts the program.
Balance modes
33
6.2 Filling
Enter
CHANGE MODE
Enter CHANGE MODE.

FILLING
TARGET
0% 90%
90% 110%
TARGET:
0.000
DIFF:
GRAMS STABLE
Balance modes
34
6.3 Animal weighing

Enter
CHANGE MODE
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
RUN
5
Enter
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
placed on the pan.
AVERAGING LEVEL 5
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
filter setting.
Enter
Balance modes
35
6.4 Check weighing

weight. Library recall eliminates the need to enter the weighing parameters again. A bar graph at the top of the Check
Enter
CHECK WEIGHING
LIBRARY NAME.
LIBRARY NAME

LIBRARY NAME
NOMINAL
OVER
UNDER
RUN
NOMINAL WT
200.000

LIBRARY NAME
NOMINAL
OVER
UNDER
RUN
Enter
OVER: 202.000
UNDER: 199.000
NOMINAL: 200.00
DIFF: 0.026
200.026
Balance modes
36

Enter
DIFF WEIGHING
NAME.

advances to DIFF STARTUP. If a previous name was entered and selected, the
balance displays the parameters which were set.
SETUP SETUP. RESUME will bring you directly to RUN which starts the program. Do
RESUME

Enter LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLEOFF
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
TARE SETUP TARE SETUP offers a choice of NO TARE (no container is used), SINGLE TARE
NO TARE
SINGLE TARE
(one container used during entire process), and DUAL TARE (two containers
DUAL TARE used, one at the start of a process and a different container at the end of a
RETURN
process). DUAL TARE is also used for sieve analysis. Select the appropriate
tare option for your process.
NO TARE
SINGLE TARE
DUAL TARE
RETURN
Balance modes
37

LIBRARY NAME
Automatic sampling
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF Enter AUTO SAMPLE. Auto Sampling permits repetitive sampling
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES automatically. Select ON or OFF. Display advances to DIFF RESULT.
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME
Difference result
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
VIEW RESULTS
RUN
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP Select RETURN and press Enter. Display advances to DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
Enter LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP with NUMBER OF SAMPLES highlighted. Enter the NUMBER OF SAMPLES
AUTO SAMPLEOFF
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
display.
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN

NUMBER OF SAMPLES
can be run per library entry. After specifying number of samples, press Enter
button, display returns to DIFF WEIGHING SETUP with RUN highlighted.


LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
After pressing the Enter button, the display indicates PUT INITIAL SAMPLE #
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
IN IT WT: FINAL WT:
0.000
all samples.
Balance modes
38
N/A 7.705 NA 0.000
N/A 7.701 N/A 0.000
continuing with the procedure. SAVE permits saving the data and returns the
balance to a weighing mode. RESAMPLE allows going back to resample a
selected entry. DELETE permits deleting a selected entry.
To return to your final weighing, find and select the Library name of your test.
final weighing.

TARE WT:
IN IT WT:
TARE WT:
FINAL WT:
7.299 processed sample on the pan. When the weight has stabilized, press Enter
samples.
Enter N/A 7.705 NA 7.299
N/A 7.702 N/A 7.299
N/A 7.701 N/A 7.299

N/A 7.705 7.220 -0.407
N/A 7.702 7.299 -0.403
N/A 7.701 7.299 -0.402
TOTAL 23.109 21.896 -1.212

LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
VIEW RESULTS
RUN
IN IT WT: FINAL WT:
0.000 next container. Continue adding containers and pressing the Enter button for
PUT INITIAL SAMPLE #1 ON PAN STABLE each container until all containers have been weighed. When the last con-
tainer has been weighed, the display indicates the initial weight of all con-
tainers.
Balance modes
39
8.739 0.000 N/A 0.000
8.738 0.000 N/A 0.000
Enter
20.006 each sample on the pan.

8.739 20.006 N/A 0.000
8.738 20.096 N/A 0.000
SAMPLE #1

TARE WT:
IN IT WT:
TARE WT:
Enter 8.739 20.006 N/A 16.143
8.744 20.096 N/A 16.598
8.738 20.096 N/A 16.685
SAMPLE #1

1 11.267 7.404 -3.863
2 11.352 7.854 -3.498
3 11.358 6.947 -4.411
TOTAL 33.977 22.205 -11.772

Balance modes
40

LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
TARE WT: 8.738
IN IT WT:
TARE Wf:
FINALWT:8.738
PUT INITIAL CONTAINER #1 ON PAN STABLE each container until all containers have been weighed. When the last
containers.
8.738 0.000 N/A 0.000
8.738 0.000 N/A 0.000
Enter
23.076 place each sample on the pan.

8.738
8.738
23.989
23.994
N/A
N/A
0.000
0.000 the tare weight of the containers and the initial weight of the samples.
8.738 24.064 N/A 0.000
SAMPLE #1

TARE WT:
IN IT WT:
TARE WT:
FINAL WT:8.738
8.738 container #1 on the pan. Repeat process for all containers.
Enter 8.738 23.989 8.738 19.647
8.738 24.064 8.738 20.102

1 15.251 10.909 .342
2 15.256 1.839 -3.417
3 15.326 11.364 -3.962
TOTAL 45.833 34.112 -11.721

Balance modes
41
6.6 Formulation
named, they may be recalled and used at any time. Each component of a given formulation can be specified as to its
weight or percentage. Each element of a formulation is shown on a dual bar graph as a percentage and displays the
desired weight. Thus, each component may be placed on the pan until 100% is indicated.

FORMULATION
NAME.

FORMULATION SETUP
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN
Enter WEIGHT
PERCENT
RETURN

LIBRARY NAME FORM 2
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN
SETUP highlighted.
Balance modes
42
Enter FORMULATION SETUP Enter SETUP in the FORMULATION SETUP. Display advances to a split screen.
LIBRARY NAME FORM2
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN

1 0.000
2 0.000

1
2
0.000
LIBRARY NAME FORM2
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN
Enter
0% 90%
90% 110%
200.044
A1=200.000 DIFF WT: 0.044 bottom of the display. Press Enter button to add next component. Sample
GRAMS STABLE
indicates 200.044 grams. Leave the first component on the pan. Repeat this
procedure for all additional components.
Enter
90% 110%
A1=200.000
200.021
DIFF WT: 0.021
GRAMS STABLE
Enter Al
TARGET
200.000
RESULT
200.044
DIFF
0.044
Final results
A2 200.000
TOTAL 400.000
200.021
400.065
0.021
0.065
the display.
Balance modes
43

difference in percentage is also shown along with the reference weight. The large numeric display indicates the weight
of the sample.

CHECK.
QUICK CHECK

->O/T<- DIFF: 0.000
DIFF%: 0.020
PUT REF WT ON PAN

DIFF: 0.030
DIFF%: 0.020
REF WT: 14.798
14.768 the first sample on the pan. The display indicates the difference in weight and
GRAMS STABLE

DIFF: 0.030
DIFF%: 0.020
Balance modes
44

samples along with other statistical data. A minimum of three samples is required in this program. Statistics contains
menu options which include standard deviation, mean, sum, maximum, minimum, difference, relative deviation, auto
sample and sample size. Most of these can be set ON or OFF except sample size which can be set for a particular
number. When a printer or computer is connected to the balance, all statistical information can be observed and
printed. FUNCTION LINK offers a choice of three functions; CHECK WEIGHING, FILLING and ANIMAL WEIGHING which
can be linked directly to statistical data. Statistics can be enabled either through the CHANGE MODE menu or the
LIBRARY. The library method will automatically run the link. Changes can be made through the CHANGE MODE menu
setup.
Enter
CHANGE MODE
NAME.

previously set.
STATISTICS SETUP
LIBRARY NAME STATS1
STD DEV
MEAN
ON
ON
SUM ON
MINIMUM ON
DIFFERENCE ON data to either CHECK WEIGHING, FILLING or ANIMAL WEIGHING or not linking
RELATIVE DEV ON
and leave the FUNCTION LINK OFF.
OFF
FILLING
CHECK WEIGHING
ANIMAL WEIGHING
RETURN TO SETUP
STATISTICS SETUP
DIFFERENCE ON
Running the program
RELATIVE DEV
AUTO SAMPLE
ON
OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
SAMPLE SIZE 3 function, the display for that function will indicate STATS ON at the top of the
FUNCTION LINK OFF
RUN display.
STATISTICS RESULT
UNIT: GRAMS
MEAN: 203.571
MAXIMUM: 203.929
MINIMUM: 203.283
RELATIVE DEV: 0.064
SUM: 610.713
DIFFERENCE:0.546

statistics.
Balance modes
45
6.9 Density

Support Bracket
Go
Help
Back
Washer Mode
Print Units
Setup
Equalizing Weigh Bracket ®

Enter
Pan
Enter
Print
Washer Below Hook

Open either the left or right side door of the balance and remove the Pan as shown. Insert the Bracket into the balance
where the Pan was removed.
tion.
Bracket
Support
Support Mounting

Beaker Installation
Balance modes
46
Q= m
V
A
Q= _Q
A -B 0
simplified:
A
Q= _Q0
P

In the event that a different liquid is to be used, provisions are made to enter the density of the desired liquid and enter
its name into a library. The following procedure uses water.
Enter
CHANGE MODE

LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
RUN
Balance modes
47
Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
Select H2O, and perform the next step. If you are using a different liquid, skip
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
O.000
0.0000
the next step and continue.
RETURN TO SETUP

next two steps.
Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
DRY WEIGHT O.000
RETURN TO SETUP

Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Return to setup
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
O.000
0.0000
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
RUN
sample.
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto print
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
RUN
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Testing the sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
RUN
DENSITY - - D2
VOLUME:
WEIGH IN AIR
0.000
Balance modes
48
TEMP:25.0
AUX D= 9.971
values.
VOLUME: 0.40
GRAMS/CC
39.438
STABLE
must be used as it holds the solid body below the surface of the auxiliary liquid. If the buoyancy of the solid is greater
than the weight of the Weigh Below Hook, the Weigh Below Hook must be weighted by placing an additional mass on
the submerged part of the Weigh Below Hook as shown.
Sample

Balance modes
49

Temperature
result.
Air buoyancy
1 CM3 of air weighs approximately 1.2 mg (depending on the physical condition). As a consequence, in the weighing
in air, each solid experiences a buoyancy of this magnitude (the so-called air buoyancy) per cm3 of its volume.
lated result:

measurement.
Balance modes
50


Q=
DENSITY SETUP Select liquid density

LIBRARY NAME D2
SOLID DENSITY <-SELECTED The balance is prepared in the same manner. Follow the same procedure for
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLEOFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
solid density determination except select LIQUID DENSITY under the DENSITY
RUN SETUP display. Press the Enter button. The display advances to ENTER
SINKER VOLUME IN CC.

Enter the sinker volume in CCs. The display starts with 30 cc. Continue with
30.000 the instructions on the displays and select RUN.
0.378
Sinker
Sinker

Balance modes
51

The Statistical Quality Control (SQC) feature is extremely useful during various types of process filling operations when
it is desired to monitor and control the process to eliminate under and over filling. Provisions are made in the balance
to accommodate the weight of various packaging methods. During operation, parameters of the packaged product
are set into the balance such as packaging weight, acceptable weight limits and non-acceptable weight limits of the
product. These weight limits are identified as +Tl, +T2, NOMINAL and -TI, -T2. As samples are weighed and stored in
the balance, a trend analysis is developed and displayed on the balance. Up to 25 samples in a batch with up to ten
batches are visible on a trend screen for quality control purposes. Each batch of samples is shown on the display
which indicates the maximum/minimum standard deviation and mean values for each batch. An on going examina-
tion of the relative deviation of the samples along with other statistical data can be viewed and is stored. By observing
the results of the TREND ANALYSIS screen, you can effectively monitor the filling process operation. Setup parameters
can be stored in the library and up to 5 products with statistical history can be stored in memory. All SQC information
can be printed.
Enter

previously set.
Enter SQC SETUP

LIBRARY NAME SQC1
Tolerance
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES I
BATCH NAME
+T2
DEFINE TOLERANCE
0.000
Defining tolerances
-Ti
-T2
0.000
0.000
NOMINAL WEIGHT, then -TI, finish with -T2. After entering values, press Enter
RETURN TO SETUP button. Display advances to RETURN TO SETUP, press Enter button.
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
Selecting tare
TOLERANCE
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES I
BATCH NAME
Balance modes
52

NO TARE
INDIVIDUAL TARE
RETURN TO SETUP
for each sample with display prompts, ADD with MT is additive weighing with
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
TOLERANCE
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
BATCH NAME
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE Enter NUMBER OF SAMPLES. Specify the number of samples to be measured.
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO SAMPLE OFF After specifying sample size, display advances to SQC SETUP with BATCH
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
BATCH NAME
3 NAME highlighted. Press Enter button.
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
TOLERANCE
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
BATCH NAME
SQC SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
Taking samples
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
3
BATCH NAME
0
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
RUN

0.000
top of the display and instructs: PUT SAMPLE #1 ON PAN.
11.905
Balance modes
53

0%
100%
12.305 pan. When the balance stabilizes, press the Enter button. When AUTO

0%
100%
12.710 all samples have been entered, a History screen is displayed which indi-

UNIT GRAMS
NOMINAL WT: 12.181
MEAN 12.307
MAXIMUM 12.710
MINIMUM 11.906
>+T2 0.00% 0
run additional batches of samples, press the Enter button, the display will
>+T1 0.00% 0
TI>N>-TI 100.00%, 3
<-T20.00% 0
Go Back
AUTO SAMPLE
SQC SETUP
OFF
Analyzing data
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 3
VIEW BATCH HISTORY

05/24/99 08:06:28A 05/24/99 02:34:19
16.076 +T1
8.742 -Tl batches were processed with the last 10 displayed.
7.500 -T2
Sample Value Trace

DEVIATION
MINIMUM LIMIT
Symbol definitions
Balance modes
54
Go Back
AUTO SAMPLE
SQC SETUP
OFF
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
3
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
RUN

TOTAL BATCHES:11
TOTAL SAMPLES: 33
MEAN: 14.314
MAXIMUM: 20.523
>+T2: 9.09%
>+T1: 24.24%
T1>N>-T1: 66%, 22
3
<-T1:0.00%,
<-T2:0.00%,
0
0
LAST SAMPLE: 05/24/99 02:34:19P


Enter SQC

Enter
RESUME
Balance modes
55
Enter
SQC SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
Select run
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
3
BATCH NAME 0
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
RUN


Enter
SQC
LIBRARY NAME.

Enter RESUME
Enter
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC 1
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE Refer back to section 6.10 and enter all information required for a new setup.
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO SAMPLE 0FF
AUTO PRINT OFF
BATCH NAME
Balance modes
56

errors.
Go Back
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME
TOLERANCE
MEAN TARE VALUE
AUTO PRINT
BATCH NAME

LIBRARY NAME The current name you assigned should be displayed. Press the Enter button.
Display advances to SQC STARTUP with RESUME highlighted.
Enter
RESUME
NEW SETUP
Enter SQC SETUP

MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
Select run
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 3
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
RUN

button.
Balance modes
57

on the number of samples per test. The density table for water is included. If other liquids are used for pipette calibra-
tion, you must enter the liquids density in g/cc at current room temperature. Since all calculations are made within
the balance, it is also required that you know the atmospheric pressure which has to be entered. A printout can be
made which specifies all parameters of the test made.

PIPETTE
NAME.

advances to PIPETTE SETUP with TEST LIQUID G/CC highlighted. If a previous
Enter PIPETTE SETUP

LIBRARY NAME P2
Test liquid
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
highlighted.
PIPETTE NAME
Enter H2O
OTHER
RETURN TO SETUP

ENTER TEMPERATURE CELSIUS Measure the temperature of water you will be using for Pipette measurements
25.000 25.000 in Celsius. A standard room temperature of 25 degrees Celsius has been pre-
entered in the balance. Enter the correct value.
H2O
OTHER
RETURN TO SETUP
IN CC.
Balance modes
58

ENTER LIQUID DENSITY IN CC Enter the density value for the test liquid. The standard density for water has
Enter H2O
OTHER
RETURN TO SETUP
Enter PIPETTE SETUP

LIBRARY NAME P2
AUTO PRINT OFF
PIPETTE NAME
ATM
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE Select unit of atmospheric pressure measurement
MMHG
MBAR PRESSURE.
HPA
INHG

Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
LIBRARY NAME P2
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
PIPETTE NAME
Enter PIPETTE SETUP

LIBRARY NAME P2
TEST LIQUID(G/CC) 0.9971 Press the Enter button. The display advances to PIPETTE SETUP with AUTO
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
PIPETTE NAME
Balance modes
59
Enter AUTO PRINT Set auto print on

ON
Enter PIPETTE SETUP

LIBRARY NAME P2
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
PIPETTE NAME
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
Enter sample size
Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
LIBRARY NAME P2
Select pipette name
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
PIPETTE NAME
Enter pipette name


Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
Select nominal
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
PIPETTE NAME
10
WHEAT
ML highlighted.
PIPETTE NUMBER 345
NOMINAL 0.00ML

ML
RETURN TO SETUP
Balance modes
60
Enter nominal value

Enter AUTO SAMPLE

PIPETTE SETUP
OFF
Select inaccuracy
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
10
PIPETTE NAME
PIPETTE NUMBER
WHEAT
345
RACY.
NOMINAL 3.45ML
INACCURACY 2.00%

INACCURACY Enter the percentage of acceptable inaccuracy. This indicates the deviation of
2.000 2.000 all pipette samples (mean error). Press Enter button. The default setting is 2
percent. Display advances to IMPRECISION.
Enter AUTO PRINT

PIPETTE SETUP
OFF
Select imprecision
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
PIPETTE NAME
10
WHEAT
PIPETTE NUMBER
NOMINAL
345
3.45ML
SION.
INACCURACY 2.00%
IMPRECISION 2.00%

When placing samples in the vessel during pipette calibration, make sure to
continue the calibration to the end without significant pauses in between
each sample. If a significant amount of time has elapsed (30 seconds or
more) between samples, re-tare the balance before adding the next sample.
This is to eliminate errors introduced by evaporation.
Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
PIPETTE NUMBER 345
Taking samples
NOMINAL
INACCURACY
3.45ML
2.00%
IMPRECISION
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
0% 100% screen.
0.000
testing. If you are using water, use distilled water only.
Balance modes
61
When AUTO SAMPLE has been selected, it is not necessary to press the Enter
button for each sample. If the balance fails to advance to the next sample,
press the Enter button.
P1
05/26/99 03:11:03P
STATUS PASS
INACCURACY: 0.30%
NOMINAL: 3.45ML
3.525 2S
IMPRECISION:0.97%
3.492 S
3.458 M
3.391 2S
indicates the mean value in the center with standard deviation and 2 times
standard deviation above and below shown as lines across the screen.
Each sample is shown as a diamond shaped mark on the graph. A ten
sample set is shown.
Balance settings
62
7. Balance settings
SET BALANCE
READOUT
INTERFACE
PRINT OPTION
SETTINGS.
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
RESET
or SET BALANCE
RESET READOUTS
RESET RS232
RESET PRINT OPTION
RESET GLP
function, select the function using the arrow buttons and press Enter button.
RESET ALL
Enter button.
RESET ALL when selected, will return the balance to factory default
settings.

When the balance is first turned on, you may want to adjust the balance's LCD display contrast and brightness
to suit your needs.
Enter MAIN MENU Enter the MAIN MENU and select CONTRAST and press Enter button.
CHANGE MODE
CHANGE UNITS Display advances to LCD CONTRAST / BRIGHTNESS ADJUST.
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST

or
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS
Balance settings
63

This menu option enables you to set the balance averaging level, stability level, auto zero, and legal for trade
(LFT).

READOUT

5

Scroll to STABILITY LEVEL and press Enter button, STABILITY LEVEL
GOOD BEST FILTER is displayed. Stability level filter determines the variation range in
5 divisions for a given reading depending upon the filter setting. A setting of
zero (GOOD) permits the balance to respond to variations of .5 divisions. A
setting of (BEST) 10 sets the threshold to 3 divisions. Adjust to desired
setting and press Enter button.

AZT
OFF
1
3 There are 4 settings, OFF, 0.5, 1, and 3. The numbers represent display

AVERAGING LEVEL 5
LEGAL FOR TRADE OFF
Balance settings
64

This menu option enables you to set the balance communication parameters for the RS232 interface which
include: baud rate, data bits, parity and stop bit.

or INTERFACE
BAUD RATE
Setting baud rate
1200
4800
9600 Enter button.
RETURN
or INTERFACE
DATA BITS
Setting data bits
RETURN
or INTERFACE
PARITY
Setting parity
EVEN
0
1
RETURN
or INTERFACE
STOP BITS
Setting stop bits
RETURN
Balance settings
65

This menu option enables you to set various print features ON or OFF and include Auto Print, Data, Numeric
Data, Print Date, Print Time and Print Reference.

Enter button, display advances PRINT OPTION with AUTO PRINT OFF
highlighted.

OFF
CONTINUOUS
INTERVAL
STABLE DATA OFF
PRINT DATE OFF All of these features can be set ON or OFF. STABLE DATA, when set ON, prints
PRINT TIME OFF
PRINT REFERENCE OFF only when the reading is stable. NUMERIC DATA, when set ON, prints
when set ON, prints current time. PRINT REFERENCE, when set ON, prints the
value of the weight used as a reference to the printer.

OFF
Enter
Balance settings
66

This menu GLP (Good Laboratory Practices) options allows the entering of a Project Name, User Name, and
GLP Print Options which include: Date & Time, Balance ID, Project Name, User Name and Calibration all of which
can be set ON or OFF.

SETUP GLP
Enter button, display advances SETUP GLP with PROJECT NAME highlighted.
Enter
PROJECT NAME
Enter PROJECT NAME, the display advances to permit entering project
name.

Enter
USER NAME

USER NAME Specify the user name, and press Enter button. The display advances to GLP
PRINT OPTIONS. Press Enter, the display advances to GLP PRINT OPTIONS
with DATE & TIME highlighted.

DATE & TIME OFF
PROJECT NAME OFF
CALIBRATION OFF
RETURN

OFF
Enter
Balance settings
67


Enter button.
Enter
DATE TYPE MM/DD/YY
This option offers 6 arrangements of date styles to suit your needs. They are:
MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, YY/MM/DD, MM/YY/DD, DD/YY/MM, YY/DD/MM.
to SET DATE.
Enter
SET DATE This option permits entering the current date. Enter the SET DATE option. The
display advances to a new SET DATE display.
SET DATE
press the Enter button. The display advances to SETUP DATE/TIME with TIME
TYPE highlighted.
Enter
TIME TYPE
RETURN
Enter
Balance settings
68


SET TIME
was selected.

AM
PM
Select AM or PM as required. The display returns to the DATE TYPE. Press the
Go Back button to return to SET BALANCE menu, SET TIME/DATE is
displayed.


the Enter button.
ON AUTOCAL ENABLE.
OFF


PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS button. The balance wil print current settings out to a printer. If a printer is not
connected or improperly connected, the balance will display PRINT FAILED
after displaying PRINTING.
Balance settings
69
7.10 Lock out

Before using this sofware function, check the status of the hardware lock switch and Legal for Trade software
(see section 7.14). If the hardware switch is ON, and the Legal for Trade software is set ON (locked), you cannot
access the LFT LOCK software.

LOCK OUT
methods and balance Functions are displayed. Every item in each list can be
individually turned ON or OFF. These items when turned OFF will not be
Balance settings
70




RUN
SETUP CUSTOM MENU

OFF
Enter

FILLING SQC
Enter CUSTOM MENU To run a particular function, select RUN and press the Enter button.
RUN
SETUP CUSTOM MENU
Balance settings
71


READOUT
displayed.
READOUT SETUP Select LEGAL FOR TRADE, press Enter button.
LEGAL FOR TRADE

LFT DEFAULT TABLE
Set Balance Menu
Readout
Interface Unlocked
Print Option
Auto Print Unlocked
Print Data Unlocked
Print Time Unlocked
Setup GLP Unlocked
When LFT is turned ON, the last digit on the weight display has a white
colored block behind it. This signifies that the balance is in a legal for trade
operational mode and that the last digit should be ignored. The CENTER OF
ZERO is displayed only for LFT operation.
Balance settings
72

Access to the various menus can be disabled by setting the Lock switch located on the PC board inside the
balance to ON position. The Lock switch locks out certain menus when Legal For Trade is turned ON. The default
setting for the Lock switch is OFF.

For type approved balances consult local Weights and Measures officials to determine sealing method require-
ments.
Sealing the balance

a Turn the display off and unplug the power cord.
a On balances with a draft shield, slide the door open and remove the pan and cover plate.
a On balances without a draft shield, remove the pan and cover plate.
a Remove the protective cover seal.
a The Lock switch is located to the left of the pan support hole.
a Select the desired position on the Lock switch, seal and reassemble the balance.

Pan
Sealing Screw

Cover Seal
>O/T
<

!
"#
$

OHA
US ®
>O/T
<
Lead Seal Cover Plate

73

8.1 RS232 interface
pressing PRINT.
The balance can be operated from a computer, as well as receive data such as displayed weight, weighing
mode, stability status, etc. The following sections describe the hardware and software provided with the balance


2 Data Out (TXD) Data output can be initiated in one of three ways: 1) By pressing PRINT;
3 Data In (RXD)
2) Using the Auto Print feature; 3) Sending a print command (P) from a
computer.
7 Ground
* External PRINT and/or TARE switches characters shown in the following table are acknowledged by the balance.
may be installed as shown in the diagram.
Invalid command response "ES" error indicates the balance has not
recognized the command. Commands sent to the balance must be termi-
nated with a carriage return (CR) or carriage return-line line feed (CRLF).
For example, a tare command should appear as shown in the adjacent
diagram. Data output by the balance is always terminated with a carriage
74 RS232 COMMAND TABLE
Command
blank if stable
mg ? if unstable
GN N
g tael tical
kg tael custm
dwt tael Pcs
ct momme %
oz lb
oz t
Interval

1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 = maximum level

4 = dwt
5 = Carats
6 = Ounces
7 = Ounces troy
8 = Grains
9 = Taels Hong Kong
11 = Taels Taiwan
12 = Mommes
13 = Decimal Pounds
14 = Pounds-Ounces
combined
15 = Newton's
16 = tical
17 = Custom Units

g tael tical
dwt tael Pcs
ct momme %
oz lb
oz t
75

Command



set.
76
8.2 Printing data

Printing to an external printer or computer will occur each time the Print button is pressed unless the autoprint
feature is turned on, in which case, printing can occur in a continuous fashion at specified intervals or each time
a stable reading is achieved. When an external printer or computer is properly connected and the communication
parameters are set correctly, the display indicates PRINTING... If the external printer or computer is improperly con-
nected or the communication parameters are set incorrectly, PRINT FAILED is displayed. To clear the screen, press the
Go back button. Check computer/printer settings and connections.

TYPE= MM/DD/YY options set to ON, each printout starts with the date and time on the first
TYPE= 24 HOUR line.
12/01/99 16:00:00
READOUT
AZT LEVEL = 0.5d
GLP PRINT OPTIONS
DATE & TIME = OFF
BALANCE ID = OFF
PROJECT NAME = OFF
USER NAME = OFF
DIFFERENCE = OFF
PRINT OPTION
AUTO PRINT = OFF
INTERVAL= 0
STABLE PRINT = OFF
NUMERIC DATA = OFF
DATE= OFF
TIME= OFF
RS232 = 2400: NONE: 7 : 2
77

- - - - - SPAN CAL - - - - - -
12/01/99 1:00:00 PM
Bal Id 1234
Cal: 400.000g
Old: 400.000g
Dif: 0.000g
Wt. Ref...................................... USER
NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -

- - - - - LIN CAL - - - - - -
12/01/99 1:00:00 PM
Bal Id 1234
Cal: 400.000g
Old: 399.094g
Dif: 0.006g
Wt. Ref...................................... USER
NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -

12/01/99 1:00:00 PM When performing a Calibration Test with GLP turned on, a printout is
Bal Id 1234 automatically made after the calibration mass is placed on the pan.
Cal: 400.000g
Act: 400.004g
Dif: 0.004g
Wt. Ref......................................
USER NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -
78

Pipette Results
When performing a Pipette Test with GLP turned on, a printout is available.
Library Name: WHEATON
The following sample printout is shown.
Pipette Number: 832
Water Temp(C): 25.0
Test Liquid Density(g/cc): 0.9971
INACCURACY
E%: 0.31%
E% Limit: 2.00%
Mean Value: 3.459ml
IMPRECISION
CV: 0.88%
CV Limit: 2.00%
Status: PASS
07/01/99
3.488
3.485
3.487
3.435
3.458
3.430
3.470
3.510
3.446
3.456
Operator:----------------------
79

9.1 Troubleshooting
weighing mode.
peripheral device.
serviced.



80

Error Codes List
Data Errors
Tare Errors
recalibration.
Calibration Errors
RS232 Errors
User Errors

must be serviced.
CheckSum Errors
81

or a malfunction has occurred in the balance due to hardware, software errors or misapplication. A typical message is
shown below.


9.6 Accessories
20 g 49024-11
50 g 49054-11
100 g 49015-11
200 g 49025-11
500 g 49055-11
1 kg 49016-11
2 kg 49026-11
4 kg 49046-11
(Wall Mount) 470009-020
Remote Display Kit
(Wall Mount) 470010-020
RS232 Interface Cable, (connects impact printer) 80500570
Printer SF42
Battery, Memory - 3 Volt Lithium ( Use BR2325, Ray O Vac or Panasonic) ---------
82
9.7 Specifications
Analyticals
Capacity (g) 62 110 210 100/210 *
Weighing units mg, g, kg, dwt, ct, oz , oz t, gn, taels (3), mommes, lbs, N, ti, custom unit
Application modes Parts counting, differential weighing, quick check, statistics, formulation, filling, animal weighing, percent
Linearity (mg) (+) 0.2 0.2/0.5
Sensitivity drift PPM/C 3 ..................
(10 C - 30 C)
Calibration External/AutoCalTM calibration
Pan size (in/cm) 3.5/9 diameter
Dimensions 9 x 15.25 x14/22.8 x 38.7 x 35.5 ..................
(WxHxD) (in/cm)

Capacity (g) 210 410 610 100/410* 610 2100 4100 6100 1000/4100* 4100** 6100** 8100**
Readability (g) 0.001 0.001/0.01 0.01 0.01/0.1 0.1
Weighing units mg, g, kg, dwt, ct, oz , oz t, gn, taels (3), mommes, lbs, N, ti, custom unit
Application modes Parts counting, differential weighing, quick check, statistics, formulation, filling, animal weighing, percent
Repeatability (Std. dev.) (g) 0.0005 0.0015 0.0005/0.005 0.005 0.01 0.01/0.05 0.05
Linearity (g) (+) 0.002 0.002/0.005 0.02 0.04 0.02/0.05 0.1
Sensitivity drift PPM/C 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 ..................
(10 C - 30 C)
Calibration External/AutoCalTM calibration
Dimensions 9 x 15.25 x14/22.8 x 38.7 x 35. 8.25 x 4 x 14/20.9x 10.1 x 35.5 ..................
(WxHxD) (in/cm)
* Moveable FineRange TM ** Balances with internal calibration are equipped with a 6" x 6" Pan and Windshield.

83
Admissible ambient conditions

Use only in closed rooms
Temperature range: 10 ºC to 40 ºC/50º to 104º F with internal calibration
10 ºC to 30 ºC/50º to 86º F without internal calibration
Atmospheric humidity: 80% rh @ to 30 ºC
Voltage fluctuations: 15% +10%
Installation category: II
Pollution degree: 2
Power supply voltage: 12 V ac, 50/60 Hz or 12 V dc, 1A
Power adapter: AP2805E 220 - 240V, 50/60 Hz, 100 mA
AP2805 110 - 120V, 50/60 Hz, 150 mA
A-1 Sieve analysis

basic sample is weighed first with its container weight tared. This sample weight is entered into the balance
manually and stored during the procedure. Then, each sieve is weighed in sequence and the weights are stored. After
the screening process, each sieve along with its retained sample, is weighed in sequence. The balance stores the

DIFF WEIGHING

SETUP highlighted.
84
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
Tare setup
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
DIFF RESULT WEIGH
VIEW RESULTS
RUN
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
Auto sample
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
DIFF RESULT WEIGH
VIEW RESULTS
RUN
highlighted.
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
Diff result
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
VIEW RESULTS
RUN


Enter
WEIGHT
PERCENT
RETURN
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 1
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN

85
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
OFF
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
Enter
IN IT WT: FINAL WT:
3.426 sieves until all sieves have been weighed pressing the Enter button after
N/A NA 3.426 0.000
N/A N/A 3.962 0.000
SAMPLE #1

TARE WT:
INIT WT:
TARE WT:
FINAL WT:3.841
3.841 full sieve on the pan and press Enter button. Repeat weighing with remaining
sieves pressing the Enter button after each sieve. When the last sieve has
been weighed, the display indicates the final weight of all samples.
Enter N/A NA 3.426 3.839
N/A N/A 3.969 4.388
N/A N/A 3.962 4.377
SAMPLE #1

1 200.025 0.413 0.206
3 200.025 0.415 0.207
TOTAL 1.247 0.623
86

impregnation and record its weight. You must also know the density value of the oil to be used in immersing the part
before starting. In this procedure, you will follow the method for solid density measurements using water.
Enter
CHANGE MODE

LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
RUN
Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
O.000
0.0000
RETURN TO SETUP

Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
OTHER
DRY WEIGHT O.000
RETURN TO SETUP
H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Enter dry weight
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL ON
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
200.040
0.0000
RETURN TO SETUP
87
H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Enter oil density
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL ON
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
200.040
RETURN TO SETUP
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
<-SELECTED
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
RUN
sample.
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto print
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
RUN
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Testing the sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
<-SELECTED
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
RUN
TEMP: 25.0
57.779 and Oil Content by Volume (P1).
P1: 535.58%
WEIGH IN AIR GRAMS/CC STABLE

LIMITED WARRANTY
Ohaus products are warranted against defects in materials and workmanship from the date of delivery through the duration
of the warranty period. During the warranty period Ohaus will repair, or, at its option, replace any component(s) that proves
to be defective at no charge, provided that the product is returned, freight prepaid, to Ohaus.
This warranty does not apply if the product has been damaged by accident or misuse, exposed to radioactive or corrosive
materials, has foreign material penetrating to the inside of the product, or as a result of service or modification by other than
Ohaus. In lieu of a properly returned warranty registration card, the warranty period shall begin on the date of shipment to
the authorized dealer. No other express or implied warranty is given by Ohaus Corporation. Ohaus Corporation shall not be
liable for any consequential damages.
As warranty legislation differs from state to state and country to country, please contact Ohaus or your local Ohaus dealer
for further details.
Ohaus Corporation Ohaus UK Ltd.
19A Chapin Road, 64 Boston Road
Pine Brook, NJ 07058-9878, USA Beaumont Leys
Tel: (973) 377-9000, Leicester LE4 1AW
Fax: (973) 593-0359 England

www.ohaus.com
P/N 11780297C © Ohaus Corporation 2002, all rights reserved.

balances
On
/O
ff
Go
Ba
ck
He
lp
0%
Pri
nt BA
SIC
W
EIG
HIN
G
>O
/T<
0.0 10
00
PR 0%
ES
S G
< E RAM
NT S
ER
>
FO STA
R B
M E LE
NU En
ter
On
/O
ff
Go
OHAU >O Ba
ck
S ¨
/T< He
ip
Pri
0%
nt BA
SIC
W
EIG
HIN
>O G
/T<
PR
ES 0.0 10
0%
S G
<E RA
NT MS
ER
>
FO ST
0
R AB
ME LE
NU En
ter
>O
/T<
Declaration of Conformity
The undersigned, representing the following manufacturer
Ohaus Corporation
19A Chapin Road
PO Box 2033
Pine Brook, NJ 07058 USA
hereby declares that the following products are in conformity with the EEC directives listed below (including any and all modifications).
V10640, V00640, V10642, V10645, V11140, V11142, V01140, V11145, V12140, V02140, V12142, V12145, V1RR80, V0RR80,
V1RR82, V1RR85, V12130, V02130, V12132, V02132, V12135, V14130, V04130, V14132, V04132, V14135, V1RV70, V0RV70,
V1RV72, V0RV72, V1RV75, V16120, V06120, V16122, V06122, V16125, V1B120, V0B120, V1B122, V0B122, V1B125, V1D120,
V0D120, V1D122,V0D122, V1D125, V1RW60, V0RW60, V1RW62, V0RW62, V1RW65, V1D110, V0D110, V1D112, V0D112, V1D115,
V1F110, V0F110, V1F112, V0F112, V1F115, V1H110, V0H110, V1H112, V0H112, V1H115, V16130, V06130, V16132, V16135,
V1F120, V0F120, V1F122, V0F122, V1F125
Marked with: EC Directive (Including applicable amendments) Standard
73/23/EC IEC 1010 -1:1990 + A1: 92 + A2: 95

Electrical equipment for use within specified Safety requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
voltage limits Control Laboratory Use, Part 1: General Requirements
CE marking affixed in 97
89/336/EC EN61326: -1:1997 (class B) + A1: 1998
Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Emissions, residential, commercial and light industry.
EN61326: -1:1997 A1:1998 (industrial requirements)

EMC Immunity.
EN61000-3-2:1995 + A1:1998 + A2: 1998; EN61000-3-3:1995

EMC Part 3 (for equipment rated input current < or=16A)
Limits- Section 2: Limits for harmonic current emissions
Limits- section 3: Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low
voltage supply systems
xx
T2914
xx= year CE affixed
ISO 9001 Registration for Ohaus Corporation. Ohaus Corporation, USA, was examined and evaluated in 1994 by the Bureau Veritas Quality
International, BVQI, and was awarded ISO 9001 registration. This certifies that Ohaus Corporation, USA, has a quality system that conforms with the interna-
tional standards for quality management and quality assurance (ISO 9000 series). Repeat audits are carried out by BVQI at intervals to check that the quality
system is operated in the proper manner.
Ted Xia
Ted President
Xia Johan Dierbach
President
Ohaus Corporation General Manager
Ohaus Corporation,
Pine Pine
Brook,Brook,
NJ USANJ USA Ohaus Europe
Date Date:
marchMarch
6, 2003n
6, 2003 Greifensee, Switzerland
Date: March 6, 2003
Additional Standards
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1-92; UL Std. No. 3101-1

Safety requirements for Electrical Equip. for measurement, Control and Laboratory Use, Part 1; General Requirements
FCC FCC, Part 15, class A Emission
AS/NZS4251.1 AS/NZS4252.1 Emission and Immunity

315
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada
Contents
5
Contents
OVERVIEW OF CONTROLS .................................................................................................................. 8
1. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VOYAGER BALANCE .................................................................................... 9
1.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 9
1.2 Overview of the Voyager balance ......................................................................................................... 9
1.3 What you should know about these instructions ................................................................................. 10
1.4 Safety is first ................................................................................................................................... 10
2. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................ 11
2.1 Unpacking and checking the standard equipment ............................................................................... 11
2.2 Selecting the location ....................................................................................................................... 12
2.3 Leveling the balance ........................................................................................................................ 12
2.4 Installing pan .................................................................................................................................. 12
2.5 Wind shield .................................................................................................................................... 13
2.6 Power supply .................................................................................................................................. 13
2.7 Switching the balance on or off ......................................................................................................... 14
2.8 Weigh below preparation ................................................................................................................. 14
3. THE MENU ..................................................................................................................................... 15

3.1 What is the menu? .......................................................................................................................... 15
3.2 Menu operation ............................................................................................................................... 16
3.3 Library ........................................................................................................................................... 17
4. CALIBRATION ................................................................................................................................. 18
4.1 Span calibration .............................................................................................................................. 20
4.2 Linearity calibration ......................................................................................................................... 21
4.3 User calibration ............................................................................................................................... 22
4.4 Calibration test ................................................................................................................................ 23
4.5 Auto calibration ............................................................................................................................... 24
4.6 AutoCalTM delta correction ................................................................................................................. 25
Contents
6
5. WEIGHING MADE SIMPLE ............................................................................................................... 26

5.1 Selecting a weighing unit.................................................................................................................. 26
5.2 Taring the balance ........................................................................................................................... 27
5.3 Performing a simple weighing .......................................................................................................... 27
5.4 Custom unit .................................................................................................................................... 28
6. BALANCE MODES ........................................................................................................................... 31

6.1 Parts counting ................................................................................................................................ 31
6.1.1 Easy count .......................................................................................................................... 31
6.1.2 Advanced counting ............................................................................................................... 32
6.2 Filling ............................................................................................................................................. 33
6.3 Animal weighing ............................................................................................................................. 34
6.4 Check weighing .............................................................................................................................. 35
6.5 Differential weighing ........................................................................................................................ 36
6.6 Formulation .................................................................................................................................... 41
6.7 Quick check weighing ...................................................................................................................... 43
6.8 Statistics/function link ...................................................................................................................... 44
6.9 Density........................................................................................................................................... 45
6.9.1 Balance preparation with density kit ....................................................................................... 45
6.9.2 Solid density determination for items more dense than water ..................................................... 46
6.9.3 Solid density determination for items less dense than water ...................................................... 48
6.9.4 Improving the accuracy of the result of solid density ................................................................. 49
6.9.5 Liquid density determination .................................................................................................. 50
6.10 Statistical quality control (SQC) ......................................................................................................... 51
6.10.1 Resuming a particular SQC setup ........................................................................................... 54
6.10.2 Specifing a new SQC setup .................................................................................................... 55
6.10.3 Redoing or correcting a batch ................................................................................................ 56
6.11 Pipette calibration ............................................................................................................................ 57
7. BALANCE SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................ 62

7.1 Reset to factory settings ................................................................................................................... 62
7.2 Setting contrast and brightness of the display ..................................................................................... 62
7.3 Setting the readout ........................................................................................................................... 63
7.4 Setting the interface.......................................................................................................................... 64
7.5 Setting print option ........................................................................................................................... 65
Contents
7
7.6 Setting GLP print options .................................................................................................................. 66

7.7 Setting time and date ....................................................................................................................... 67
7.8 Setting auto calibration ..................................................................................................................... 68
7.9 Print current settings ........................................................................................................................ 68
7.10 Lock out ......................................................................................................................................... 69
7.11 Software version .............................................................................................................................. 70
7.12 Setting custom menu ....................................................................................................................... 70
7.13 Legal for trade ................................................................................................................................. 71
7.14 Menu lock-out protection .................................................................................................................. 72
8. RS232 INTERFACE/PRINTING DATA .................................................................................................. 73

8.1 RS232 interface .............................................................................................................................. 73
8.2 Printing data ................................................................................................................................... 76
9. CARE AND MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... 79

9.1 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 79
9.2 Error codes list ................................................................................................................................ 80
9.3 Information messages ..................................................................................................................... 81
9.4 Service information .......................................................................................................................... 81
9.5 Replacement parts ........................................................................................................................... 81
9.6 Accessories .................................................................................................................................... 81
9.7 Specifications .................................................................................................................................. 82
A APPENDIX SPECIAL APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................ 83

A-1 Sieve analysis ................................................................................................................................. 83
A-2 Porous material density determinations .............................................................................................. 86
Overview
8
1
6
On/Off
BASIC WEIGHING
8
2 Go Back 0%
9
100%
0.000
Help
3 Print Enter
7
GRAMS STABLE
4 PRESS <ENTER> FOR MENU

10 On/
Off
Go
Ba
ck
Hel
p
0%
Pr BA
5
int
SIC
W
EIG
11
HIN
G
>O
/T<
0.0 10
00
PR 0%
ES
S G
<E RAM
NT S
ER
>
FO STA
R B
ME LE
NU En
ter
OHAU >O
S ¨
/T<
12
5
characters.
characters.

9

This section provides you with detailed information on your Voyager balance. Please read through the section
carefully even if you have experience with OHAUS balances and be sure to familiarize yourself with the safety notes.
1.1 Introduction
Thank you for deciding to purchase a Voyager Balance from Ohaus. Behind your instrument stands OHAUS, a
leading manufacturer of precision Balances, Scales and Indicators. An Aftermarket Department with trained instrument
technicians is dedicated to provide you with the fastest service possible in the event your instrument requires
servicing. OHAUS also has a Customer Service Department to answer any inquiries regarding applications and
accessories.
To ensure you make full use of the possibilities offered by your Voyager balance, please read the manual completely
before installation and operation.

measurements.

Built-in functions for filling, percent weighing, piece counting, animal weighing, check weighing, density,
pipette calibration, statistics, and SQC.
A variety of accessories includes in-use display cover kit, table mount, remote displays, interface communi-
cation cables and security device.
with all common standards and directives. It supports standard procedures, work techniques and records as required
by GLP (Good Laboratory Practices) and SOP (Standard Operating Procedure). Recording of the sequences of
operations and calibration work is highly important in this connection: we recommend use of OHAUS AS-142 Printer.
Your Voyager balance has a CE declaration of conformity and OHAUS is registered to ISO 9001 - Management
System.
10

These instructions contain orientation aids which represent certain functions, notices and controls. These graphic aids
are not meant to be step by step operational procedures but simply a guide.
This symbol indicates additional information and instructions which

facilitate your handling of the balance and contribute to proper and
economical use.
These symbols indicate safety and hazard instructions which must be

complied with. Nonconformance with such instructions can lead to personal
malfunctions.
1.4 Safety is first

Voyager balances may be used only indoors and only when attached to receptacle outlets
with a ground connection.
Installation
11
2. Installation

Analytical Capacity
Equipment 62g, 110g, 210, 410, 610g 610g - 6100g 6100g - 8100g
210g, 210/100g 410/100g 4100/1000g
Pan 3.5
Pan 4.75
Pan 6 (0.01g units
and 0.1g units w/AutoCal)
Pan 8 (0.1g units w/o AutoCal)
Draft Shield
AC Power Adapter
Instruction Manual
Warranty Card
In-Use Cover
Check the instrument for transport damage. Immediately inform your Ohaus dealer if you have complaints or
parts are missing.
instrument.
Installation
12

The balance should always be used in an environment which is free from excessive air currents, corrosives,
vibration, and temperature or humidity extremes. These factors will affect displayed weight readings.


>O/T

<

!"

#

>O/T
<

magnetic fields.
>O/T<


!"

#

>O/T<


>O/T

<

!"

#


>O/T
<

Indicator
On
/Of
f
Go
Ba
ck
He
lp
0%
Pri
nt BA
SI
C
W
EI
GHI
NG
>O
/T<
0.0 10
00
PR 0%
ES
S G
<E RAM
NT S
ER
>
FO STAB
R
MENLE
U En
ter
OHA
US >O
/T<
Leveling
¨
Foot
2.4 Installing pan

Balances are shipped with the pan not installed. On balances equipped with
a draft shield, slide open the side door and insert the pan into the center
hole which is the measuring transducer.
Pan
On
/Of
f
Go
Ba
ck
He
lp
Pri
0%
nt BA
SI
C
W
EI
>O 0. G
HI
NG
/T
<
PR 00 10
ES
S G
RA
<E M
NT S
ER ST
0 0%
> AB
FO LE
R En
M ter
EN
U
OHAU
S¨
>O
/T
<
Installation
13
2.5 Wind shield

On
/O
ff
Go
NOTE: 4100g, 6100g and 8100g balances with 0.1g resolution and
Ba
ck
He
ip
Pr
0%
int BA
SIC
W
EIG
HIN
>O G
/T<
0.0
internal calibration are equipped with a 6 Pan and Wind Shield.
PR 10
ES 0%
S
<E
GR
N T AM S
ER
>
FO STA
0
R
ME BLE
NU En
ter
>O
/T<
2.6 Power supply

Check to ensure the voltage printed on the AC adapter matches your
local line voltage. If this is not the case, on no account connect the AC
adapter to the power supply, but contact your responsible OHAUS dealer.
Connect the AC Adapter supplied to the three pin connector located at the rear
of the balance.

Rear of Balance

very cold environment before installation, it may require several hours for
the balance to stabilize.
Installation
14

Your balance is on at all times when connected to a power source, the display is on initially and can be turned
off.
As your balance needs no warm-up time when in the standby mode and
is immediately ready for weighing, we advise you to switch the display off
by use of the button and not to disconnect it from the power supply.
This also ensures that the balance is always in thermal equilibrium.

The Voyager balance is equipped with a weigh below hook at the bottom of the balance. To use this feature, remove
power from the balance and remove the protective cover underneath the balance. See illustration for location. The
balance can be supported using lab jacks or any other convenient method. Make sure the balance is level and
secure. Apply power and operate the balance. Attach items to be weighed to the hook underneath the balance.

The menu
15
3. The menu
Check weighing Carats
Set time/date Autocal
Ounces
Troy ounces
Grains
Quick check Reset
Hong Kong taels
Statistics Lockout
Singapore taels
ROC taels
Pipette Pounds
Newtons
Ticals
Custom units
Exit to weigh
3. Set balance:

The menu
16
3.2 Menu operation

BASIC WEIGHING
How to change from the weighing mode to the main menu
The balance is operating in the basic weighing mode.
0.000
GRAMS STABLE
CHANGE MODE
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST

Enter MAIN MENU

CHANGE MODE
CHANGE UNITS
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST

Press the and arrow buttons to scroll through numbers or
alphabet.

display.

The menu
17
SAVING

3.3 Library
accessed the library and do not want to run or delete a name, an exit to weighing selection can be made by pressing
the Go Back button which does not affect the library
CHANGE MODE
CHANGE UNITS
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST corresponding functions and the percentage of the library which has
been used.
LIBRARY 15.21% USED The sample shown indicates six library entries. Entries are stored in alpha-
P1 PIP 1.26%
P2 PIP 1.26% betical order.
SQ1 SQC 3.17%
SQ2 SQC 3.17%
SQ3 SQC 3.17%
SQ5 SQC 3.17%

RUN
DELETE ALL
Calibration
18
4. Calibration
SPAN
USER
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

User- User calibration is a method where the balance can be

Test- Calibration test allows the stored calibration data to be



Calibration
19

Calibration Test.
To lock out calibration menu, after calibration, refer to paragraph 7.14

titled Menu Lock-Out Protection.
balances.
Calibration Masses
be performed as necessary to ensure accurate weighing. Masses required to
perform the procedures are listed in the following table.
CALIBRATION MASSES
LINEARITY SPAN ONLY
62g 20g/50g 50g
110g 50g/100g 100g
210g 100g/200g 200g
410g 200g/400g 400g
610g 200g/500g 500g
2100g 1000g/2000g 2000g
4100g 2000g/4000g 4000g
6100g 2000g/5000g 5000g
8100g 4000g/8000g 8000g

Calibration
20

Enter
SPAN
CALIBRATE
From main menu
LINEARITY
USER
CALIBRATION TEST
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

AND PRESS <ENTER>.

300 200 100
Enter SPAN CALIBRATION Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the
400.000
GRAMS STABLE
Calibration
21


SPAN
USER
CALIBRATION TEST CALIBRATE with SPAN highlighted. Scroll to LINEARITY.
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

AND PRESS <ENTER>.


Enter LINEARITY CALIBRATION Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the
400.000
GRAMS STABLE
Calibration
22

User calibration is used when it is desired to calibrate the balance using a mass of known value. To use this
calibration feature, proceed as follows:

SPAN
USER
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

100-400 GRAMS

200.000 200.000

AND PRESS <ENTER>.

Enter USER CALIBRATION Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the
200.000
GRAMS STABLE
Calibration
23

Calibration test feature allows a check of a known calibration mass against the last stored calibration informa-
tion in the balance.

SPAN
USER
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

AND PRESS <ENTER>.

Enter CALIBRATION TEST Display indicates the difference between the present calibration and the
200.000
GRAMS STABLE
Calibration
24


SPAN
USER
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH

AND PRESS <ENTER>.
AND THE LAST CAL IS: 0.000 GRAMS returns to a weighing mode automatically.

0% 100%
0.000
GRAMS STABLE
Calibration
25

Balances with AutoCalTM contain software which allows the internal calibration mass to be adjusted + 100
divisions at full scale capacity. This permits calibrating the balance using an external ASTM Class 1 mass which is
->O/T<- 0% 100% calibration value of the balance. Note the reading. If the reading is higher or

SPAN
USER
AUTOCAL
EXIT TO WEIGH
CALIBRATE Enter the number of digits shown between the span calibration value of
AUTOCAL DELTA CORRECTION the balance and the actual reading. For example, on a 400g balance, the
2 2 reading is 400.002g. The difference is 0.002g. This indicates a correction of
2 divisions is required.

AND PRESS <ENTER>.
AND THE LAST CAL IS: 0.000 GRAMS returns to a weighing mode automatically. If a difference still exists, repeat
the procedure. The difference should be 0.000 grams.

0% 100%
0.000
GRAMS STABLE
26

In this section, you will learn how to select a weighing unit, tare the balance, perform simple weighings and
enter a custom unit.

0.000
GRAMS STABLE
Enter MAIN MENU

CHANGE MODE
From main menu
CHANGE UNITS
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
grams
penny weight
carats
ounces
troy ounces
grains
Hong Kong taels
Singapore taels
ROC taels
mommes
pounds
newtons
ticals

27

of your balance.
->O/T<-
GRAMS STABLE


After taring the balance, place sample on the pan. Wait until display
indicates STABLE. Now read the weight in the display.
On
/Of
f
Go
Bac
k
He
ip
Prin
0%
t BA
SIC
WEI
GH
162
ING
>O/T
<
PR
ES 0.0 100%
0
S GR
<E
NT AM
ER S
>
FO
RM ST
EN AB
U LE
Ent
er
>O/T
<
28
5.4 Custom unit

balance will use to convert grams to the desired unit of measure. Custom Units are stored in the Library. Values for up
to fifteen different custom units can be entered.

Number
123.4 = .1234 x 1000 = .1234 x 103 E-1 Moves decimal point 1 place to the left.
12.34 = .1234 x 100 = .1234 x 102
1.234 = .1234 x 10 = .1234 x 101
.1234 = .1234 x 1 = .1234 x 100
.01234 = .1234 x .1 = .1234 x 10-1
.000123 = .123 x .001 = .123 x 10-3

GO TO LIBRARY
EXIT TO WEIGH
When using the balance for the first time, the library is empty and does
not contain any custom units. Later, after you have performed the setup
procedures, you will be able to select a custom unit by a name you have
assigned. Proceed to SETUP.
CUSTOM UNITS
GO TO LIBRARY
SETUP
EXIT TO WEIGH
29
Unit name
UNIT NAME
UNIT1
<UP> / <DOWN> TO SCROLL CHARACTERS
PRESS <ENTER> TO ACCEPT CUSTOM UNIT SETUP with ENTER FACTOR highlighted.
CUSTOM UNIT SETUP

Factor
UNIT NAME UNIT1 Enter the factor number. This can be a number between 0.1 and 1.999999.
ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT DP E-2 For conversion factors outside of this range, the exponent will be used to
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN move the decimal point.
CUSTOM UNIT SETUP

Decimal point
UNIT NAME UNIT1 Scroll to SELECT DP, press Enter button. SELECT DP LOCATION is displayed.
ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT DP E-2
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN
Select a decimal point. Scroll to either E-3, E-2, E-1, E0, E1, E2, or E3, and
SELECT DP LOCATION
E-3
press Enter button. Display returns to CUSTOM UNIT SETUP with UNIT NAME
E-2
E-1 highlighted.
E0
E1

ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN
LSDs
5s.
RETURN TO SETUP
30
SELECT LSD
LSD 0.5
5 or LSD 10 and press Enter button. Display returns to CUSTOM UNIT SETUP
LSD
LSD
1
2
with UNIT NAME highlighted.
LSD 5
LSD 10

CUSTOM UNIT SETUP
UNIT NAME UNIT1
ENTER FACTOR 1.0000
SELECT DP E-2
SELECT LSD LSD1
RETURN
Enter At this point, you can select the custom unit you just entered from the
CUSTOM UNITS library or exit to weigh. When LIBRARY is selected, scroll to the custom unit
GO TO LIBRARY
SETUP
you entered, press Enter button and select RUN from the menu. The
EXIT TO WEIGH
abbreviation for custom units in the display is CU.
Balance modes
31
6. Balance modes
modes.
6.1 Parts counting

6.1.1 Easy count

actual number of samples placed on the pan. Accuracy is based on the average piece weight (APW) of a single part.
All parts must be reasonably uniform in weight.
Enter
EASY PARTS COUNTING
COUNTING.
SAMPLE SIZE
APW 0.3898 WEIGHT: 3.900G display indicates the number of pieces based on the sample size. Repeated
10
PIECES STABLE
Balance modes
32

Enter

APW/SIZE APW/Size
SAMPLE SIZE

samples.


OFF
FILLING Four options are available, OFF, FILLING, CHECK WEIGHING and STATISTICS.
CHECK WEIGHING When FILLING is selected, a target weight is entered which is shown as
STATISTICS 100% on the bar graph on the display. When material is added to the
Enter APW/SIZE
over pieces, under pieces, run and exit. This type of function permits check-
TARE WT ing of individual pieces against the stored information in the balance. When
AUTO OPTIMIZATION STATISTICS is selected, provides display of Standard Deviation, either popu-
FUNCTION LINK
RUN
lation or sample, Mean, Sum, High, Low and Difference readings. Each can
be individually set ON or OFF. RUN when selected starts the program.
Balance modes
33
6.2 Filling
Enter
CHANGE MODE
Enter CHANGE MODE.

FILLING
TARGET
0% 90%
90% 110%
TARGET:
0.000
DIFF:
GRAMS STABLE
Balance modes
34
6.3 Animal weighing

Enter
CHANGE MODE
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
RUN
5
Enter
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
placed on the pan.
AVERAGING LEVEL 5
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
filter setting.
Enter
Balance modes
35
6.4 Check weighing

weight. Library recall eliminates the need to enter the weighing parameters again. A bar graph at the top of the Check
Enter
CHECK WEIGHING
LIBRARY NAME.
LIBRARY NAME

LIBRARY NAME
NOMINAL
OVER
UNDER
RUN
NOMINAL WT
200.000

LIBRARY NAME
NOMINAL
OVER
UNDER
RUN
Enter
OVER: 202.000
UNDER: 199.000
NOMINAL: 200.00
DIFF: 0.026
200.026
Balance modes
36

Enter
DIFF WEIGHING
NAME.

advances to DIFF STARTUP. If a previous name was entered and selected, the
balance displays the parameters which were set.
SETUP SETUP. RESUME will bring you directly to RUN which starts the program. Do
RESUME

Enter LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLEOFF
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
TARE SETUP TARE SETUP offers a choice of NO TARE (no container is used), SINGLE TARE
NO TARE
SINGLE TARE
(one container used during entire process), and DUAL TARE (two containers
DUAL TARE used, one at the start of a process and a different container at the end of a
RETURN
process). DUAL TARE is also used for sieve analysis. Select the appropriate
tare option for your process.
NO TARE
SINGLE TARE
DUAL TARE
RETURN
Balance modes
37

LIBRARY NAME
Automatic sampling
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF Enter AUTO SAMPLE. Auto Sampling permits repetitive sampling
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES automatically. Select ON or OFF. Display advances to DIFF RESULT.
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME
Difference result
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
VIEW RESULTS
RUN
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP Select RETURN and press Enter. Display advances to DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
Enter LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP with NUMBER OF SAMPLES highlighted. Enter the NUMBER OF SAMPLES
AUTO SAMPLEOFF
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
display.
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN

NUMBER OF SAMPLES
can be run per library entry. After specifying number of samples, press Enter
button, display returns to DIFF WEIGHING SETUP with RUN highlighted.


LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
After pressing the Enter button, the display indicates PUT INITIAL SAMPLE #
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
IN IT WT: FINAL WT:
0.000
all samples.
Balance modes
38
N/A 7.705 NA 0.000
N/A 7.701 N/A 0.000
continuing with the procedure. SAVE permits saving the data and returns the
balance to a weighing mode. RESAMPLE allows going back to resample a
selected entry. DELETE permits deleting a selected entry.
To return to your final weighing, find and select the Library name of your test.
final weighing.

TARE WT:
IN IT WT:
TARE WT:
FINAL WT:
7.299 processed sample on the pan. When the weight has stabilized, press Enter
PUT INITIAL SAMPLE #1 ON PAN STABLE button with START/SAMPLE highlighted on the display. This advances to the
samples.
Enter N/A 7.705 NA 7.299
N/A 7.702 N/A 7.299
N/A 7.701 N/A 7.299

N/A 7.705 7.220 -0.407
N/A 7.702 7.299 -0.403
N/A 7.701 7.299 -0.402
TOTAL 23.109 21.896 -1.212

LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
VIEW RESULTS
RUN
IN IT WT: FINAL WT:
PUT INITIAL SAMPLE #1 ON PAN STABLE each container until all containers have been weighed. When the last con-
tainer has been weighed, the display indicates the initial weight of all con-
tainers.
Balance modes
39
8.739 0.000 N/A 0.000
8.738 0.000 N/A 0.000
Enter
20.006 each sample on the pan.

8.739 20.006 N/A 0.000
8.738 20.096 N/A 0.000
SAMPLE #1

TARE WT:
IN IT WT:
TARE WT:
Enter 8.739 20.006 N/A 16.143
8.744 20.096 N/A 16.598
8.738 20.096 N/A 16.685
SAMPLE #1

1 11.267 7.404 -3.863
2 11.352 7.854 -3.498
3 11.358 6.947 -4.411
TOTAL 33.977 22.205 -11.772

Balance modes
40

LIBRARY NAME
TARE SETUP
DIFF RESULT WEIGHT
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
TARE WT: 8.738
IN IT WT:
TARE Wf:
FINALWT:8.738
PUT INITIAL CONTAINER #1 ON PAN STABLE each container until all containers have been weighed. When the last
containers.
8.738 0.000 N/A 0.000
8.738 0.000 N/A 0.000
Enter
23.076 place each sample on the pan.

8.738
8.738
23.989
23.994
N/A
N/A
0.000
0.000 the tare weight of the containers and the initial weight of the samples.
8.738 24.064 N/A 0.000
SAMPLE #1

TARE WT:
IN IT WT:
TARE WT:
FINAL WT:8.738
8.738 container #1 on the pan. Repeat process for all containers.
Enter 8.738 23.989 8.738 19.647
8.738 24.064 8.738 20.102

1 15.251 10.909 .342
2 15.256 1.839 -3.417
3 15.326 11.364 -3.962
TOTAL 45.833 34.112 -11.721

Balance modes
41
6.6 Formulation
named, they may be recalled and used at any time. Each component of a given formulation can be specified as to its
weight or percentage. Each element of a formulation is shown on a dual bar graph as a percentage and displays the
desired weight. Thus, each component may be placed on the pan until 100% is indicated.

FORMULATION
NAME.

FORMULATION SETUP
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN
Enter WEIGHT
PERCENT
RETURN

LIBRARY NAME FORM 2
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN
SETUP highlighted.
Balance modes
42
Enter FORMULATION SETUP Enter SETUP in the FORMULATION SETUP. Display advances to a split screen.
LIBRARY NAME FORM2
WEIGH TYPE WEIGHT
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN

1 0.000
2 0.000

1
2
0.000
LIBRARY NAME FORM2
NUMBER OF ITEMS
SETUP
RUN
Enter
0% 90%
90% 110%
200.044
A1=200.000 DIFF WT: 0.044 bottom of the display. Press Enter button to add next component. Sample
GRAMS STABLE
indicates 200.044 grams. Leave the first component on the pan. Repeat this
procedure for all additional components.
Enter
90% 110%
A1=200.000
200.021
DIFF WT: 0.021
GRAMS STABLE
Enter Al
TARGET
200.000
RESULT
200.044
DIFF
0.044
Final results
A2 200.000
TOTAL 400.000
200.021
400.065
0.021
0.065
the display.
Balance modes
43

difference in percentage is also shown along with the reference weight. The large numeric display indicates the weight
of the sample.

CHECK.
QUICK CHECK

->O/T<- DIFF: 0.000
DIFF%: 0.020
PUT REF WT ON PAN

DIFF: 0.030
DIFF%: 0.020
REF WT: 14.798
14.768 the first sample on the pan. The display indicates the difference in weight and
GRAMS STABLE

DIFF: 0.030
DIFF%: 0.020
Balance modes
44

samples along with other statistical data. A minimum of three samples is required in this program. Statistics contains
menu options which include standard deviation, mean, sum, maximum, minimum, difference, relative deviation, auto
sample and sample size. Most of these can be set ON or OFF except sample size which can be set for a particular
number. When a printer or computer is connected to the balance, all statistical information can be observed and
printed. FUNCTION LINK offers a choice of three functions; CHECK WEIGHING, FILLING and ANIMAL WEIGHING which
can be linked directly to statistical data. Statistics can be enabled either through the CHANGE MODE menu or the
LIBRARY. The library method will automatically run the link. Changes can be made through the CHANGE MODE menu
setup.
Enter
CHANGE MODE
NAME.

previously set.
STATISTICS SETUP
LIBRARY NAME STATS1
STD DEV
MEAN
ON
ON
SUM ON
MINIMUM ON
DIFFERENCE ON data to either CHECK WEIGHING, FILLING or ANIMAL WEIGHING or not linking
RELATIVE DEV ON
and leave the FUNCTION LINK OFF.
OFF
FILLING
CHECK WEIGHING
ANIMAL WEIGHING
RETURN TO SETUP
STATISTICS SETUP
DIFFERENCE ON
Running the program
RELATIVE DEV
AUTO SAMPLE
ON
OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
SAMPLE SIZE 3 function, the display for that function will indicate STATS ON at the top of the
FUNCTION LINK OFF
RUN display.
STATISTICS RESULT
UNIT: GRAMS
MEAN: 203.571
MAXIMUM: 203.929
MINIMUM: 203.283
RELATIVE DEV: 0.064
SUM: 610.713
DIFFERENCE:0.546

statistics.
Balance modes
45
6.9 Density

Support
Bracket
On
Washer On/
Off
/Of Go
f Bac
Go
k
Ba
ck Hel
He
p
0%
0%
lp Prin BA
B
Pri
0% t A
SIC
S
BA
0. IC
nt WE
SI W
IG
C HI
ENG
W IG
EI
>O 0. G
HI
NG
>O
>
O/T/
< 0
0.0
H
IN
G
000
T
/T
<
00 <
PR 10
10
0%
Equalizing Weigh
ES 0%
Bracket
10
PR
ES
S G
RA
<E M
NT S
0
0%
S GR
G
<E RAM
NT ASM
ER
>
0S
FO SST
TA
AB
R
ER ST ME LE
B
LE
> AB NU Ent
FO LE er
R En
M ter
EN
U OHAU >O
>
S ¨
O/T/
>O <
OHAU T
S¨
/T <
<
Washer Below Hook Pan

Open either the left or right side door of the balance and remove the Pan as shown. Insert the Bracket into the balance
where the Pan was removed.
tion.
Bracket
Support
Support Mounting

Beaker Installation
Balance modes
46
m
Q=
V
A
Q= Q
A -B 0
simplified:
A
Q= Q0
P

In the event that a different liquid is to be used, provisions are made to enter the density of the desired liquid and enter
its name into a library. The following procedure uses water.
Enter
CHANGE MODE

LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
RUN
Balance modes
47
Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
Select H2O, and perform the next step. If you are using a different liquid, skip
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
O.000
0.0000
the next step and continue.
RETURN TO SETUP

next two steps.
Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
DRY WEIGHT O.000
RETURN TO SETUP

Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Return to setup
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
O.000
0.0000
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
RUN
sample.
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto print
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
RUN
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Testing the sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
RUN
DENSITY - - D2
VOLUME:
WEIGH IN AIR
0.000
Balance modes
48
TEMP:25.0
AUX D= 9.971
values.
VOLUME: 0.40
GRAMS/CC
39.438
STABLE
must be used as it holds the solid body below the surface of the auxiliary liquid. If the buoyancy of the solid is greater
than the weight of the Weigh Below Hook, the Weigh Below Hook must be weighted by placing an additional mass on
the submerged part of the Weigh Below Hook as shown.
Sample

Balance modes
49

Temperature
result.
Air buoyancy
1 CM3 of air weighs approximately 1.2 mg (depending on the physical condition). As a consequence, in the weighing
in air, each solid experiences a buoyancy of this magnitude (the so-called air buoyancy) per cm3 of its volume.
lated result:

measurement.
Balance modes
50


Q=
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Select liquid density
SOLID DENSITY <-SELECTED The balance is prepared in the same manner. Follow the same procedure for
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLEOFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
solid density determination except select LIQUID DENSITY under the DENSITY
RUN SETUP display. Press the Enter button. The display advances to ENTER
SINKER VOLUME IN CC.

Enter the sinker volume in CCs. The display starts with 30 cc. Continue with
30.000 the instructions on the displays and select RUN.
0.378
Sinker
Sinker

Balance modes
51

The Statistical Quality Control (SQC) feature is extremely useful during various types of process filling operations when
it is desired to monitor and control the process to eliminate under and over filling. Provisions are made in the balance
to accommodate the weight of various packaging methods. During operation, parameters of the packaged product
are set into the balance such as packaging weight, acceptable weight limits and non-acceptable weight limits of the
product. These weight limits are identified as +Tl, +T2, NOMINAL and -TI, -T2. As samples are weighed and stored in
the balance, a trend analysis is developed and displayed on the balance. Up to 25 samples in a batch with up to ten
batches are visible on a trend screen for quality control purposes. Each batch of samples is shown on the display
which indicates the maximum/minimum standard deviation and mean values for each batch. An on going examina-
tion of the relative deviation of the samples along with other statistical data can be viewed and is stored. By observing
the results of the TREND ANALYSIS screen, you can effectively monitor the filling process operation. Setup parameters
can be stored in the library and up to 5 products with statistical history can be stored in memory. All SQC information
can be printed.
Enter

previously set.
Enter SQC SETUP

LIBRARY NAME SQC1
Tolerance
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES I
BATCH NAME
+T2
DEFINE TOLERANCE
0.000
Defining tolerances
-Ti
-T2
0.000
0.000
NOMINAL WEIGHT, then -TI, finish with -T2. After entering values, press Enter
RETURN TO SETUP button. Display advances to RETURN TO SETUP, press Enter button.
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
Selecting tare
TOLERANCE
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES I
BATCH NAME
Balance modes
52

NO TARE
INDIVIDUAL TARE
RETURN TO SETUP
for each sample with display prompts, ADD with MT is additive weighing with
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
TOLERANCE
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
BATCH NAME
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE Enter NUMBER OF SAMPLES. Specify the number of samples to be measured.
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO SAMPLE OFF After specifying sample size, display advances to SQC SETUP with BATCH
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
BATCH NAME
3 NAME highlighted. Press Enter button.
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC1
TOLERANCE
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
BATCH NAME
SQC SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
Taking samples
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
3
BATCH NAME
0
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
RUN

0.000
top of the display and instructs: PUT SAMPLE #1 ON PAN.
11.905
Balance modes
53

0%
100%
12.305 pan. When the balance stabilizes, press the Enter button. When AUTO

0%
100%
12.710 all samples have been entered, a History screen is displayed which indi-

UNIT GRAMS
NOMINAL WT: 12.181
MEAN 12.307
MAXIMUM 12.710
MINIMUM 11.906
>+T2 0.00% 0 run additional batches of samples, press the Enter button, the display will
>+T1 0.00% 0
TI>N>-TI 100.00%, 3
<-T20.00% 0
Go Back AUTO SAMPLE

SQC SETUP
OFF
Analyzing data
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 3
VIEW BATCH HISTORY

05/24/99 08:06:28A 05/24/99 02:34:19
16.076 +T1
8.742 -Tl
batches were processed with the last 10 displayed.
7.500 -T2
Sample Value Trace

DEVIATION
MINIMUM LIMIT
Symbol definitions
Balance modes
54
Go Back
AUTO SAMPLE
SQC SETUP
OFF
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
3
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
RUN

TOTAL BATCHES:11
TOTAL SAMPLES: 33
MEAN: 14.314
MAXIMUM: 20.523
>+T2: 9.09%
>+T1: 24.24%
3
T1>N>-T1: 66%, 22
<-T1:0.00%,
<-T2:0.00%,
0
0
LAST SAMPLE: 05/24/99 02:34:19P


Enter SQC

Enter RESUME
Balance modes
55
Enter
SQC SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
Select run
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
3
BATCH NAME 0
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
RUN


Enter SQC
LIBRARY NAME.

Enter RESUME
Enter
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME SQC 1
TOLERANCE
TARE NO TARE Refer back to section 6.10 and enter all information required for a new setup.
MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
AUTO SAMPLE 0FF
AUTO PRINT OFF
BATCH NAME
Balance modes
56

errors.
Go Back
SQC SETUP
LIBRARY NAME
TOLERANCE
MEAN TARE VALUE
AUTO PRINT
BATCH NAME

LIBRARY NAME The current name you assigned should be displayed. Press the Enter button.
Display advances to SQC STARTUP with RESUME highlighted.
Enter
RESUME
NEW SETUP
Enter SQC SETUP

MEAN TARE VALUE OFF
Select run
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 3
VIEW BATCH HISTORY
RUN

button.
Balance modes
57

on the number of samples per test. The density table for water is included. If other liquids are used for pipette calibra-
tion, you must enter the liquids density in g/cc at current room temperature. Since all calculations are made within
the balance, it is also required that you know the atmospheric pressure which has to be entered. A printout can be
made which specifies all parameters of the test made.

PIPETTE
NAME.

advances to PIPETTE SETUP with TEST LIQUID G/CC highlighted. If a previous
Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
LIBRARY NAME P2
Test liquid
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
highlighted.
PIPETTE NAME
Enter H2O
OTHER
RETURN TO SETUP

ENTER TEMPERATURE CELSIUS Measure the temperature of water you will be using for Pipette measurements
25.000 25.000 in Celsius. A standard room temperature of 25 degrees Celsius has been pre-
entered in the balance. Enter the correct value.
H2O
OTHER
RETURN TO SETUP
IN CC.
Balance modes
58

ENTER LIQUID DENSITY IN CC
Enter the density value for the test liquid. The standard density for water has
Enter H2O
OTHER
RETURN TO SETUP
Enter PIPETTE SETUP

LIBRARY NAME P2
AUTO PRINT OFF
PIPETTE NAME
ATM
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE Select unit of atmospheric pressure measurement
MMHG
MBAR PRESSURE.
HPA
INHG

Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
LIBRARY NAME P2
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
PIPETTE NAME
Enter PIPETTE SETUP

LIBRARY NAME P2
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
Press the Enter button. The display advances to PIPETTE SETUP with AUTO
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
PIPETTE NAME
Balance modes
59
Enter
AUTO PRINT Set auto print on
ON
Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
LIBRARY NAME P2
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
PIPETTE NAME
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
Enter sample size
Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
LIBRARY NAME P2
Select pipette name
TEST LIQUID(G/CC)
BARO PRESSURE
0.9971
1.0ATM
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
PIPETTE NAME
Enter pipette name


Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
Select nominal
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
PIPETTE NAME
10
WHEAT
ML highlighted.
PIPETTE NUMBER 345
NOMINAL 0.00ML

ML
RETURN TO SETUP
Balance modes
60
Enter nominal value

Enter AUTO SAMPLE

PIPETTE SETUP
OFF
Select inaccuracy
AUTO PRINT
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
OFF
10
PIPETTE NAME
PIPETTE NUMBER
WHEAT
345
RACY.
NOMINAL 3.45ML
INACCURACY 2.00%

INACCURACY Enter the percentage of acceptable inaccuracy. This indicates the deviation of
2.000 2.000 all pipette samples (mean error). Press Enter button. The default setting is 2
percent. Display advances to IMPRECISION.
Enter AUTO PRINT

PIPETTE SETUP
OFF
Select imprecision
NUMBER OF SAMPLES
PIPETTE NAME
10
WHEAT
PIPETTE NUMBER
NOMINAL
345
3.45ML
SION.
INACCURACY 2.00%
IMPRECISION 2.00%

When placing samples in the vessel during pipette calibration, make sure to
continue the calibration to the end without significant pauses in between
each sample. If a significant amount of time has elapsed (30 seconds or
more) between samples, re-tare the balance before adding the next sample.
This is to eliminate errors introduced by evaporation.
Enter
PIPETTE SETUP
PIPETTE NUMBER 345
Taking samples
NOMINAL
INACCURACY
3.45ML
2.00%
IMPRECISION
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
0% 100% screen.
0.000
testing. If you are using water, use distilled water only.
Balance modes
61
When AUTO SAMPLE has been selected, it is not necessary to press the Enter
button for each sample. If the balance fails to advance to the next sample,
press the Enter button.
P1
05/26/99 03:11:03P
STATUS PASS
INACCURACY: 0.30%
NOMINAL: 3.45ML
3.525 2S
IMPRECISION:0.97%
3.492 S
3.458 M
3.391 2S
indicates the mean value in the center with standard deviation and 2 times
standard deviation above and below shown as lines across the screen.
Each sample is shown as a diamond shaped mark on the graph. A ten
sample set is shown.
Balance settings
62
7. Balance settings
SET BALANCE
READOUT
INTERFACE SETTINGS.
PRINT OPTION
SETUP GLP
SET TIME/DATE
AUTOCAL ENABLE
RESET
or SET BALANCE
RESET READOUTS
RESET RS232
RESET PRINT OPTION
RESET GLP function, select the function using the arrow buttons and press Enter button.
RESET ALL
Enter button.
RESET ALL when selected, will return the balance to factory default
settings.

When the balance is first turned on, you may want to adjust the balance's LCD display contrast and brightness
to suit your needs.
Enter MAIN MENU Enter the MAIN MENU and select CONTRAST and press Enter button.
CHANGE MODE
CHANGE UNITS Display advances to LCD CONTRAST / BRIGHTNESS ADJUST.
SET BALANCE
CUSTOM MENU
LIBRARY
CALIBRATION
CONTRAST

or
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS
Balance settings
63

This menu option enables you to set the balance averaging level, stability level, auto zero, and legal for trade
(LFT).

READOUT

5

Scroll to STABILITY LEVEL and press Enter button, STABILITY LEVEL
GOOD BEST FILTER is displayed. Stability level filter determines the variation range in
5 divisions for a given reading depending upon the filter setting. A setting of
zero (GOOD) permits the balance to respond to variations of .5 divisions. A
setting of (BEST) 10 sets the threshold to 3 divisions. Adjust to desired
setting and press Enter button.

AZT
OFF
1
3
There are 4 settings, OFF, 0.5, 1, and 3. The numbers represent display

AVERAGING LEVEL 5
LEGAL FOR TRADE OFF
Balance settings
64

This menu option enables you to set the balance communication parameters for the RS232 interface which
include: baud rate, data bits, parity and stop bit.

or INTERFACE
BAUD RATE
Setting baud rate
1200
4800
9600 Enter button.
RETURN
or INTERFACE
DATA BITS
Setting data bits
RETURN
or INTERFACE
PARITY
Setting parity
EVEN
0
1
RETURN
or INTERFACE
STOP BITS
Setting stop bits
RETURN
Balance settings
65

This menu option enables you to set various print features ON or OFF and include Auto Print, Data, Numeric
Data, Print Date, Print Time and Print Reference.

Enter button, display advances PRINT OPTION with AUTO PRINT OFF
highlighted.

OFF
CONTINUOUS
INTERVAL
STABLE DATA OFF
PRINT DATE OFF All of these features can be set ON or OFF. STABLE DATA, when set ON, prints
PRINT TIME OFF
PRINT REFERENCE OFF only when the reading is stable. NUMERIC DATA, when set ON, prints
when set ON, prints current time. PRINT REFERENCE, when set ON, prints the
value of the weight used as a reference to the printer.

OFF
Enter
Balance settings
66

This menu GLP (Good Laboratory Practices) options allows the entering of a Project Name, User Name, and
GLP Print Options which include: Date & Time, Balance ID, Project Name, User Name and Calibration all of which
can be set ON or OFF.

SETUP GLP
Enter button, display advances SETUP GLP with PROJECT NAME highlighted.
Enter
PROJECT NAME
Enter PROJECT NAME, the display advances to permit entering project
name.

Enter
USER NAME

USER NAME Specify the user name, and press Enter button. The display advances to GLP
PRINT OPTIONS. Press Enter, the display advances to GLP PRINT OPTIONS
with DATE & TIME highlighted.

DATE & TIME OFF
PROJECT NAME OFF
CALIBRATION OFF
RETURN

OFF
Enter
Balance settings
67


Enter button.
Enter
DATE TYPE MM/DD/YY
This option offers 6 arrangements of date styles to suit your needs. They are:
MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, YY/MM/DD, MM/YY/DD, DD/YY/MM, YY/DD/MM.
to SET DATE.
Enter
SET DATE This option permits entering the current date. Enter the SET DATE option. The
display advances to a new SET DATE display.
SET DATE
press the Enter button. The display advances to SETUP DATE/TIME with TIME
TYPE highlighted.
Enter
TIME TYPE
RETURN
Enter
Balance settings
68


SET TIME
was selected.

AM
PM
Select AM or PM as required. The display returns to the DATE TYPE. Press the
Go Back button to return to SET BALANCE menu, SET TIME/DATE is
displayed.


the Enter button.
ON AUTOCAL ENABLE.
OFF


PRINT CURRENT SETTINGS button. The balance wil print current settings out to a printer. If a printer is not
connected or improperly connected, the balance will display PRINT FAILED
after displaying PRINTING.
Balance settings
69
7.10 Lock out

Before using this sofware function, check the status of the hardware lock switch and Legal for Trade software
(see section 7.14). If the hardware switch is ON, and the Legal for Trade software is set ON (locked), you cannot
access the LFT LOCK software.

LOCK OUT
methods and balance Functions are displayed. Every item in each list can be
individually turned ON or OFF. These items when turned OFF will not be
Balance settings
70




RUN
SETUP CUSTOM MENU

OFF
Enter

FILLING SQC
Enter CUSTOM MENU To run a particular function, select RUN and press the Enter button.
RUN
SETUP CUSTOM MENU
Balance settings
71


READOUT
displayed.
READOUT SETUP Select LEGAL FOR TRADE, press Enter button.
LEGAL FOR TRADE

LFT DEFAULT TABLE
Set Balance Menu
Readout
Interface Unlocked
Print Option
Auto Print Unlocked
Print Data Unlocked
Print Time Unlocked
Setup GLP Unlocked
When LFT is turned ON, the last digit on the weight display has a white
colored block behind it. This signifies that the balance is in a legal for trade
operational mode and that the last digit should be ignored. The CENTER OF
ZERO is displayed only for LFT operation.
Balance settings
72

Access to the various menus can be disabled by setting the Lock switch located on the PC board inside the
balance to ON position. The Lock switch locks out certain menus when Legal For Trade is turned ON. The default
setting for the Lock switch is OFF.

For type approved balances consult local Weights and Measures officials to determine sealing method require-
ments.
Sealing the balance

Turn the display off and unplug the power cord.
On balances with a draft shield, slide the door open and remove the pan and cover plate.
On balances without a draft shield, remove the pan and cover plate.
Remove the protective cover seal.
The Lock switch is located to the left of the pan support hole.
Select the desired position on the Lock switch, seal and reassemble the balance.
Pan
Sealing Screw
On
/O
ff
Go
Ba
ck
He
lp
Pr
0% BA
int
SIC
WE
IG
HIN
G
>O
/T<
0.0 10
PR
ES
S G
<E RAM
NT S
00 0%
Cover Seal
ER
>
FO STA
R M BLE
EN
U En
ter
OHA
US >O
¨
/T<
Lead Seal
Cover Plate

73

8.1 RS232 interface
pressing PRINT.
The balance can be operated from a computer, as well as receive data such as displayed weight, weighing
mode, stability status, etc. The following sections describe the hardware and software provided with the balance


2 Data Out (TXD) Data output can be initiated in one of three ways: 1) By pressing PRINT;
3 Data In (RXD)
2) Using the Auto Print feature; 3) Sending a print command (P) from a
computer.
7 Ground
* External PRINT and/or TARE switches characters shown in the following table are acknowledged by the balance.
may be installed as shown in the diagram.
Invalid command response "ES" error indicates the balance has not
recognized the command. Commands sent to the balance must be termi-
nated with a carriage return (CR) or carriage return-line line feed (CRLF).
For example, a tare command should appear as shown in the adjacent
diagram. Data output by the balance is always terminated with a carriage
74 RS232 COMMAND TABLE
Command
blank if stable
? if unstable
mg GN N
g tael tical
kg tael custm
dwt tael Pcs
ct momme %
oz lb
oz t
Interval

1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
8 =
9 = maximum level

4 = dwt
5 = Carats
6 = Ounces
7 = Ounces troy
8 = Grains
9 = Taels Hong Kong
11 = Taels Taiwan
12 = Mommes
13 = Decimal Pounds
14 = Pounds-Ounces
combined
15 = Newton's
16 = tical
17 = Custom Units

g tael tical
dwt tael Pcs
ct momme %
oz lb
oz t
75

Command



set.
76
8.2 Printing data

Printing to an external printer or computer will occur each time the Print button is pressed unless the autoprint
feature is turned on, in which case, printing can occur in a continuous fashion at specified intervals or each time
a stable reading is achieved. When an external printer or computer is properly connected and the communication
parameters are set correctly, the display indicates PRINTING... If the external printer or computer is improperly con-
nected or the communication parameters are set incorrectly, PRINT FAILED is displayed. To clear the screen, press the
Go back button. Check computer/printer settings and connections.

TYPE= MM/DD/YY options set to ON, each printout starts with the date and time on the first
TYPE= 24 HOUR line.
12/01/99 16:00:00
READOUT
AZT LEVEL = 0.5d
GLP PRINT OPTIONS
DATE & TIME = OFF
BALANCE ID = OFF
PROJECT NAME = OFF
USER NAME = OFF
DIFFERENCE = OFF
PRINT OPTION
AUTO PRINT = OFF
INTERVAL= 0
STABLE PRINT = OFF
NUMERIC DATA = OFF
DATE= OFF
TIME= OFF
RS232 = 2400: NONE: 7 : 2
77

- - - - - SPAN CAL - - - - - -
12/01/99 1:00:00 PM
Bal Id 1234
Cal: 400.000g
Old: 400.000g
Dif: 0.000g
Wt. Ref...................................... USER
NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -

- - - - - LIN CAL - - - - - -
12/01/99 1:00:00 PM
Bal Id 1234
Cal: 400.000g
Old: 399.094g
Dif: 0.006g
Wt. Ref...................................... USER
NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -

12/01/99 1:00:00 PM When performing a Calibration Test with GLP turned on, a printout is
Bal Id 1234 automatically made after the calibration mass is placed on the pan.
Cal: 400.000g
Act: 400.004g
Dif: 0.004g
Wt. Ref......................................
USER NO 2056853
PROJ NO 100012
Name........................................
- - - - - END - - - - -
78

Pipette Results
When performing a Pipette Test with GLP turned on, a printout is available.
Library Name: WHEATON
The following sample printout is shown.
Pipette Number: 832
Water Temp(C): 25.0
Test Liquid Density(g/cc): 0.9971
INACCURACY
E%: 0.31%
E% Limit: 2.00%
Mean Value: 3.459ml
IMPRECISION
CV: 0.88%
CV Limit: 2.00%
Status: PASS
07/01/99
3.488
3.485
3.487
3.435
3.458
3.430
3.470
3.510
3.446
3.456
Operator:----------------------
79

9.1 Troubleshooting
weighing mode.
peripheral device.
serviced.



80

Error Codes List
Data Errors
Tare Errors
recalibration.
Calibration Errors
RS232 Errors
User Errors

must be serviced.
CheckSum Errors
81

or a malfunction has occurred in the balance due to hardware, software errors or misapplication. A typical message is
shown below.


Description US Part No. Global Part No.
Power Pack, 100/120 V ac US Plug (Cord set part of power pack) 490202-01 21202536
Power Pack, (Cord set required for UK, European and Australian) 490203-01 21202537
Cord Set, 230 V ac, UK Plug 76448-00 89405
Cord Set, 230 V ac, European Plug 76212-00 87925
Cord Set, 230 V ac, Australian plug 76199-01 88751
In-Use Display Cover Kit 80850042 80850042
9.6 Accessories
Description
20 g 49024-11 80780022
50 g 49054-11 80730028
100 g 49015-11 80780020
200 g 49025-11 80780023
500 g 49055-11 80780029
1 kg 49016-11 80780021
2 kg 49026-11 80780024
4 kg 49046-11 80780027
Security Device 470004-010 80850043

Density Determination Kit 470007-010 80850045
(Table Mount) 470009-010 80850048
RS232 Interface Cable, Blunt end (user defined) AS017-01 80850013
RS232 Interface Cable, IBM® - PC 25 Pin AS017-02 80850014
RS232 Interface Cable, (connects impact printer) 80500570 80500570
RS232 Interface Cable, IBM® - PC 9 Pin AS017-09 80850015
RS232 Interface Cable, Apple® llGS/Macintosh AS017-10 80850072
Printer SF42 SF42
Printer Cable SF42 80500570 80500570
Battery, Memory - 3 Volt Lithium ( Use BR2325, Ray O Vac or Panasonic) ----
82
9.7 Specifications
Admissible Ambient Conditions
Use only in closed rooms
Ambient Temperature range: 5 ºC to 40 ºC
Atmospheric humidity: 80% rh @ to 30 ºC
Voltage fluctuations: 15% +10%
Installation category: II
Pollution degree: 2
Power supply voltage: 12 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 12 VDC, 1A
Analytical Balances
Capacity (g) 62 110 210 100/210 *
Linearity (mg) (+) 0.2 (+) 0.2/0.5
Weighing units *** gram, milligram, ounce, ounce troy, carat, pennyweight, Hong Kong Tael, Singapore Tael, Taiwan Tael,
mommes, grain, tical, Newton, custom
Application modes Weighing, Parts Counting, Animal Weighing, Check Weighing, Percent Weighing, Filling, Gross-Net-
Tare Weighing
Features RS232 Port, Auxillary Display Port, GLP Protocol, Selectable Language, Display Text, Selectable Displayed
Information Settings, Selectable Environmental Settings, Selectable Auto-Print Settings, Integral Weigh
Below Hook, Contrast and Brightness Control, Protective In-Use cover
Stabilization time (s) 4
Calibration External / Internal
Display Type LCD Dot Matrix w/CCFL Backlight
Display Size (in/cm) 2.5 x 4.7 / 64 x 120
Pan size (in/mm) 3.5/9
Operating temperature range: Non LFT w/internal calibration 10°C to 40° C / 50°F to 104° F
w/o internal calibration 10°C to 30°C / 50°F to 86° F
Power requirements External Adapter, 100 -120 VAC 150mA, 220 - 240 VAC 100mA, 50/60 Hz
Pan size (in/cm) 3.5 / 9. diameter
Dimensions (WxHxD) (in/cm) 8.5 x 13.5 x 14.5 / 21.5 x 35.5 x 37
Net Weight (lb/kg) 12.5 / 5.7
Net Weight (lb/kg) InCal Models 14.8 / 6.7
*** Units availability is country dependent.

83
Precision Balances
Capacity (g) 210 410 510 610 100/410* 610 1500 2100 4100 6100 1000/4100* 4100** 6100** 8100**
Readability (g) 0.001 0.001/0.01 0.01 0.01/0.1 0.1
Repeatability (Std. dev.) (g) 0.0005 0.0015 0.0005/0.005 0.005 0.01 0.01/0.05 0.05
Linearity (g) (+)0.002 (+)0.002/0.005 (+)0.02 (+)0.04 (+)0.02/0.05 (+)0.1
Weighing units*** gram, milligram, kilogram, pound, ounce, ounce troy, carat, pennyweight, Hong Kong Tael, Singapore
Tael, Taiwan Tael, mommes, grain, tical, Newton, custom
Application modes Weighing, Parts Counting, Animal Weighing, Check Weighing, Percent Weighing, Filling, Gross-Net-
Tare Weighing
Features RS232 Port, Auxillary Display Port, GLP Protocol, Selectable Language, Display Text, Selectable Displayed
Information Settings, Selectable Environmental Settings, Selectable Auto-Print Settings, Integral Weigh
Below Hook, Contrast and Brightness Control, Protective In-Use cover
Stabilization time (s) 3
Operating temperature range: Non LFT w/internal calibration 10°C to 40°C / 50°F to 104° F
All others 10°C to 30°C / 50°F to 86°F
Calibration External / Internal
Power requirements External Adapter, 100 -120 VAC 150mA, 220 - 240 VAC 100mA, 50/60 Hz
Draft shield (in/cm) 10.2/25.9 None
Display Type LCD Dot Matrix w/CCFL Backlight
Display size (in/mm) 2.5 x 4.7 / 64 x 120
Pan size (in/cm) 4.7/12 Dia. 6.8 x 6.8/17.2 x 17.2 w/windshield 8 x 8/ 20.3 x 20.3 **
Dimensions (WxHxD) (in/cm) 8.5x13.5x14.5/21.5x35.5x37 8.5 x 4 x 14.5/21.5 x 10.1 x 37
Net Weight (lb/kg) 12.5 / 5.7 8.4 / 3.8 10/4.5 8.4 / 3.8 10 / 4.5
Net Weight (lb/kg) InCal Models 14.8 / 6.7 10 / 4.5 15.5/7 10 / 4.5 15.5 / 7
** Balances with Auto Cal are equipped with a 6.8 in. x 6.8 in. / 17.2 cm x 17.2 cm Pan and Windshield.
*** Units availability is country dependent.
A-1 Sieve analysis

basic sample is weighed first with its container weight tared. This sample weight is entered into the balance
manually and stored during the procedure. Then, each sieve is weighed in sequence and the weights are stored. After
the screening process, each sieve along with its retained sample, is weighed in sequence. The balance stores the

DIFF WEIGHING

SETUP highlighted.
84
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
Tare setup
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
DIFF RESULT WEIGH
VIEW RESULTS
RUN
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
Auto sample
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
DIFF RESULT WEIGH
VIEW RESULTS
RUN
highlighted.
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
Diff result
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
VIEW RESULTS
RUN


Enter
WEIGHT
PERCENT
RETURN
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
LIBRARY NAME DIFF4
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
NO TARE
NUMBER OF SAMPLES 1
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN

85
Enter
DIFF WEIGHING SETUP
TARE SETUP
AUTO SAMPLE
OFF
VIEW RESULTS
CLEAR ALL DATA
RUN
Enter
IN IT WT: FINAL WT:
3.426 sieves until all sieves have been weighed pressing the Enter button after
N/A NA 3.426 0.000
N/A N/A 3.962 0.000
SAMPLE #1

TARE WT:
INIT WT:
TARE WT:
FINAL WT:3.841
3.841 full sieve on the pan and press Enter button. Repeat weighing with remaining
sieves pressing the Enter button after each sieve. When the last sieve has
been weighed, the display indicates the final weight of all samples.
Enter N/A NA 3.426 3.839
N/A N/A 3.969 4.388
N/A N/A 3.962 4.377
SAMPLE #1

1 200.025 0.413 0.206
3 200.025 0.415 0.207
TOTAL 1.247 0.623
86

impregnation and record its weight. You must also know the density value of the oil to be used in immersing the part
before starting. In this procedure, you will follow the method for solid density measurements using water.
Enter
CHANGE MODE

LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE OFF
AUTO PRINT OFF
RUN
Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL OFF
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
O.000
0.0000
RETURN TO SETUP

Enter H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
OTHER
DRY WEIGHT O.000
RETURN TO SETUP
H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Enter dry weight
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL ON
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
200.040
0.0000
RETURN TO SETUP
87
H20
AUX LIQ & MODE
<-SELECTED
Enter oil density
OTHER
POROUS MATERIAL ON
DRY WEIGHT
DENSITY OF OIL
200.040
RETURN TO SETUP
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
<-SELECTED
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
RUN
sample.
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Auto print
LIQUID DENSITY
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
OFF
RUN
Enter
DENSITY SETUP
LIBRARY NAME D2
Testing the sample
SOLID DENSITY
LIQUID DENSITY
<-SELECTED
AUTO SAMPLE
AUTO PRINT
OFF
RUN
TEMP: 25.0
57.779 and Oil Content by Volume (P1).
P1: 535.58%
WEIGH IN AIR GRAMS/CC STABLE

LIMITED WARRANTY
Ohaus products are warranted against defects in materials and workmanship from the date of delivery through the duration
of the warranty period. During the warranty period Ohaus will repair, or, at its option, replace any component(s) that proves
to be defective at no charge, provided that the product is returned, freight prepaid, to Ohaus.
This warranty does not apply if the product has been damaged by accident or misuse, exposed to radioactive or corrosive
materials, has foreign material penetrating to the inside of the product, or as a result of service or modification by other than
Ohaus. In lieu of a properly returned warranty registration card, the warranty period shall begin on the date of shipment to
the authorized dealer. No other express or implied warranty is given by Ohaus Corporation. Ohaus Corporation shall not be
liable for any consequential damages.
As warranty legislation differs from state to state and country to country, please contact Ohaus or your local Ohaus dealer
for further details.
Ohaus Corporation
19A Chapin Road,
P.O. Box 2033
Pine Brook, NJ 07058, USA
Tel: (973) 377-9000,
Fax: (973) 593-0359

www.ohaus.com
*11780297*
P/N 11780297D © Ohaus Corporation 2002, 2003, all rights reserved.

2 PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

2 PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Ohaus Corporation

Balance Type/Waagentyp/Type de balance/Modelo de balanza/Tipo di biliancia Explorer and Voyager

Marked with: Directive Standard

EU 73/23 Low Voltage IEC1010-1 & EN60950:1992 Safety Regulations

EU 89/336, 92/31, 93/68 EN55022:1987 Emissions

EU 90/384 NAWI EN45501:1992 Non Automatic Weighing Instruments

James Ohaus John Enterline

Unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment are not permitted.

OVERVIEW OF CONTROLS ....................................................................................................................... 1

3. OPERATING YOUR BALANCE ................................................................................................................... 5

3.14.2 Solid Density Determinations ................................................................................................................... 27

5. CARE AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................................... 48

No. Designation Function

1 LCD display on off button.

2 Go Back button Permits going back in menus.

8 button When pressed, travels to the left through displays.

9 button When pressed, travels to the right through displays.

10 Enter button When pressed, accepts item on display.

11 Leveling feet Used to level the balance.

12 Leveling indicator Indicates leveling position of the balance.

2.1 Unpacking and Checking the Standard Equipment

• Remove packing material from the instrument.

DO NOT install the balance:

• Next to open windows or doors causing drafts or

• Near air conditioning or heat vents.

• Near vibrating, rotating or reciprocating equipment.

• Near magnetic fields or equipment that generates

• On an unlevel work surface.

• Allow sufficient space around the instrument for

ease of operation and keep away from radiating heat

2.3 Setting Up and Leveling the Balance

Position the balance in the intended operating location.

2.5 Installing Wind Shield

2.6 Connecting Power

The balance is now ready for operation.

WEIGHT MAIN MENU

Print Enter Print Enter

Weighing Display Screen Main Menu Screen

LCD Display On/Off

• AutoCalTM Automatic calibration (AutoCalTM) of the balance is accomplished by an internal

Calibration Menu Protection

• Using the arrow buttons, select CALIBRATION.

• Press or arrow button and select AUTOCAL.

• Clear the pan.

• Press Enter button, screen displays PLEASE WAIT,

CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY

Go Back 0% 100% • Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.

• Press Enter button.

• Press or arrow button and select SPAN.

MAIN MENU • Press Enter button.

CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS SET BALANCE

• Press any button, balance returns to weighing mode.

CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY

• Press Enter button.

• Place indicated mass value on pan. This will be one

NOTE: The samples shown on the displays were for an

• Press Enter button.

CHANGE MODE CHANGE UNITS MAIN MENU

CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY

• Press Enter button.

CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY

CUSTOM MENU CALIBRATION LIBRARY GRAMS STABLE

• Press arrow button to select MAIN MENU.